OOWWNNEERR''SS MMAANNUUAALL
OOppeerraattiioonn
MMaaiinntteennaannccee
SSppeecciiffiiccaattiioonnss
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of pub-
lication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at
any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be
carried out.
This manual applies to all HYUNDAI models and includes descrip-
tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.
As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply
to your specific vehicle.
F2
Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way.
Such modifications may adversely affect the per-
formance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI
and may, in addition, violate conditions of the lim-
ited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain mod-
ifications may also be in violation of regulations
established by the U.S. Department of
Transportation and other federal or state agencies.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injec-
tion and other electronic components.It is possible
for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio
or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic
systems. For this reason, we recommend that you
carefully follow the radio manufacturer’s instruc-
tions or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precau-
tionary measures or special instructions if you
choose to install one of these devices.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO
YOUR HYUNDAI
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR
TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
This manual includes information titled as DAN-
GER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE
WARNING
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
DANGER
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
CAUTION
NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not
avoided, could result in vehicle damage.
NOTICE
WARNING
F3
Your Hyundai vehicle may be equipped with technologies and services that use information collected,
generated, recorded or stored by the vehicle. Hyundai has created a Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy to explain
how these technologies and services collect use and share this information.
You may read our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy on the Hyundaiusa.com website at:
https://www.hyundaiusa.com/owner-privacy-policy.aspx
If you would like to receive a hard copy of our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy, please contact our Customer
Connect Center at:
Hyundai Customer Care
P.O. Box 20850
Fountain Valley, CA 92728
800-633-5151
consumeraff[email protected]
Hyundai's Customer Connect Center representatives are available Monday through Friday,
between the hours of 5:00 AM and 7:00 PM PST and Saturday and Sunday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM
PST (English).
For Customer Connect Center assistance in Spanish or Korean, representatives are available Monday
through Friday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM PST.
HYUNDAI VEHICLE OWNER PRIVACY POLICY
F4
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of
discerning people who drive HYUNDAIs.We are very proud of the advanced engineering and high-quality construc-
tion of each HYUNDAI we build.
Your Owner’s Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI.To become familiar with
your new HYUNDAI, so that you can fully enjoy it, read this Owner’s Manual carefully before driving your new vehi-
cle.
This manual contains important safety information and instructions intended to familiarize you with your vehicle’s con-
trols and safety features so you can safely operate your vehicle.
This manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance safe operation of the vehicle. It is rec-
ommended that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.HYUNDAI
dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
This Owner’s Manual should be considered a permanent part of your vehicle, and should be kept in the vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time. The manual should stay with the vehicle if you sell it to provide the next owner with
important operating, safety and maintenance information.
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA
Copyright 2018 HYUNDAI Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored
in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI
Motor America.
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that
do not meet HYUNDAI specifications.You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the
specifications listed on Page 8-7 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
CAUTION
F5
1.What are HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts?
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are the
same parts used by HYUNDAI
Motor Company to manufacture
vehicles. They are designed and
tested for the optimum safety, per-
formance, and reliability for our
customers.
2.Why should you use genuine
parts?
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are
engineered and built to meet rigid
manufacturing requirements.
Damage caused by using imita-
tion, counterfeit or used salvage
parts is not covered under the
HYUNDAI New Vehicle Limited
Warranty or any other HYUNDAI
warranty.
In addition, any damage to or fail-
ure of HYUNDAI Genuine Parts
caused by the installation or fail-
ure of an imitation, counterfeit or
used salvage part is not covered
by any HYUNDAI Warranty.
3. How can you tell if you are pur-
chasing HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts?
Look for the HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts Logo on the package (see
below).
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts export-
ed to the U.S. are packaged with
labels written only in English.
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are only
sold through authorized HYUNDAI
Dealerships.
GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS
F6
Introduction
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner's Manual can
assist you in many ways. To gain an
overview of the contents of your
Owner's Manual, use the Table of
Contents in the front of the manual.
The first page of each Chapter
includes a detailed Table of Contents
of the topics in that Chapter.
To quickly locate information about
your vehicle, use the Index in the
back of the manual.It is an alphabet-
ical list of what is in this manual and
the page number where it can be
found.
For your convenience, we have
incorporated tabs on the right-hand
page edges. These tabs are coded
with the Chapter titles to assist you
with navigating through the manual.
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. This Owner's
Manual provides you with many safe-
ty precautions and operating proce-
dures. This information alerts you to
potential hazards that may hurt you
or others, as well as damage to your
vehicle.
Safety messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
these hazards and what to do to
avoid or reduce the risks.
Warnings and instructions contained
in this manual are for your safety.
Failure to follow safety warnings and
instructions can lead to serious injury
or death.
Throughout this manual DANGER,
WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and
the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will
be used.
This is the safety alert sym-
bol. It is used to alert you to
potential physical injury haz-
ards. Obey all safety mes-
sages that follow this symbol
to avoid possible injury or
death. The safety alert sym-
bol precedes the signal words
DANGER, WARNING and
CAUTION.
HHOOWW TTOO UUSSEE TTHHIISS MMAANNUUAALL
DANGER indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious
injury.
DANGER
WARNING indicates a haz-
ardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
WARNING
SSAAFFEETTYY MMEESSSSAAGGEESS
F7
Introduction
FFUUEELL RREEQQUUIIRREEMMEENNTTSS
NOTICE indicates a situation
which, if not avoided, could result
in vehicle damage.
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-
mize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having an octane
number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research
Octane Number 91) or higher.(Do not
use methanol blended fuels)
To prevent damage to the engine
and engine components, never
add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified.
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for additional information.
Gasoline containing alcohol or
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol)
are being marketed along with or
instead of leaded or unleaded gaso-
line. For example, "E15" is a gasohol
comprised of 15% ethanol and 85%
gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 15% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Either of these fuels may
cause drivability problems and dam-
age to the fuel system, engine control
system and emission control system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
NOTICE
NOTICE
CAUTION indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
could result in minor or moder-
ate injury.
CAUTION
• Do not "top off" after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off
when refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
WARNING
F8
Introduction
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-
prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufac-
tured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. "E85" is not compati-
ble with your vehicle. Use of "E85"
may result in poor engine perform-
ance and damage to your vehicle's
engine and fuel system. HYUNDAI
recommends that customers do not
use fuel with an ethanol content
exceeding 15 percent.
To prevent damage to your vehi-
cle’s engine and fuel system:
• Never use gasohol which con-
tains methanol.
• Never use gasohol containing
more than 15% ethanol.
• Never use leaded fuel or leaded
gasohol.
• Never use "E85" fuel.
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
does not cover damage to the fuel
system or any performance prob-
lems caused by the use of "E85"
fuel.
Using Fuel Additives (except
Detergent Fuel Additives)
Using fuel additives such as:
- Silicone fuel additive
- Ferrocene (iron-based) fuel additive
- Other metallic-based fuel additives
may result in cylinder misfire, poor
acceleration, engine stalling, dam-
age to the catalyst, or abnormal cor-
rosion, and may cause damage to
the engine resulting in a reduction in
the overall life of the powertrain.
- The Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
Damage to the fuel system or per-
formance problem caused by the
use of these fuels or fuel additives
may not be covered by your New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful
manganese-based fuel additives
such as
MMT (
Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese Tricarbonyl
)
.
HYUNDAI does not recommend the
use of gasoline containing MMT.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and affect your emis-
sion control system.
The malfunction indicator lamp on
the cluster may come on.
Detergent Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
good quality gasolines treated with
detergent additives such as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline, which
help prevent deposit formation in the
engine.These gasolines will help the
engine run cleaner and enhance per-
formance of the Emission Control
System. For more information on TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline, please go
to the website (www.toptiergas.com).
NOTICE
NOTICE
F9
Introduction
For customers who do not use TOP
Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting or the
engine does not run smoothly, deter-
gent-based fuel additives that you
can purchase separately may be
added to the gasoline. If TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline is not available,
one bottle of additive added to the
fuel tank according to the mainte-
nance schedule is recommended
(refer to the Maintenance Schedule
in chapter 7).
Additives are available from your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer along
with information on how to use them.
Do not mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
• This vehicle should not be modi-
fied. Modification of your vehicle
could affect its performance, safety
or durability and may even violate
governmental safety and emis-
sions regulations.
In addition, damage or perform-
ance problems resulting from any
modification may not be covered
under warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire.For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
By following a few simple precau-
tions for the first 600 miles (1,000
km) you may add to the perform-
ance, economy and life of your vehi-
cle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is
needed to properly break-in the
engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
VVEEHHIICCLLEE BBRREEAAKK--IINN PPRROOCCEESSSS
VVEEHHIICCLLEE MMOODDIIFFIICCAATTIIOONNSS
F10
Introduction
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety sys-
tems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was travel-
ing.
These data can help provide a bet-
ter understanding of the circum-
stances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of per-
sonally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investiga-
tion.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
VVEEHHIICCLLEE DDAATTAA CCOOLLLLEECCTTIIOONN AANNDD EEVVEENNTT DDAATTAA RREECCOORRDDEERRSS
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Items contained in motor vehi-
cles or emitted from them are
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth
defects or reproductive harm.
These include:
• Gasoline and its vapors
• Engine exhaust
• Used engine oil
• Interior passenger compart-
ment components and materi-
als
• Component parts which are
subject to heat and wear
In addition, battery posts, termi-
nals and related accessories
contain lead, lead compounds
and other chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm.
WARNING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Safety System of Your Vehicle
Convenient Features of Your Vehicle
Multimedia System
Driving Your Vehicle
What To Do in an Emergency
Maintenance
Specifications, Consumer Information and
Reporting Safety Defects
Index
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Your vehicle at a glance
1
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior Overview..................................................1-2
Interior Overview ...................................................1-4
Instrument Panel Overview ..................................1-5
Engine Compartment .............................................1-6
1
1-2
EEXXTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Hood......................................................3-43
2.Windows................................................3-34
3. Sunroof* ................................................3-39
4.Wiper blade ..........................................7-33
5.Tires and wheels ..................................7-38
6. Headlamp..............................................7-65
7. Side repeater lamp* ..............................7-68
*: if equipped
OAD018001
■■
Front view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-3
Your vehicle at a glance
1
1. Door lock ..............................................3-12
2.Trunk......................................................3-44
3. Fuel filler door ......................................3-49
4. Side view mirror ....................................3-30
5. Antenna ..................................................4-2
6. Rear combination lamp ........................7-69
OAD018002N
■■
Rear view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-4
Your vehicle at a glance
IINNTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW
1. Door lock/unlock button ........................3-13
2. Side view mirror control switch..............3-32
3. Central door lock switch ........................3-14
4. Power window switches .........................3-35
5. Power window lock switch......................3-38
6. Driver position memory system ............3-18
7. Instrument panel illumination control
switch ....................................................3-53
8. Blind-spot Collision Warning (BCW)
system....................................................5-54
9. Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system ....5-100
10. ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
OFF button ..........................................5-44
11.Trunk lid release lever..........................3-45
12. Fuel filler door release lever ................3-49
13. Fuse panel ..........................................7-54
14. Steering wheel.....................................3-21
15. Steering wheel tilt/telescopic lever ......3-22
16. Light control/Turn signals ....................3-99
17.Wiper/Washer ....................................3-110
18. Seat........................................................2-4
19. Hood release lever ..............................3-43
20. Brake pedal..........................................5-39
21. Accelerator pedal
* : if equipped
OAD018003N
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-5
Your vehicle at a glance
1
1. Steering wheel audio controls* /
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology
hands-free controls*......................4-3, 4-4
2. Instrument cluster ..............................3-53
3. Horn....................................................3-22
4. Driver's front air bag ..........................2-45
5. Cruise control switch* ......................5-113
6. Key ignition switch* /
Engine start/stop button* ..............5-6, 5-9
7. Shift lever ........................5-16, 5-19, 5-26
8. Hazard warning flasher button..............6-2
9. Climate control system .........3-114, 3-123
10. Seat warmer*....................................2-19
11.Drive mode system ..............................5-51
12. Passenger's front air bag..................2-45
13. Glove box .......................................3-140
14. Parking brake....................................5-39
* : if equipped
OAD018004N
1-6
Your vehicle at a glance
EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
1. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-22
2. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-21
3. Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir...............7-27
4. Positive battery terminal ...................7-35
5. Negative battery terminal..................7-35
6. Fuse box...........................................7-53
7. Air cleaner.........................................7-29
8. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-23
9.Windshield washer fluid reservoir.....7-28
OAD078151N/OAD078100L
The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
■■
2.0 MPI
■■
1.6 T-GDI
Safety system of your vehicle
Important Safety Precautions..............................2-2
Always Wear Your Seat Belt ..........................................2-2
Restrain All Children.........................................................2-2
Air Bag Hazards.................................................................2-2
Driver Distraction ..............................................................2-2
Control Your Speed...........................................................2-3
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition............................2-3
Seats ........................................................................2-4
Safety Precautions ...........................................................2-5
Front Seats .........................................................................2-6
Rear Seats.........................................................................2-12
Head Restraints ...............................................................2-15
Seat Warmers...................................................................2-19
Seat Belts..............................................................2-21
Seat Belt Safety Precautions.......................................2-21
Seat Belt Warning Light ................................................2-22
Seat Belt Restraint System...........................................2-24
Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions...................2-30
Care of Seat Belts...........................................................2-32
Child Restraint System (CRS).............................2-33
Children Always in the Rear.........................................2-33
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) .................2-34
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-36
Air Bag - Advanced Supplemental Restraint
System ...................................................................2-43
Where Are the Air Bags?..............................................2-45
How Does the Air Bag System Operate?..................2-49
What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates................2-54
Occupant Classification System (OCS).......................2-55
Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision? ........2-60
SRS Care............................................................................2-65
Additional Safety Precautions .....................................2-66
Air Bag Warning Labels.................................................2-67
This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers.
It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work.
Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.
2
2-2
You will find many safety precautions
and recommendations throughout
this section, and throughout this
manual. The safety precautions in
this section are among the most
important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of accidents. Air bags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with air
bags, ALWAYS make sure you and
your passengers wear your seat
belts, and wear them properly.
Restrain All Children
All children under age 13 should ride
in your vehicle properly restrained in
a rear seat, not the front seat.Infants
and small children should be
restrained in an appropriate child
restraint. Larger children should use
a booster seat with the lap/shoulder
belt until they can use the seat belt
properly without a booster seat.
Air Bag Hazards
While air bags can save lives, they
can also cause serious or fatal
injuries to occupants who sit too
close to them, or who are not prop-
erly restrained.
Infants, young children, and shorter
adults are at the greatest risk of
being injured by an inflating air bag.
Follow all instructions and warnings
in this manual.
Driver Distraction
Driver distraction presents a serious
and potentially deadly danger, espe-
cially for inexperienced drivers.
Safety should be the first concern
when behind the wheel and drivers
need to be aware of the wide array of
potential distractions, such as
drowsiness, reaching for objects,
eating, personal grooming, other
passengers, and using cellular
phones.
Drivers can become distracted when
they take their eyes and attention off
the road or their hands off the wheel
to focus on activities other than driv-
ing.To reduce your risk of distraction
or getting into an accident:
• ALWAYS set up your mobile
devices (i.e., MP3 players, phones,
navigation units, etc.) when your
vehicle is parked or safely stopped.
IIMMPPOORRTTAANNTT SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS
Safety system of your vehicle
2-3
Safety system of your vehicle
• ONLY use your mobile device
when allowed by laws and when
conditions permit safe use.
NEVER text or email while driving.
Most states have laws prohibiting
drivers from texting. Some states
and cities also prohibit drivers from
using handheld phones.
• NEVER let the use of a mobile
device distract you from driving.
You have a responsibility to your
passengers and others on the road
to always drive safely, with your
hands on the wheel as well as your
eyes and attention on the road.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current condi-
tions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechani-
cal failure can be extremely haz-
ardous. To reduce the possibility of
such problems, check your tire pres-
sures and condition frequently, and
perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
2
2-4
Safety system of your vehicle
SSEEAATTSS
OAD035001N
Front seats
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height
(4) Lumbar support (Driver's seat)*
(5) Seat warmer*
(6) Head restraint
Rear seats
(7) Seat warmer*
(8) Armrest*
(9) Seatback folding
(10) Head restraint
* : if equipped
2-5
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Safety Precautions
Adjusting the seats so that you are
sitting in a safe, comfortable position
plays an important role in driver and
passenger safety together with the
seat belts and air bags in an acci-
dent.
Air bags
You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. Sitting too close to an air bag
greatly increases the risk of injury in
the event the air bag inflates.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) recom-
mends that drivers allow at least 10
inches (25 cm) between the center of
the steering wheel and their chest.
Do not use a cushion that
reduces friction between the
seat and the passenger. The
passenger's hips may slide
under the lap portion of the seat
belt during an accident or a
sudden stop. Serious or fatal
internal injuries could result
because the seat belt cannot
operate properly.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
air bag, take the following pre-
cautions:
• Adjust the driver's seat as far
to the rear as possible while
maintaining the ability to
maintain full control of the
vehicle.
• Adjust the front passenger
seat as far to the rear as pos-
sible.
• Hold the steering wheel by the
rim with hands at the 9 o'clock
and 3 o'clock positions to
minimize the risk of injuries to
your hands and arms.
• NEVER place anything or any-
one between the steering
wheel and the air bag.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place feet or legs on the
dashboard to minimize the
risk of leg injuries.
WARNING
2-6
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat belts
Always fasten your seat belt before
starting any trip.
At all times, passengers should sit
upright and be properly restrained.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in appropriate child
restraint systems. Adults and chil-
dren who have outgrown a booster
seat must be restrained using the
seat belts.
Front Seats
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat:
• NEVER attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov-
ing. The seat could respond
with unexpected movement
and may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an acci-
dent.
• Do not place anything under
the front seats. Loose objects
in the driver's foot area could
interfere with the operation of
the foot pedals, causing an
accident.
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
and proper locking of the
seatback.
• Do not place a cigarette
lighter on the floor or seat.
When you operate the seat,
gas may exit out of the lighter
causing a fire.
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat belt:
• NEVER use one seat belt for
more than one occupant.
• Always position the seatback
upright with the lap portion of
the seat belt snug and low
across the hips.
• NEVER allow children or
small infants to ride in a pas-
senger's lap.
• Do not route the seat belt
across your neck, across
sharp edges, or reroute the
shoulder strap away from
your body.
• Do not allow the seat belt to
become caught or jammed.
WARNING
2-7
Safety system of your vehicle
Manual adjustment (if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the levers located on the out-
side of the seat cushion. Before driv-
ing, adjust the seat to the proper
position so that you can easily con-
trol the steering wheel, foot pedals
and controls on the instrument
panel.
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rear-
ward:
1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment
lever and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place. Move
forward and rearward without using
the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
2
• Use extreme caution when
picking small objects trapped
under the seats or between
the seat and the center con-
sole.Your hands might be cut
or injured by the sharp edges
of the seat mechanism.
• Make sure that the seat is
locked in place after the
adjustment. If not, the seat
might move unexpectedly
resulting in an accident.
To prevent injury:
• Do not adjust your seat while
wearing your seat belt.
Moving the seat cushion for-
ward may cause strong pres-
sure on your abdomen.
• Do not allow your hands or
fingers to get caught in the
seat mechanisms while the
seat is moving.
CAUTION
OAD035002
2-8
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the seatback to
lock.)
Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protection of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you.During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger's
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger's neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
Safety system of your vehicle
OAD035003
NEVER ride with a reclined
seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of seri-
ous or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
Drivers and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
2-9
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Seat cushion height
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
• Push down on the lever several
times, to lower the seat cushion.
• Pull up on the lever several times,
to raise the seat cushion.
Power adjustment
(for driver's seat, if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion.
Before driving, adjust the seat to the
proper position so that you can easi-
ly control the steering wheel, foot
pedals and controls on the instru-
ment panel.
To prevent damage to the seats:
• Always stop adjusting the seats
when the seat has been adjust-
ed as far forward or rearward as
possible.
• Do not adjust the seats longer
than necessary when the engine
is turned off. This may result in
unnecessary battery drain.
• Do not operate two or more
seats at the same time.This may
result in an electrical malfunc-
tion.
NOTICE
OAD035004
NEVER allow children in the
vehicle unattended. Children
might push the adjustment
switch accidently and get
caught in the seat mechanisms
while the seat is moving.
WARNING
2-10
Safety system of your vehicle
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rear-
ward:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seatback angle
To adjust the seatback:
1. Rotate the top of control switch
forward or rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seat-
back reaches the desired position.
Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
OAD035005 OAD035006
NEVER ride with a reclined
seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of seri-
ous or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
Driver and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
2-11
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you.During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger's neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
Seat cushion tilt (1, if equipped)
To change the angle of the front part
of the seat cushion:
Push the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower
the front part of the seat cushion.
Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seat cushion height (2, if equipped)
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
Push the rear portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower
the height of the seat cushion.
Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Lumbar support (if equipped)
To adjust the lumbar support:
1.Press the front portion of the
switch (1) to increase support or
the rear portion of the switch (2) to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reach-
es the desired position.
OAD038007N OAD035008
2-12
Safety system of your vehicle
Seatback pocket (if equipped)
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front passenger's
seatback.
Rear Seats
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
• Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down
seatback while the vehicle is
moving. This is not a proper
seating position and no seat
belts are available for use.
This could result in serious
injury or death in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
• Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of
the front seatbacks. This
could allow cargo to slide for-
ward and cause injury or dam-
age during sudden stops.
WARNING
To prevent the Occupant
Classification System from mal-
functioning:
Do not hang onto the front pas-
senger's seatback.
WARNING
OAD035017
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and
injure occupants.
CAUTION
2-13
Safety system of your vehicle
2
To fold down the rear seatback:
1. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
2. Lower the rear head restraints to
the lowest position by pushing and
holding the release button (1) and
pushing down on the head
restraint (2).
3. Pull on the seatback folding lever
(1) located in the trunk.
4. Fold the seatback toward the front
of the vehicle.
5. To use the rear seat, lift and unfold
the seatback to the upright posi-
tion. Push the seatback firmly until
it clicks into place. Make sure the
seatback is locked in place.
When you return the seatback to
its upright position, always be sure
it has locked into position by push-
ing on the top of the seatback.
OAD035019
OAD038021N
OAD035022
2-14
Safety system of your vehicle
Armrest (if equipped)
The armrest is located in the center
of the rear seat. Pull the armrest
down by using the strap from the
seatback to use it.
If your car is not equipped with a rear
armrest, the rear cup holders are
located at the back of the center con-
sole.
Do not place objects in the rear
seats, since they cannot be
properly secured and may hit
vehicle occupants in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
WARNING
When returning the rear seat-
back from a folded to an upright
position, hold the seatback and
return it slowly. Ensure that the
seatback is completely locked
into its upright position by
pushing on the top of the seat-
back. In an accident or sudden
stop, the unlocked seatback
could allow cargo to move for-
ward with great force and enter
the passenger compartment,
which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING
Make sure the engine is off, the
shift lever is in P (Park), and the
parking brake is securely
applied whenever loading or
unloading cargo. Failure to take
these steps may allow the vehi-
cle to move if the shift lever is
inadvertently moved to another
position.
WARNING
OAD035023
2-15
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front and rear seats
have adjustable head restraints. The
head restraints provide comfort for
passengers, but more importantly
they are designed to help protect
passengers from whiplash and other
neck and spinal injuries during an
accident, especially in a rear impact
collision.
• Be careful when loading
cargo through the rear pas-
senger seats to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle interior.
• When cargo is loaded through
the rear passenger seats,
ensure the cargo is properly
secured to prevent it from
moving while driving.
• Unsecured cargo in the pas-
senger compartment can
cause damage to the vehicle
or injury to it's occupants.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident,
take the following precautions
when adjusting your head
restraints:
• Always properly adjust the
head restraints for all passen-
gers BEFORE starting the
vehicle.
• NEVER let anyone ride in a
seat with the head restraints
removed or reversed.
WARNING
•
Adjust the head restraints so
the middle of the head
restraints is at the same
height as the height of the top
of the eyes.
• NEVER adjust the head
restraint position of the dri-
ver's seat when the vehicle is
in motion.
• Adjust the head restraint as
close to the passenger's head
as possible. Do not use a seat
cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback.
• Make sure the head restraint
locks into position after
adjusting it.
OLF034072N
2-16
Safety system of your vehicle
To prevent damage, NEVER hit or
pull on the head restraints.
Front seat head restraints
The vehicle's front and passenger's
seats are equipped with adjustable
head restraints for the passengers
safety and comfort.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the head restraint:
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the head restraint:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the head restraint support.
2. Lower the head restraint to the
desired position (3).
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the head restraint
and seat cushion raised, the head
restraint may come in contact with
the sunvisor or other parts of the
vehicle.
NOTICENOTICE
OLF034015
ODH033105L
OAD035010
2-17
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Removal/Reinstallation
To remove the head restraint:
1. Recline the seatback (2) rearward
using the seatback angle lever/
switch (1).
2. Raise the head restraint as far as
it can go.
3. Press the head restraint release
button (3) while pulling the head
restraint up (4).
To reinstall the head restraint:
1. Put the head restraint poles (2)
into the holes while pressing the
release button (1).
2. Adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
3. Recline the seatback (4) forward
using the seatback angle lever/
switch (3).
OAD038011
■ Type A
OAD038012
■ Type B
OAD038013
■ Type A
OAD038014
■ Type B
2-18
Safety system of your vehicle
Rear seat head restraints
The rear seats are equipped with
head restraints in all the seating
positions for the passenger's safety
and comfort.
Adjusting the height up and down
(if equipped)
To raise the head restraint:
1. Pull it up to the desired position
(1).
To lower the head restraint:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the head restraint support.
2. Lower the head restraint to the
desired position (3).
Removal/Reinstallation
(if equipped)
To remove the head restraint:
1. Raise the head restraint as far as
it can go.
2. Press the head restraint release
button (1) while pulling the head
restraint up (2).
To reinstall the head restraint:
1. Put the head restraint poles into
the holes (3) while pressing the
release button (1).
2. Adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
ODH034111
OAD035018 OAD035018N
2-19
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Seat Warmers
Front seat warmers
(if equipped)
Seat warmers are provided to warm
the seats during cold weather.
To prevent damage to the seat
warmers and seats:
• Never use a solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol
or gasoline to clean the seats.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer.
While the engine is running, push
either of the switches to warm the dri-
ver's seat or front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
• Manual temperature control
Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
NOTICE
The seat warmers can cause a
SERIOUS BURN, even at low
temperatures and especially if
used for long periods of time.
Passengers must be able to feel
if the seat is becoming too
warm so they can turn it off, if
needed.
People who cannot detect tem-
perature change or pain to the
skin should use extreme cau-
tion, especially the following
types of passengers:
• Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients.
• People with sensitive skin or
who burn easily.
• Fatigued individuals.
• Intoxicated individuals.
• People taking medication that
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness.
WARNING
NEVER place anything on the
seat that insulates against heat
when the seat warmer is in
operation, such as a blanket or
seat cushion. This may cause
the seat warmer to overheat,
causing a burn or damage to
the seat.
WARNING
OAD038061N
OFF HIGH ( )
LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )
→
→
→
→
2-20
Safety system of your vehicle
• Automatic temperature control
The seat warmer starts to auto-
matically control the seat tempera-
ture in order to prevent low-tem-
perature burns after being manual-
ly turned ON.
If HIGH temperature is manually
selected again, the temperature
will be controlled automatically.
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
Information
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
Rear seat warmers (if equipped)
While the engine is running, push
either of the switches to warm the
rear seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position.
Information
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
i
i
OFF HIGH ( )
LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )
→
→
→
→
30 MIN
60 MIN
OAD035024
OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( )
→
2-21
Safety system of your vehicle
2
This section describes how to use
the seat belts properly. It also
describes some of the things not to
do when using seat belts.
Seat Belt Safety Precautions
Always fasten your seat belt and
make sure all passengers have fas-
tened their seat belts before starting
any trip. Air bags are designed to
supplement the seat belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they are not
a substitute. Most states require all
occupants of a vehicle to wear seat
belts.
SSEEAATT BBEELLTTSS
Seat belts must be used by ALL
passengers whenever the vehi-
cle is moving.Take the following
precautions when adjusting
and wearing seat belts:
• ALWAYS properly restrain
children under age 13 in the
rear seats.
WARNING
• NEVER allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat. If
a child age 13 or older must be
seated in the front seat, move
the seat as far back as possi-
ble and properly restrain them
in the seat.
• NEVER allow an infant or
child to be carried on an occu-
pant’s lap.
• NEVER ride with the seatback
reclined when the vehicle is
moving.
• Do not allow children to share
a seat or seat belt.
• Do not wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind
your back.
• Always wear both the shoul-
der portion and lap portion of
the lap/shoulder belt.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
twisted. A twisted seat belt
will not protect you properly
in an accident.
• Do not use a seat belt if the
webbing or hardware is dam-
aged.
• Do not latch the seat belt into
the buckles of other seats.
• NEVER unfasten the seat belt
while driving. This may cause
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
• Make sure there is nothing in
the buckle interfering with the
seat belt latch mechanism.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the
seat belt adjusting devices
from operating to remove
slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
2-22
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat Belt Warning Light
Seat belt warning light
(for driver's seat)
As a reminder to the driver, the seat
belt warning light will illuminate and
warning chime will sound for approx-
imately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch ON if the seat
belt is unfastened.
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 6 mph (9
km/h), the warning light will stay illu-
minated.
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 12 mph (20
km/h) the seat belt warning chime
will sound for approximately 100 sec-
onds and the corresponding warning
light will blink.
If you unfasten the seat belt while
driving under 12 mph (20 km/h), the
seat belt warning light will illuminate
until the seat belt is fastened.
If you unfasten the seat belt while
driving over 12 mph (20 km/h), the
seat belt warning chime will sound
for approximately 100 seconds and
the corresponding warning light will
blink.
OLMB033022
Damaged seat belts and seat
belt assemblies will not operate
properly. Always replace:
• Frayed, contaminated, or
damaged webbing
• Damaged hardware
• The entire seat belt assembly
after it has been worn in an
accident, even if damage to
webbing or assembly is not
apparent
WARNING
2-23
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat belt warning light
(for front passenger's seat)
As a reminder to the front passenger,
the front passenger's seat belt warn-
ing lights will illuminate for approxi-
mately 6 seconds each time you turn
the ignition switch ON regardless of
belt fastening.
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 6 mph (9
km/h), the warning light will stay illu-
minated.
If you continue not to fasten the seat
belt and you drive over 12 mph (20
km/h) the seat belt warning chime
will sound for approximately 100 sec-
onds and the corresponding warning
light will blink.
If you unfasten the seat belt while
driving under 12 mph (20 km/h) the
seat belt warning light will illuminate
until the seat belt is fastened.
If you unfasten the seat belt while
driving over 12 mph (20 km/h), the
seat belt warning chime will sound
for approximately 100 seconds and
the corresponding warning light will
blink.
2
OAD038025N
■ Type A
OAD038026N
■ Type B
The front passenger's seat belt
warning light may not properly
operate if the front passenger
does not sit properly in the seat.
WARNING
2-24
Seat Belt Restraint System
Seat Belt-Driver's 3-point sys-
tem with emergency locking
retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
Pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the metal tab (1) into the
buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle.
You should place the lap belt (1) por-
tion across your hips and the shoul-
der belt (2) portion across your
chest.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length after the lap belt
portion is adjusted manually so that it
fits snugly around your hips. If you
lean forward in a slow, easy motion,
the belt will extend and move with
you.
If there is a sudden stop or impact,
the belt will lock into position. It will
also lock if you try to lean forward too
quickly.
If you are not able to smoothly pull
enough of the seat belt out from
the retractor, firmly pull the seat
belt out and release it. After
release, you will be able to pull the
belt out smoothly.
NOTICE
Safety system of your vehicle
OHSS038101
OHSS038102L
2-25
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the
shoulder belt anchor to one of the
three different positions for maximum
comfort and safety.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so it lies across your chest
and midway over your shoulder near-
est the door, not over your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1).To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button
(2).
Release the button to lock the
anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure that it
has locked into position.
Rear Seat Belt – Passenger's 3-
point system with convertible
locking retractor
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency lock-
ing retractor seat belt and an auto-
matic locking retractor seat belt.
Convertible retractor type seat belts
are installed in the rear seat posi-
tions to help accommodate the
installation of child restraint systems.
Although a convertible retractor is
also installed in the front passenger
seat position, NEVER place any
infant/child restraint system in the
front seat of the vehicle.
OAD035027
Improperly positioned seat
belts may increase the risk of
serious injury in an accident.
Take the following precautions
when adjusting the seat belt:
• Position the lap portion of the
seat belt as low as possible
across your hips, not on your
waist, so that it fits snugly.
• Position one arm under the
shoulder belt and the other
over the belt, as shown in the
illustration.
• Always position the shoulder
belt anchor into the locked
position at the appropriate
height.
• Never position the shoulder
belt across your neck or face.
WARNING
2-26
Safety system of your vehicle
To fasten your seat belt:
Pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the metal tab into the
buckle. There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. When not securing a child
restraint, the seat belt operates in the
same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor
Type). It automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt
portion of the seat belt is adjusted
manually so that it fits snugly across
your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended
from the retractor to allow the instal-
lation of a child restraint system, the
seat belt operation changes to allow
the belt to retract, but not to extend
(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
Refer to the "Using a Child Restraint
System" section in this chapter.
Although the seat belt retractor
provides the same level of protec-
tion for seated passengers in
either emergency or automatic
locking modes, the emergency
locking mode allows seated pas-
sengers to move freely in their
seat while keeping some tension
on the belt. During a collision or
sudden stop, the retractor auto-
matically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
To deactivate the automatic lock-
ing mode, unbuckle the seat belt
and allow the belt to fully retract.
To release your seat belt:
Press the release button (1) in the
locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should
automatically draw back into the
retractor. If this does not happen,
check the belt to be sure it is not
twisted, then try again.
NOTICE
OHSS038103
2-27
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Pre-tensioner seat belt
(Driver and front passenger)
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's Pre-tensioner
Seat Belts (Retractor Pretensioner
and Emergency Fastening Device
System).The purpose of the pre-ten-
sioner is to make sure the seat belts
fit tightly against the occupant's body
in certain frontal collisions. The
Emergency Fastening Device
System may be activated in certain
crashes where the frontal collision is
severe enough, together with the air
bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor will
lock into position. In certain frontal
collisions, the pre-tensioner will acti-
vate and pull the seat belt into tighter
contact against the occupant's body.
(1) Retractor Pretensioner
The purpose of the retractor pre-
tensioner is to make sure that the
shoulder belts fit in tightly against
the occupant's upper body in cer-
tain frontal collisions.
(2) Emergency Fastening Device
System
The purpose of the Emergency
Fastening Device System is to
make sure that the pelvis belts fit
in tightly against the occupant's
lower body in certain frontal colli-
sions.
If the system senses excessive ten-
sion on the driver or passenger's
seat belt when the pre-tensioner sys-
tem activates, the load limiter inside
the retractor pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt.
OTL035053
• Always wear your seat belt
and sit properly in your seat.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
loose or twisted. A loose or
twisted seat belt will not pro-
tect you properly in an acci-
dent.
• Do not place anything near
the buckle. This may adverse-
ly affect the buckle and cause
it to function improperly.
• Always replace your pre-ten-
sioners after activation or an
accident.
• NEVER inspect, service,
repair or replace the pre-ten-
sioners yourself.This must be
done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not hit the seat belt assem-
blies.
WARNING
2-28
Safety system of your vehicle
The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents.Their locations are shown in
the illustration above:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner
3. SRS control module
4.Emergency Fastening Device
System
The sensor that activates the SRS
air bag is connected with the
pre–tensioner seat belts.The SRS
air bag warning light on the instru-
ment panel will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion, and then it should turn off.
If the pre-tensioner is not working
properly, the warning light will illu-
minate even if the SRS air bag is
not malfunctioning. If the warning
light does not illuminate, stays
illuminated or illuminates when
the vehicle is being driven, have
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
inspect the pre-tensioner seat
belts and SRS air bags as soon as
possible.
NOTICE
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt mechanism
deploys during a collision, the
pre-tensioners become hot and
can burn you.
WARNING
OLMB033040/Q
2-29
Safety system of your vehicle
2
• Both the driver's and front pas-
senger's pre-tensioner seat
belts may be activated in certain
frontal or side collisions or
rollovers.
• When the pre-tensioner seat
belts are activated, a loud noise
may be heard and fine dust,
which may appear to be smoke,
may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal
operating conditions and are not
hazardous.
• Although it is non-toxic, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation
and should not be breathed for
prolonged periods. Wash all
exposed skin areas thoroughly
after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were
activated.
Rear center seat belt
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the "CENTER" mark
must be used.
NOTICE
• Fasten your seat belt while
sitting properly in an upright
position to maximize the
effectiveness of the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt system.
• A pre-tensioner seat belt sys-
tem is designed to activate
only once. Replace the pre-
tensioner seat belt system, if
it was activated in an acci-
dent.
WARNING
OAD035028
2-30
Safety system of your vehicle
Additional Seat Belt Safety
Precautions
Seat belt use during pregnancy
The seat belt should always be used
during pregnancy. The best way to
protect your unborn child is to protect
yourself by always wearing the seat
belt.
Pregnant women should always
wear a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place
the shoulder belt across your chest,
routed between your breasts and
away from your neck. Place the lap
belt line so that it fits snugly and as
low as possible across the hips, not
across the abdomen.
Seat belt use and children
Infant and small children
All 50 states have child restraint laws
which require children to travel in
approved child restraint devices,
including booster seats. The age at
which seat belts can be used instead
of child restraints differs among
states, so you should be aware of the
specific requirements in your state,
and where you are travelling. Infant
and child restraints must be properly
placed and installed in a rear seat.
For more information refer to the
"Child Restraint Systems" section in
this chapter.
• A pregnant woman or a patient
is more vulnerable to any
imapcts on the abdomen dur-
ing an abrupt stop or accident.
If you are in an accident while
pregnant, we recommend you
consult your doctor.
• To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to an unborn
child during an accident, preg-
nant women should NEVER
place the lap portion of the
seat belt above or over the
area of the abdomen where
the unborn child is located.
WARNING
2-31
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat by a
child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards. Before
buying any child restraint system,
make sure that it has a label certify-
ing that it meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS
213. The restraint must be appropri-
ate for your child’s height and weight.
Check the label on the child restraint
for this information. Refer to the
"Child Restraint Systems" section in
this chapter.
Larger children
Children under age 13 and who are
too large for a booster seat must
always occupy the rear seat and use
the available lap/shoulder belts. A
seat belt should lie across the upper
thighs and be snug across the shoul-
der and chest to restrain the child
safely. Check belt fit periodically.
Children are afforded the most safe-
ty in the event of an accident when
they are restrained by a proper
restraint system and/or seat belts in
the rear seat. Always have the
LATCH system inspected by your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an
accident. An accident can damage
the LATCH system and may not
properly secure the child restraint.
If a larger child over age 13 must be
seated in the front seat, the child
must be securely restrained by the
available lap/shoulder belt and the
seat should be placed in the rear-
most position.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child's neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center
of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need
to be returned to an appropriate
booster seat in the rear seat.
ALWAYS properly restrain
infants and small children in a
child restraint appropriate for the
child's height and weight.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to a child and
other passengers, NEVER hold a
child in your lap or arms when
the vehicle is moving.The violent
forces created during an acci-
dent will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the interior of the vehicle.
WARNING
• Always make sure children
are wearing their seat belts
and that they are properly
adjusted before driving.
• NEVER allow the shoulder
belt to contact the child’s
neck or face.
• Do not allow more than one
child to use a single seat belt.
WARNING
2-32
Safety system of your vehicle
Transporting an injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
Consult a physician for specific rec-
ommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children)
should never attempt to use a single
seat belt. This could increase the
severity of injuries in case of an acci-
dent.
Do not lie down
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
To reduce the chance of injuries in
the event of an accident and to
achieve the maximum effectiveness
of the restraint system, all passen-
gers should be sitting up and the
front and rear seats should be in an
upright position when the car is mov-
ing.
A seat belt cannot provide proper
protection if the person is lying down
in the rear seat or if the front or rear
seats are in a reclined position.
Care of Seat Belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addi-
tion, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry.If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an acci-
dent.This should be done even if no
damage is visible. Additional ques-
tions concerning seat belt operation
should be directed to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• NEVER ride with a reclined
seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
• Riding with a reclined seat-
back increases your chance
of serious or fatal injuries in
the event of a collision or sud-
den stop.
• Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
2-33
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Children Always in the Rear
Children under age 13 must always
ride in the rear seats and must
always be properly restrained to min-
imize the risk of injury in an accident,
sudden stop or sudden maneuver.
According to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in
the front seat. Even with air bags,
children can be seriously injured
or killed. Children too large for a
child restraint must use the seat belts
provided.
All 50 states have child restraint laws
which require children to travel in
approved child restraint devices.The
laws governing the age or
height/weight restrictions at which
seat belts can be used instead of
child restraints differs among states,
so you should be aware of the spe-
cific requirements in your state, and
where you are travelling.
Child restraint systems must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commer-
cially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS 213).
Child restraint systems are generally
designed to be secured in a vehicle
seat by lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH sys-
tem in the rear seats of the vehicle.
Child restraint system (CRS)
Infants and younger children must be
restrained in an appropriate rear-fac-
ing or forward-facing CRS that has
first been properly secured to the
rear seat of the vehicle. Read and
comply with the instructions for
installation and use provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint.
CCHHIILLDD RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM ((CCRRSS))
Always properly restrain chil-
dren in the rear seats of the
vehicle.
Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front pas-
senger seat can be forcefully
struck by an inflating air bag
resulting in SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH.
WARNING
An improperly secured child
restraint can increase the risk
of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH
in an accident. Always take the
following precautions when
using a child restraint system:
• NEVER install a child or infant
restraint in the front passen-
ger's seat.
• Always properly secure the
child restraint to a rear seat of
the vehicle.
• Always follow the child
restraint system manufactur-
er's instructions for installa-
tion and use.
WARNING
2-34
Safety system of your vehicle
Selecting a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
When selecting a CRS for your child,
always:
• Make sure the CRS has a label
certifying that it meets applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS 213).
• Select a child restraint based on
your child’s height and weight.The
required label or the instructions
for use typically provide this infor-
mation.
• Select a child restraint that fits the
vehicle seating position where it
will be used.
• Read and comply with the warn-
ings and instructions for installation
and use provided with the child
restraint system.
Child restraint system types
There are three main types of child
restraint systems: rearward-facing
seats, forward-facing seats, and
booster seats. They are classified
according to the child's age, height
and weight.
Rearward-facing child seats
• Always properly restrain your
child in the child restraint.
• If the vehicle head restraint
prevents proper installation of
a child seat (as described in
the child restraint system
manual), the head restraint of
the respective seating posi-
tion shall be readjusted or
entirely removed.
• Do not use an infant carrier or
a child safety seat that
"hooks" over a seatback, it
may not provide adequate
protection in an accident.
• After an accident, have a
HYUNDAI dealer check the
child restraint system, seat
belts, tether anchors and
lower anchors.
NEVER install a child or infant
restraint in the front passen-
ger's seat.
Placing a rearward-facing child
restraint in the front seat can
result in SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH if the child restraint is
struck by an inflating air bag.
WARNING
2-35
Safety system of your vehicle
2
A rearward-facing child seat provides
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the child. The
harness system holds the child in
place, and in an accident, acts to
keep the child positioned in the seat
and reduce the stress to the neck
and spinal cord.
All children under age one must
always ride in a rearward-facing
infant child restraint.
Convertible and 3-in-1 child seats
typically have higher height and
weight limits for the rearward-facing
position, allowing you to keep your
child rearward-facing for a longer
period of time.
Continue to use a rearward-facing
child seat for as long as your child
will fit within the height and weight
limits allowed by the child seat man-
ufacturer. It's the best way to keep
them safe. Once your child has out-
grown the rearward-facing child
restraint, your child is ready for a for-
ward-facing child restraint with a har-
ness.
Forward-facing child restraints
A forward-facing child seat provides
restraint for the child's body with a
harness. Keep children in a forward-
facing child seat with a harness until
they reach the top height or weight
limit allowed by your child restraint’s
manufacturer.
Once your child outgrows the forward-
facing child restraint, your child is
ready for a booster seat.
OLMB033041 OAD035029
2-36
Safety system of your vehicle
Booster seats
A booster seat is a restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s seat
belt system. A booster seat positions
the seat belt so that it fits properly
over the lap of your child.
Keep your child in a booster seat
until they are big enough to sit in the
seat without a booster and still have
the seat belt fit properly. For a seat
belt to fit properly, the lap belt must
lie snugly across the upper thighs,
not the stomach. The shoulder belt
should lie snug across the shoulder
and chest and not across the neck or
face. Children under age 13 must
always ride in the rear seats and
must always be properly restrained
to minimize the risk of injury.
Installing a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
After selecting a proper child seat for
your child, check to make sure it fits
properly in your vehicle. Follow the
instructions provided by the manu-
facturer when installing the child
seat. Note these general steps when
installing the seat to your vehicle:
•
Properly secure the child restraint
to the vehicle.
All child restraints
must be secured to the vehicle with
the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or
with the LATCH system.
• Make sure the child restraint is
firmly secured. After installing a
child restraint to the vehicle, push
and pull the seat forward-and-back
and side-to-side to verify that it is
securely attached to the seat. A
child restraint secured with a seat
belt should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, some side-to-
side movement can be expected.
• Secure the child in the child
restraint. Make sure the child is
properly strapped in the child
restraint according to the manufac-
turer instructions.
Before installing your child
restraint system always:
• Read and follow the instruc-
tions provided by the manu-
facturer of the child restraint.
• Read and follow the instruc-
tions regarding child restraint
systems in this manual.
Failure to follow all warnings
and instructions could increase
the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH if an accident occurs.
WARNING
If the vehicle head restraint pre-
vents proper installation of a
child seat (as described in the
child seat system manual, the
head restraint of the respective
seating position shall be read-
justed or entirely removed.
WARNING
2-37
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Lower Anchors and Tether for
Children (LATCH System)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving and in an
accident. This system is designed to
make installation of the child restraint
easier and reduce the possibility of
improperly installing your child
restraint. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attach-
ments on the child restraint. The
LATCH system eliminates the need
to use seat belts to secure the child
restraint to the rear seats.
Lower anchors are metal bars built
into the vehicle. There are two lower
anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attach-
ments.
To use the LATCH system in your
vehicle, you must have a child
restraint with LATCH attachments.
The child seat manufacturer will pro-
vide you with instructions on how to
use the child seat with its attach-
ments for the LATCH lower anchors.
LATCH anchors have been provided
in the left and right outboard rear
seating positions.
Their locations are shown in the illus-
tration.There are no LATCH anchors
provided for the center rear seating
position.
A child restraint in a closed
vehicle can become very hot.To
prevent burns, check the seat-
ing surface and buckles before
placing your child in the child
restraint.
CAUTION
ODH033067
Do not attempt to install a child
restraint system using LATCH
anchors in the rear center seat-
ing position. There are no
LATCH anchors provided for
this seat. Using the outboard
seat anchors can damage the
anchors which may break or fail
in a collision resulting in seri-
ous injury or death.
WARNING
2-38
Safety system of your vehicle
The lower anchor position indicator
symbols are located on the left and
right rear seat backs to identify the
position of the lower anchors in your
vehicle (see arrows in illustration).
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.
Securing a child restraint with
the LATCH anchors system
To install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint in either of the rear outboard
seating positions:
1. Move the seat belt buckle away
from the lower anchors.
2. Move any other objects away from
the anchors that could prevent a
secure connection between the
child restraint and the lower
anchors.
3. Place the child restraint on the
vehicle seat, then attach the seat
to the lower anchors according to
the instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer.
4. Follow the child restraint instruc-
tions for properly adjusting and
tightening the lower attachments
on the child restraint to the lower
anchors.
OAD035032
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
Lower Anchor
Take the following precautions
when using the LATCH system:
• Read and follow all installa-
tion instructions provided
with your child restraint sys-
tem.
• To prevent the child from
reaching and taking hold of
unretracted seat belts, buckle
all unused rear seat belts and
retract the seat belt webbing
behind the child. Children can
be strangled if a shoulder belt
becomes wrapped around
their neck and the seat belt
tightens.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single
anchor. This could cause the
anchor or attachment to come
loose or break.
WARNING
2-39
Safety system of your vehicle
2
The recommended weight for the
LATCH system is under 65 lb (30
kg).
How to determine an appropriate
child restraint weight:
Child weight + Child restraint
weight < 65 lb (30kg)
Securing a child restraint seat
with "Tether Anchor" system
First secure the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchors or the seat
belt. If the child restraint manufactur-
er recommends that the top tether
strap be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether strap to the top tether
strap anchor.
Child restraint hook holders are
located on the package tray.
NOTICE
OAD038030N
Take the following precautions
when installing the tether strap:
• Read and follow all installa-
tion instructions provided
with your child restraint sys-
tem.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single
tether anchor. This could
cause the anchor or attach-
ment to come loose or break.
• Do not attach the tether strap
to anything other than the cor-
rect tether anchor. It may not
work properly if attached to
something else.
• Do not use the tether anchors
for adult seat belts or har-
nesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the
vehicle.
WARNING
• Always have the LATCH sys-
tem inspected by your author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer after an
accident. An accident can
damage the LATCH system
and may not properly secure
the child restraint.
2-40
Safety system of your vehicle
To install the tether anchor:
1. Route the child restraint tether
strap over the child restraint seat-
back.Route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between
the head restraint posts, or route
the tether strap over the top of the
vehicle seatback. Make sure the
strap is not twisted.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to
the tether anchor, then tighten the
tether strap according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions to
firmly secure the child restraint to
the seat.
3. Check that the child restraint is
securely attached to the seat by
pushing and pulling the seat for-
ward-and-back and side-to-side.
Securing a child restraint with
lap/shoulder belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child restraints must be secured to
a vehicle rear seat with the lap part
of a lap/shoulder belt.
Automatic locking mode
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emer-
gency conditions (emergency locking
mode), you must manually pull the
seat belt all the way out to shift the
retractor to the "Automatic Locking"
mode to secure a child restraint.
The "Automatic Locking" mode will
help prevent the normal movement
of the child in the vehicle from caus-
ing the seat belt to loosen and com-
promise the child restraint system.To
secure a child restraint system, use
the following procedure.
OAD035031
ALWAYS place a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
Placing a rear-facing child
restraint in the front seat can
result in serious injury or death
if the child restraint is struck by
an inflating air bag.
WARNING
OLMB033044
2-41
Safety system of your vehicle
2
To install a child restraint system on
the rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system on
a rear seat and route the lap/
shoulder belt around or through
the child restraint, following the
restraint manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
Be sure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted.
When using the rear center seat
belt, you should also refer to the
"Rear Seat Belt – Passenger's 3-
point system" section in this
chapter.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct "click" sound.
Information
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out.When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the "Automatic
Locking" (child restraint) mode.
i
NOTICE
OLMB033045
OLMB033097
2-42
Safety system of your vehicle
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible "clicking" or "ratch-
eting" sound. This indicates that
the retractor is in the "Automatic
Locking" mode. If no distinct
sound is heard, repeat steps 3
and 4.
5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the "Automatic Locking" mode
by attempting to pull more of the
seat belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot, the retractor is in the
"Automatic Locking" mode.
If your CRS manufacturer instructs or
recommends you to use a tether
anchor with the lap/shoulder belt,
refer to the previous pages for more
information.
When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position,
the retractor will automatically
switch from the "Automatic
Locking" mode to the emergency
lock mode for normal adult usage.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.
NOTICE
OLMB033098
If the retractor is not in the
"Automatic Locking" mode, the
child restraint can move when
your vehicle turns or stops sud-
denly. A child can be seriously
injured or killed if the child
restraint is not properly
anchored in the car, including
manually pulling the seat belt
all the way out to shift the rec-
tractor to the "Automatic
Locking" mode.
WARNING
2-43
Safety system of your vehicle
2
AAIIRR BBAAGG -- AADDVVAANNCCEEDD SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM
OAD035033
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Driver's front air bag
2. Passenger's front air bag
3. Side air bag
4. Curtain air bag
5. Driver's knee air bag
2-44
Safety system of your vehicle
This vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Air Bag
System for the driver's seat and front
passenger's seats.
The front air bags are designed to
supplement the three-point seat
belts. For these air bags to provide
protection, the seat belts must be
worn at all times when driving.
You can be severely injured or killed
in an accident if you are not wearing
a seat belt. Air bags are designed to
supplement seat belts, but do not
replace them. Also, air bags are not
designed to deploy in every collision.
In some accidents, the seat belts are
the only restraint protecting you.
AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time,
everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in
a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt
when the air bag inflates.
NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front
passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant
or child causing serious or fatal injuries.
ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the
safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older
must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.
All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright posi-
tion, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs com-
fortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked
and the engine is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during
an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.
You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.
Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. The U.S. National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends that drivers allow at
least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and
the chest.
WARNING
2-45
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Where Are the Air Bags?
Driver's and passenger's front
air bags
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) and lap/shoulder belts
at both the driver and passenger
seating positions.
The SRS consists of air bags which
are located in the center of the steer-
ing wheel, in the driver's side lower
crash pad below the steering wheel
column and the passenger's side
front panel pad above the glove box.
The air bags are labeled with the let-
ters "AIR BAG" embossed on the
pad covers.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and front passen-
gers with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt system
alone. The SRS uses sensors to
gather information about the driver's
and front passenger's seat belt
usage and impact severity.
The seat belt buckle sensors deter-
mine if the driver and front passen-
ger's seat belts are fastened. These
sensors provide the ability to control
the SRS deployment based on
whether or not the seat belts are fas-
tened, and how severe the impact is.
OAD038034N
■ Driver's front air bag
OAD035035
■ Driver's knee air bag
OAD038039N
■ Passenger's front air bag
2-46
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation within
two levels. A first stage level is pro-
vided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
According to the impact severity, and
seat belt usage, the SRS Control
Module (SRSCM) controls the air
bag inflation.Failure to properly wear
seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
Safety system of your vehicle
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
front air bags, take the following
precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
• Move your seat as far back as
possible from front air bags,
while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
• Never lean against the door or
center console.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place their feet or legs
on the dashboard.
• No objects (such as crash pad
cover, cellular phone holder,
cup holder, perfume or stick-
ers) should be placed over or
near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, windshield glass, and
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box.
Such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.
• Do not attach any objects on
front windshield and inside
mirror.
WARNING
2-47
Safety system of your vehicle
Side air bags
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
air bag in each front seat.
The purpose of the air bag is to pro-
vide the vehicle's driver and the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt
alone.
The side air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity.
The side and curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle may deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
The side air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact or rollover
situations.
2
OAD035040
OAD035041
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies
onto doors, put their arms on
the doors, stretch their arms
out of the window, or place
objects between the doors
and seats.
• Hold the steering wheel at the
9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi-
tions, to minimize the risk of
injuries to your hands and
arms.
• Do not use any accessory
seat covers.This could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness
of the system.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself. Also, do not
attach any objects around the
area the air bag inflates such
as the door, side door glass,
front and rear pillar.
• Do not place any objects
between the door and the
seat. They may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
air bag inflates.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
side air bag, take the following
precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
WARNING
2-48
Safety system of your vehicle
Curtain air bags
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect
the heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occu-
pants in certain side impact colli-
sions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity.
The side and curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle may deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
The curtain air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact or rollover
situations.
• Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side air
bags.
• Do not put any objects
between the side airbag label
and seat cushion. It could
cause harm if the vehicle is in
a crash severe enough to
cause the air bags to deploy.
• Do not cause impact to the
doors when the ignition
switch is in the ON position or
this may cause the side air
bags to inflate.
• If the seat or seat cover is
damaged, have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OAD035042
OAD035043
2-49
Safety system of your vehicle
2
How Does the Air Bag System
Operate?
The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5.Retractor pre-tensioner assem-
blies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
8. Front impact sensors
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
curtain air bags, take the follow-
ing precautions:
• All seat occupants must wear
seat belts at all times to help
keep occupants positioned
properly.
• Properly secure child
restraints as far away from the
door as possible.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag.Also, do not attach
any objects around the area
the air bag inflates such as
the door, side door glass,
front and rear pillar, roof side
rail.
• Do not hang other objects
except clothes, especially
hard or breakable objects. In
an accident, it may cause
vehicle damage or personal
injury.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies
onto doors, put their arms on
the doors, stretch their arms
out of the window, or place
objects between the doors
and seats.
• Do not open or repair the side
curtain air bags.
WARNING
OAD035074N
2-50
Safety system of your vehicle
9. Side impact sensors
10. Side pressure sensors
11. Driver's knee air bag module
12. Emergency Fastening Device
System
13. Occupant classification system
The SRSCM (Supplemental
Restraint System Control Module)
continually monitors all SRS compo-
nents while the ignition switch is in
the ON position to determine if a
crash impact is severe enough to
require air bag deployment or pre-
tensioner seat belt deployment.
SRS warning light
The SRS (Supplement Restraint
System) air bag warning light on the
instrument panel displays the air bag
symbol depicted in the illustration.
The system checks the air bag elec-
trical system for malfunctions. The
light indicates that there is a potential
malfunction with your air bag system,
which could include your side and
curtain air bags used for rollover pro-
tection.
If your SRS malfunctions, the
air bag may not inflate properly
during an accident increasing
the risk of serious injury or
death.
If any of the following condi-
tions occur, your SRS is mal-
functioning:
• The light does not turn on for
approximately six seconds
when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
• The light stays on after illumi-
nating for approximately six
seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the
engine is running.
Have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer inspect the SRS as soon
as possible if any of these con-
ditions occur.
WARNING
2-51
Safety system of your vehicle
2
During a frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle's deceleration. If
the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will inflate
the front air bags.
The front air bags help protect the
driver and front passenger by
responding to frontal impacts in
which seat belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When need-
ed, the side air bags help provide
protection in the event of a side
impact or rollover.
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
• Air bags inflate in the event of cer-
tain frontal or side collisions to help
protect the occupants from serious
physical injury.
• Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a
collision, its direction, etc. These
two factors determine whether the
sensors produce an electronic
deployment/ inflation signal.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.It is
virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an acci-
dent.It is much more likely that you
will simply see the deflated air
bags hanging out of their storage
compartments after the collision.
• In addition to inflating in certain
side collisions, vehicles equipped
with a rollover sensor, side and
curtain air bags will inflate if the
sensing system detects a rollover.
When a rollover is detected, side
and curtain air bags will remain
inflated longer to help provide pro-
tection from ejection, especially
when used in conjunction with the
seat belts.
• To help provide protection, the air
bags must inflate rapidly. The
speed of air bag inflation is a con-
sequence of extremely short time
in which to inflate the air bag
between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occu-
pant impacts those structures.This
speed of inflation reduces the risk
of serious or life-threatening
injuries and is thus a necessary
part of air bag design.
However, the rapid air bag inflation
can also cause injuries which can
include facial abrasions, bruises
and broken bones because the
inflation speed also causes the air
bags to expand with a great deal of
force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the air
bag can cause fatal injuries, espe-
cially if the occupant is positioned
excessively close to the air bag.
2-52
Safety system of your vehicle
You can take steps to help reduce
the risk of being injured by an inflat-
ing air bag.The greatest risk is sitting
too close to the air bag. An air bag
needs about 10 inches (25 cm) of
space to inflate. NHTSA recom-
mends that drivers allow at least 10
inches (25 cm) between the center of
the steering wheel and the chest.
When the SRSCM detects a suffi-
ciently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically
deploy the front air bags.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
air bag, take the following pre-
cautions:
• NEVER place a child restraint
in the front passenger seat.
Always properly restrain chil-
dren under age 13 in the rear
seats of the vehicle.
• Adjust the front passenger's
and driver's seats as far to the
rear as possible while allow-
ing you to maintain full con-
trol of the vehicle.
• Hold the steering wheel with
hands at the 9 o'clock and 3
o'clock positions.
• Never place anything or any-
one between the air bag and
the seat occupant.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place their feet or legs
on the dashboard.
WARNING
OHM039102N
■ Driver’s front air bag (1)
2-53
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
ed directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver or the front passen-
ger forward motion, reducing the risk
of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating,
enabling the driver to maintain for-
ward visibility and the ability to steer
or operate other controls.
OHM039103N
■ Driver’s front air bag (2)
OHM039104N
■ Driver’s front air bag (3)
OLMB033057
■ Passenger’s front air bag
To prevent objects from becom-
ing dangerous projectiles when
the passenger's air bag inflates:
• Do not install or place any
objects (drink holder, CD
holder, stickers, etc.) on the
front passenger's panel above
the glove box where the pas-
senger's air bag is located.
• Do not install a container of
liquid air freshener near the
instrument cluster or on the
instrument panel surface.
WARNING
2-54
Safety system of your vehicle
What to Expect After an Air
Bag Inflates
After a frontal or side air bag inflates,
it will deflate very quickly. Air bag
inflation will not prevent the driver
from seeing out of the windshield or
being able to steer. Curtain air bags
may remain partially inflated for
some time after they deploy.
Noise and smoke from inflating
air bag
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and may produce
smoke and powder in the air inside of
the vehicle. This is normal and is a
result of the ignition of the air bag
inflator. After the air bag inflates, you
may feel substantial discomfort in
breathing because of the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and
the air bag, as well as from breathing
the smoke and powder. The powder
may aggravate asthma for some
people. If you experience breathing
problems after an air bag deploy-
ment, seek medical attention imme-
diately.
Though the smoke and powder are
nontoxic, they may cause irritation to
the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and seek
medical attention if the symptoms
persist.
After an air bag inflates, take
the following precautions:
• Open your windows and
doors as soon as possible
after impact to reduce pro-
longed exposure to the smoke
and powder released by the
inflating air bag.
• Do not touch the air bag stor-
age area's internal compo-
nents immediately after an air
bag has inflated. The parts
that come into contact with an
inflating air bag may be very
hot.
WARNING
• Always wash exposed skin
areas thoroughly with cold
and mild soap.
• Always have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer replace the
air bag immediately after
deployment. Air bags are
designed to be used only
once.
2-55
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Occupant Classification
System (OCS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) in the front passenger's seat.
Main components of the
Occupant Classification System
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion.
• Electronic system to determine
whether the passenger air bag
systems should be activated or
deactivated.
• An indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicating the front passen-
ger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag indi-
cator light is interconnected with
the OCS.
The OCS is designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated front
passenger and determine if the pas-
senger's front air bag should be
enabled (may inflate) or not.
The purpose is to help reduce the
risk of injury or death from an inflat-
ing air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by
requiring the air bag to be automati-
cally turned OFF.
For example, if a child restraint of the
type specified in the regulations is on
the seat, the occupant classification
sensor can detect it and cause the
air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occu-
pants who are properly seated and
wearing the seat belt properly,
should not cause the passenger air
bag to be automatically turned OFF.
For small adults it may be turned
OFF, however, if the occupant does
not sit in the seat properly (for exam-
ple, by not sitting upright, by sitting
on the edge of the seat, or by other-
wise being out of position), this could
cause the sensor to turn the air bag
OFF.
You will find the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator on the center
fascia panel.This system detects the
conditions 1-4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
OAD038037N
■ Type A
OAD038080N
■ Type B
2-56
Safety system of your vehicle
Always be sure that you and all vehi-
cle occupants are seated properly
and wearing the seat belt properly for
the most effective protection by the
air bag and the seat belt.
The OCS may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can affect the classification system.
These include:
• Failing to sit in an upright position.
• Leaning against the door or center
console.
• Sitting towards the sides of the
front of the seat.
• Putting their legs on the dashboard
or resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
• Wearing the seat belt improperly.
• Reclining the seatback.
• Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear
or hip protection wear.
• Putting an additional thick cushion
on the seat.
• Putting electrical devices (e.g.
notebook, satellite radio) on the
seat with inverter charging.
Condition and operation in the front passenger Occupant Classification
System
Condition detected by the
occupant classification system
Indicator/Warning light Devices
"PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF"
indicator light
SRS
warning light
Front passenger
air bag
1. Adult *
1
Off Off Activated
2. Infant *
2
or child restraint
system with 12 months old *
3
*
4
On Off Deactivated
3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated
4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated
*
1
The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front
passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique
and posture.
*
2
Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has out-
grown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize
him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.
*
3
Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
*
4
The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12 months
to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat.This is
a normal condition.
2-57
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passenger’s seat when it is unoccupied by a
passenger adversely affects the OCS.To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:
WARNING
OVQ036013NB
OLMB033100
OLMB033101
OLMB033103
OLMB033102
OLMB033104
• NEVER put a heavy load
in the front seat or seat-
back pocket, or hang any
items on the front pas-
senger seat.
• NEVER place your feet on
the front passenger seat-
back.
• NEVER sit with your hips
shifted towards the front
of the seat.
• NEVER ride with the seat-
back reclined when the
vehicle is moving.
• NEVER place your feet or
legs on the dashboard.
• NEVER lean on the door
or center console or sit
on one side of the front
passenger seat.
2-58
Safety system of your vehicle
ODH035900K
ODH035901K
ODH035902K
ODH035903K
• Do not sit on the passen-
ger seat wearing heavily
padded clothes such as
ski wear and hip protec-
tor.
• Do not use car seat
accessories such as thick
blankets and cushions
which cover up the car
seat surface.
• Do not place electronic
devices such as laptops,
DVD player, or conductive
materials such as water
bottles on the passenger
seat.
• Do not use electronic
devices such as laptops
and satellite radios which
use inverter chargers.
• If large quantity of liquid
has been spilled on the
passenger seat, the air
bag warning light may
illuminate or malfunction.
Therefore, make sure the
seat has been completely
dried before driving the
vehicle.
• Do not place sharp objects on the front passenger seat.These may damage the occupant detection sys-
tem, if they puncture the seat cushion.
• Do not place any items under the front passenger seat.
• When changing or replacing the seat or seat cover, use original items only. The OCS has been devel-
oped based on using original HYUNDAI car seats only. Altering or changing the authentic parts may
result in system malfunction and increase risk of injury when in collision. Any of the above could inter-
fere with the proper operation of the OCS sensor thereby increasing the risk of an injury in an accident.
2-59
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Proper seated position for OCS
If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator is on when an adult is seat-
ed in the front passenger seat, place
the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF
position and ask the passenger to sit
properly (sitting upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor). Restart
the engine and have the person
remain in that position.This will allow
the system to detect the person and
to enable the passenger air bag. If
the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator is still on, ask the passen-
ger to move to the rear seat.
The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator illuminates for approxi-
mately 4 seconds after the ignition
switch is in the ON position or
after the engine is started. If the
front passenger seat is occupied,
the OCS will then classify the front
passenger after several more sec-
onds.
Do Not Install a Child Restraint
in the Front Passenger's Seat
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the OCS, never install
a child restraint in the front passen-
ger's seat. An inflating air bag can
forcefully strike a child or child
restraint resulting in serious or fatal
injury.
NOTICE
B990A01O
Never allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front passenger
seat when the "PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF" indicator is illu-
minated. During a collision, the
air bag will not inflate if the indi-
cator is illuminated. Have your
passenger reposition himself in
the seat. If the "PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF" indicator
remains illuminated after the
passenger repositions himself
properly and the vehicle is
restarted, have the passenger
move to the rear seat because
the air bag will not inflate.
WARNING
1JBH3051
2-60
Safety system of your vehicle
Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off
in a Collision?
There are certain types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional pro-
tection. These include rear impacts,
second or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts. Damage to the vehi-
cle indicates a collision energy
absorption, and is not an indicator of
whether or not an air bag should
have inflated.
Air bag collision sensors
• NEVER place a rear-facing or
front-facing child restraint in
the front passenger's seat of
the vehicle.
• An inflating frontal air bag
could forcefully strike a child
resulting in serious injury or
death.
• Always properly restrain chil-
dren in an appropriate child
restraint in the rear seat of the
vehicle.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of an air bag
deploying unexpectedly and
causing serious injury or death:
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bags or sensors are
installed.
• Do not perform maintenance
on or around the air bag sen-
sors.If the location or angle of
the sensors is altered, the air
bags may deploy when they
should not or may not deploy
when they should.
• Do not install bumper guards
or replace the bumper with a
non-genuine HYUNDAI parts.
This may adversely affect the
collision and air bag deploy-
ment performance.
• Place the ignition switch in
the LOCK/OFF or ACC posi-
tion when the vehicle is being
towed to prevent inadvertent
air bag deployment.
• Have all air bag repairs con-
ducted by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
2-61
Safety system of your vehicle
2
1. SRS control module/
Rollover sensor
2. Front impact sensor
3. Side pressure sensor
4. Side impact sensor
OAD038044/OAD038055N/OAD038056N/OAD035057/OAD035058
2-62
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags and the driver’s knee
air bag are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the the
severity of impact of the front colli-
sion.
Side and curtain air bags
Side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the severity of impact
resulting from a side impact collision.
Although the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s air bags are designed to
inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of col-
lisions if the front impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact. Side and
curtain air bags are designed to
inflate only in side impact collisions
or rollover situations, but they may
inflate in other collisions if the side
impact sensors detect a sufficient
impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy.Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.
OAD038059N
OAD038045N
OAD035046
2-63
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Air bag non-inflation conditions
In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags
are designed not to deploy in such
cases because they may not provide
benefits beyond the protection of the
seat belts.
Front air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because
occupants are moved backward by
the force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not provide
any additional benefit.
Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occu-
pants move in the direction of the
collision, and thus in side impacts,
front air bag deployment would not
provide additional occupant protec-
tion.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate depending on the severi-
ty of impact.
OAD038049NOAD038048N
OAD038047N
2-64
Safety system of your vehicle
In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would
not be able to provide any additional
benefit, and thus the sensors may
not deploy any air bags.
Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehicle
causing it to "ride" under a vehicle
with a higher ground clearance. Air
bags may not inflate in this "under-
ride" situation because deceleration
forces that are detected by sensors
may be significantly reduced by such
"underride" collisions.
Front air bags may not inflate in
rollover accidents because air bag
deployment could not provide protec-
tion to the occupants.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate when the vehicle is rolled
over by a side impact collision.
ODH033076 OLF034057OAD038050N
2-65
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated and the colli-
sion energy is absorbed by the vehi-
cle structure.
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
free and there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illumi-
nate when the ignition switch is in the
ON position, or continuously remains
on, have your vehicle immediately
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel, the
front passenger's panel, front seats
and roof rails must be performed by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Improper handling of the SRS sys-
tem may result in serious personal
injury.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death, take the follow-
ing precautions:
• Do not attempt to modify or
disconnect the SRS compo-
nents or wiring, including the
addition of any kind of badges
to the pad covers or modifica-
tions to the body structure.
• Do not place objects over or
near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, or the front passen-
ger's panel above the glove
box.
• Clean the air bag pad covers
with a soft cloth moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and
proper deployment of the sys-
tem.
• Always have inflated air bags
replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
OAD038051N
2-66
Safety system of your vehicle
Additional Safety Precautions
Passengers should not move out
of or change seats while the vehi-
cle is moving. A passenger who is
not wearing a seat belt during a
crash or emergency stop can be
thrown against the inside of the vehi-
cle, against other occupants, or be
ejected from the vehicle.
Do not use any accessories on
seat belts. Devices claiming to
improve occupant comfort or reposi-
tion the seat belt can reduce the pro-
tection provided by the seat belt and
increase the chance of serious injury
in a crash
Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the
supplemental restraint system sens-
ing components or side air bags.
Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the opera-
tion of the supplemental restraint
system sensing components and
wiring harnesses.
Do not cause impact to the doors.
Impact to the doors when the ignition
switch is in the ON position may
cause the air bags to inflate.
Modifications to accommodate
disabilities. If you require modifica-
tion to your vehicle to accommodate
a disability, contact the HYUNDAI
Customer Connect Center at 800-
633-5151.
Adding equipment to or modify-
ing your air bag equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by chang-
ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys-
tem, front end or side sheet metal or
ride height, this may affect the opera-
tion of your vehicle's air bag system.
• If components of the air bag
system must be discarded, or
if the vehicle must be
scrapped, certain safety pre-
cautions must be observed.
Consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for the nec-
essary information. Failure to
follow these precautions
could increase the risk of per-
sonal injury.
2-67
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Air Bag Warning Labels
OAD038052N/OAD035053N
Air bag warning labels, required by the U.S.National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to
alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system. Be sure to read all of the information about
the air bags that are installed on your vehicle in this Owners Manual.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Accessing Your Vehicle.........................................3-3
Remote Key.........................................................................3-3
Smart Key............................................................................3-6
Immobilizer System.........................................................3-11
Door Locks............................................................3-12
Operating Door Locks from Outside the Vehicle....3-12
Operating Door Locks from Inside the Vehicle.......3-13
Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features...............................3-15
Child-Protector Rear Door locks ................................3-16
Safe Exit Assist (SEA) System.....................................3-16
Theft-Alarm System............................................3-17
Driver Position Memory System........................3-18
Storing Positions into Memory....................................3-18
Recalling Positions from Memory...............................3-19
Resetting the Driver's Seat Memory System...........3-19
Easy Access Function ....................................................3-20
Steering Wheel.....................................................3-21
Electric Power Steering (EPS) .....................................3-21
Tilt Steering/Telescopic Steering................................3-21
Horn....................................................................................3-22
Mirrors...................................................................3-23
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................................3-23
Side View Mirrors ...........................................................3-30
Reverse Parking Aid Function......................................3-33
Windows ................................................................3-34
Power Windows...............................................................3-35
Sunroof..................................................................3-39
Sunroof opening and closing.......................................3-40
Sliding the sunroof .........................................................3-40
Tilting the sunroof..........................................................3-40
Sunshade...........................................................................3-41
Resetting the sunroof....................................................3-41
Sunroof Open Warning..................................................3-42
Exterior Features.................................................3-43
Hood ...................................................................................3-43
Trunk ..................................................................................3-44
Smart Trunk......................................................................3-46
Fuel Filler Door................................................................3-49
Instrument Cluster ...............................................3-53
Instrument Cluster Control............................................3-55
Gauges ...............................................................................3-56
Transmission Shift Indicator.........................................3-60
Warning and Indicator lights ........................................3-61
LCD Display Messages...................................................3-73
LCD Display (For Supervision Cluster) .............3-79
LCD Display Control........................................................3-79
LCD Display Modes.........................................................3-80
3
Trip Computer.......................................................3-91
Conventional Cluster.......................................................3-91
Supervision Cluster .........................................................3-95
Light .......................................................................3-99
Exterior Lights .................................................................3-99
Interior Lights ................................................................3-106
Welcome System ...........................................................3-108
Wipers and Washers..........................................3-110
Windshield Wipers ........................................................3-110
Windshield Washers .....................................................3-111
Driver Assist System .........................................3-112
Rear View Monitor .......................................................3-112
Defroster.............................................................3-113
Rear Window Defroster ..............................................3-113
Manual Climate Control System.......................3-114
Heating and Air Conditioning.....................................3-115
System Operation .........................................................3-119
System Maintenance....................................................3-121
Automatic Climate Control System..................3-123
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning.................3-124
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning......................3-125
System Operation .........................................................3-131
System Maintenance....................................................3-133
Windshield Defrosting and Defogging............3-134
Auto Defogging System ..............................................3-137
Climate Control Additional Features ...............3-139
Automatic Ventilation...................................................3-139
Sunroof Inside Air Recirculation...............................3-139
Storage Compartment .......................................3-139
Center Console Storage ..............................................3-140
Sliding Armrest ..............................................................3-140
Glove Box........................................................................3-140
Sunglass Holder.............................................................3-141
Interior Features................................................3-142
Cup Holder ..........................................................................3-142
Sunvisor...........................................................................3-143
Power Outlet ..................................................................3-144
Wireless Cellular Phone Charging System..............3-145
USB Charger...................................................................3-147
Clock.................................................................................3-147
Clothes Hanger ..............................................................3-147
Floor Mat Anchor(s).....................................................3-148
3
3-3
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Remote Key (if equipped)
Your HYUNDAI uses a remote key,
which you can use to lock or unlock
a door (and trunk) and even start the
engine.
1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3.Trunk Unlock
4. Panic
Locking
To lock :
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
trunk.
2. Press the Door Lock button (1) on
the remote key.
3. The hazard warning lights will
blink and the chime will sound
once if the lock button is pressed
once more within four seconds.
4. Make sure the doors are locked by
checking the position of the door
lock button inside the vehicle.
Unlocking
To unlock:
1. Press the Door Unlock button (2)
on the remote key.
2. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
Two Press Unlock Feature
The priority for unlocking the driver
door only, or unlocking all the doors
with one press may be adjusted in
the User Settings mode in the cluster
LCD display (if equipped).
The Two Press Unlock feature, when
enabled, will require the user to
press the door unlock button once for
driver door only and twice for unlock-
ing all the doors.
Select or Deselect the Two Press
Unlock feature in the User Settings
mode in the cluster LCD display. The
option can be found under the follow-
ing menu:
User Settings ➞ Door ➞ Two Press
Unlock
AACCCCEESSSSIINNGG YYOOUURR VVEEHHIICCLLEE
OHG040006
Do not leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren. Unattended children
could place the key in the igni-
tion switch and may operate
power windows or other con-
trols, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
3-4
The Two Press Unlock feature can
also be enabled or disabled by
pressing the door lock and unlock
buttons simultaneously on the Key
FOB:
Press and hold both the Door Lock
button and the Door Unlock button
simultaneously until the hazard
warning lights blink.
This will enable or disable the Two
Press Unlock feature. Repeat this
procedure to enable/disable the
mode again.
Information
After unlocking the doors, the doors
will lock automatically after 30 sec-
onds unless a door is opened.
Trunk unlocking
To unlock:
1. Press and hold the Trunk Unlock
button (3) on the remote key for
more than one second.
2. The hazard warning lights will
blink two times.
3. Once the trunk is opened and
then closed, the trunk will lock
automatically.
Information
The word "HOLD" is written on the
button to inform you that you must
press and hold the button for more
than one second.
Panic button (if equipped)
Press and hold the Panic button (4)
for more than one second. The horn
sounds and hazard warning lights
flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel the panic mode, press any
button on the remote key.
Start-up
For more details, refer to the "Key
Ignition Switch" section in chapter 5.
To prevent damaging the remote
key:
• Keep the remote key away from
water or any liquid and fire. If the
inside of the remote key gets
damp (due to drinks or mois-
ture), or is heated, internal cir-
cuit may malfunction, excluding
the car from the warranty.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the
remote key.
• Protect the remote key from
extreme temperatures.
NOTICE
i
i
Convenient features of your vehicle
3-5
Convenient features of your vehicle
Mechanical key
If the remote key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
door by using the mechanical key.
To unfold the mechanical key, press
the release button on the remote key.
To return the key to its stored posi-
tion, press the release button and
fold the key back into the remote key.
Remote key precautions
The remote key will not work if any of
the following occur:
• The key is in the ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).
• The remote key battery is weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The remote key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the
remote key.
When the remote key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you have
a problem with the remote key con-
tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the remote key is in close proximi-
ty to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phones normal operational signals.
This is especially important when the
phone is active such as making and
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the remote key and
your mobile phone in the same pants
or jacket pocket and always try to
maintain an adequate distance
between the two devices.
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the device.
Keep the remote key away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves to
the key surface.
NOTICE
i
3
OAD045041
3-6
Convenient features of your vehicle
Battery replacement
If the remote key is not working prop-
erly, try replacing the battery with a
new one.
Battery Type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Pry open the rear cover of the
remote key.
2. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery. Make sure the
battery position is correct.
3. Reinstall the rear cover of the
remote key.
If you suspect your remote key might
have sustained some damage, or
you feel your remote key is not work-
ing correctly contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose of the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulations.
Smart Key (if equipped)
Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key,
which you can use to lock or unlock
a door (and trunk) and even start the
engine.
1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3.Trunk Unlock
4. Panic
i
OLM042302
OAD048550N
3-7
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Locking
To lock :
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
trunk.
2. Either press the door handle but-
ton or press the Door Lock button
(1) on the smart key.
3.The hazard warning lights will
blink and the chime will sound
once.
4. Make sure the doors are locked by
checking the position of the door
lock button inside the vehicle.
Information
The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within
28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the out-
side door handle.
Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will not
lock and the chime will sound for
three seconds if any of the following
occur:
• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.
• The Engine Start/Stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
• Any door except the trunk is open.
Unlocking
To unlock:
1. Carry the Smart Key.
2. Either press the driver’s outside
door handle button or press the
Door Unlock button (2) on the
smart key.
3. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
i
OAD045001
Do not leave the Smart Key in
your vehicle with unsupervised
children. Unattended children
could press the Engine Start/
Stop button and may operate
power windows or other con-
trols, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
OAD045001
3-8
Convenient features of your vehicle
Two Press Unlock Feature
The priority for unlocking the driver
door only, or unlocking all the doors
with one press may be adjusted in
the User Settings mode in the cluster
LCD display.
The Two Press Unlock feature, when
enabled, will require the user to
press the door unlock button once for
driver door only and twice for unlock-
ing all the doors.
Select or Deselect the Two Press
Unlock feature in the User Settings
mode in the cluster LCD display. The
option can be found under the follow-
ing menu:
User Settings ➞ Door ➞ Two Press
Unlock
The Two Press Unlock feature can
also be enabled or disabled by
pressing the door lock and unlock
buttons simultaneously on the Key
FOB:
Press and hold both the Door Lock
button and the Door Unlock button
simultaneously until the hazard
warning lights blink.
This will enable or disable the Two
Press Unlock feature. Repeat this
procedure to enable/disable the
mode again.
Information
• The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is with-
in 28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the
outside door handle and other peo-
ple can also open the doors.
• If you press the front passenger's
outside door handle, while carrying
the Smart Key, all doors will unlock.
• After unlocking the doors, the doors
will lock automatically after 30 sec-
onds unless a door is opened.
• Either the driver or front passenger
door can be opened with the door
handle button when the smart key is
within this range.
Trunk opening
To open:
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Either press the inside the trunk
emblem or press and hold the
Trunk Unlock button (3) on the
smart key for more than one sec-
ond.
The hazard warning lights will
blink two times.
3. Once the trunk is opened and
then closed, the trunk will lock
automatically.
Information
The trunk handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within
28 inches (0.7 m) from the trunk han-
dle.
Panic button
Press and hold the Panic button (4)
for more than one second. The horn
sounds and hazard warning lights
blink for about 30 seconds.To cancel
the panic mode, press any button on
the Smart Key.
i
i
3-9
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key.
For more details, refer to the
"Engine Start/Stop Button" sec-
tion in chapter 5.
To prevent damaging the smart
key:
• Keep the smart key away from
any liquid or fire. Internal cir-
cuits may malfunction if the
inside of the remote key gets
damp (from liquids or moisture)
or if it is heated. This can
exclude the remote key from
warranty coverage.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the
smart key.
• Protect the smart key from
extreme temperatures.
• Always have the smart key with
you when leaving the vehicle. If
the smart key is left near the
vehicle, the vehicle battery may
be discharged.
Mechanical key
If the Smart Key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
door by using the mechanical key.
Press and hold the release button (1)
and remove the mechanical key (2).
Insert the mechanical key into the
key hole on the door.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
Loss of a smart key
A maximum of two Smart Keys can
be registered to a single vehicle. If
you happen to lose your smart key,
you should immediately take the
vehicle and remaining keys to your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or tow
the vehicle, if necessary.
Smart key precautions
The smart key will not work if any of
the following occur:
• The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the trans-
mitter.
• The smart key is near a mobile two
way radio system or a cellular
phone.
• Another vehicle's smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you have
a problem with the smart key, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
OAD045042
3-10
Convenient features of your vehicle
If the smart key is in close proximity
to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phones normal operational signals.
This is especially important when the
phone is active such as making and
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the smart key and your
mobile phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and always try to main-
tain an adequate distance between
the two devices.
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the device.
Battery replacement
If the Smart Key is not working prop-
erly, try replacing the battery with a
new one.
Battery Type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the mechanical key.
2. Use a slim tool to pry open the
rear cover of the smart key.
3. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery. Make sure the
battery position is correct.
4. Reinstall the rear cover of the
smart key.
i
OLF044008
Keep the smart key away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves
to the key surface.
CAUTION
3-11
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
If you suspect your smart key might
have sustained some damage, or
you feel your smart key is not work-
ing correctly, contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose of the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulations.
Immobilizer System
(if equipped)
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an improp-
erly coded key (or other device) is
used, the engine's fuel system is dis-
abled.
When the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the immobilizer sys-
tem indicator should come on briefly,
then go off. If the indicator starts to
blink, the system does not recognize
the coding of the key.
Place the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, then place the
ignition switch to the ON position
again.
The system may not recognize your
key's coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e., key
chain) is near the key. The engine
may not start because the metal may
interrupt the transponder signal from
transmitting normally.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of the key, it is
recommended that you contact your
HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.
The transponder in your key is an
important part of the immobilizer
system. It is designed to give
years of trouble-free service, how-
ever you should avoid exposure to
moisture, static electricity and
rough handling. Immobilizer sys-
tem malfunction could occur.
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the device.
i
NOTICE
i
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and
should be kept confidential.
WARNING
3-12
Convenient features of your vehicle
Operating Door Locks from
Outside the Vehicle
Mechanical key
If you lock the driver's door with a
mechanical key, all vehicle doors will
lock. If you unlock the driver's door
with a mechanical key, the driver's
door will unlock and the passenger
doors will unlock according to the
current two press unlock setting.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
Remote key
To lock the doors, press the Door
Lock button (1) on the remote key.
Press the Door Unlock button (2) on
the remote key, the driver's door will
unlock. If you press the Door Unlock
button on the remote key again with-
in four seconds, then all the doors
will unlock.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
Information
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operat-
ing temporarily in order to protect
the circuit and prevent damage to
system components.
• Two press unlock setting can be
changed with the remote key or in
the User Settings Mode in the clus-
ter (if equipped).
i
DDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSS
OAD048454N
■ Remote key
■ Smart key
OHG040006
3-13
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Smart key
To lock the doors, press the button
on the outside door handle while car-
rying the Smart Key with you or
press the Door Lock button on the
Smart Key.
Press the button on the driver's out-
side door handle while carrying the
Smart Key with you or press the
Door Unlock button on the Smart
Key, the driver's door will unlock. If
you press the button on the front
passenger's outside door, all doors
will unlock.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
Information
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operat-
ing temporarily in order to protect
the circuit and prevent damage to
system components.
• Two press unlock setting can be
changed with the smart key or in the
User Settings Mode in the cluster (if
equipped).
Operating Door Locks from
Inside the Vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, pull the door lock
button (1) to the "Unlock" position.
The red mark (2) on the door lock
button will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the "Lock" position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door han-
dle (3) outward.
i
OAD045003
UU
UU
nn
nn
ll
ll
oo
oo
cc
cc
kk
kk
LL
LL
oo
oo
cc
cc
kk
kk
OAD045001
OAD048546N
Door
Unlock
Door
Lock
3-14
Convenient features of your vehicle
• If the inner door handle of the dri-
ver's (or front passenger's) door is
pulled when the door lock button is
in the lock position, the button is
unlocked and door opens.
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
key is in the ignition switch and any
front door is open.
• Doors cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
door is open.
Information
If a power door lock ever fails to func-
tion while you are in the vehicle try
one or more of the following tech-
niques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
mechanical key to unlock the door
from outside.
With the central door lock
switch
When pressing the ( ) switch (1), all
vehicle doors will lock.
When pressing the ( ) switch (2), all
vehicle doors will unlock.
If the key is in the ignition switch and
any door is opened, the doors will
not lock even though the lock button
(1) of the central door lock switch is
pressed.
If the smart key is in the vehicle and
any door is opened, the doors will
not lock even though the lock button
(1) of the central door lock switch is
pressed.
i
■ Driver's door
OAD045004/OAD045044N
■ Passenger's door
• The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion. If the
doors are unlocked,the risk of
being thrown from the vehicle
in a crash is increased.
• Do not pull the inner door
handle of the driver's or pas-
senger's door while the vehi-
cle is moving.
WARNING
Do not leave children or ani-
mals unattended in your vehi-
cle. An enclosed vehicle can
become extremely hot, causing
death or serious injury to unat-
tended children or animals who
cannot escape the vehicle.
Children might operate features
of the vehicle that could injure
them, or they could encounter
other harm, possibly from
someone gaining entry to the
vehicle.
WARNING
3-15
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Auto Door Lock/
Unlock Features
Impact sensing door unlock
All doors will be automatically
unlocked when an impact causes the
air bags to deploy.
Speed sensing door lock
All doors will be automatically locked
when vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph
(15 km/h).
All of the doors will be automatically
unlocked after the engine is turned
off.
Shift lever auto door lock
All doors will be automatically locked
when shifting the shift lever out of P
(Park) with the engine running.
You can activate or deactivate the
Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from
the User Settings Mode on the LCD
display.
For more details, refer to the "LCD
Display" section in this chapter.
Always secure your vehicle.
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
increases the potential risk to
you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle.
To secure your vehicle, while
depressing the brake, move the
shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion, engage the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in
the LOCK/OFF position, close
all windows, lock all doors, and
always take the key with you.
WARNING
Opening a door when some-
thing is approaching may cause
damage or injury. Be careful
when opening doors and watch
for vehicles, motorcycles, bicy-
cles or pedestrians approach-
ing the vehicle in the path of the
door.
CAUTION
If you stay in the vehicle for a
long time while the weather is
very hot or cold, there are risks
of injuries or danger to life. Do
not lock the vehicle from the
outside when someone is in the
vehicle.
WARNING
3-16
Convenient features of your vehicle
Child-Protector Rear Door
locks
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children seated in the
rear from accidentally opening the
rear doors.The rear door safety locks
should be used whenever children
are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock is located on
the edge of each rear door.When the
child safety lock is in the lock posi-
tion, the rear door will not open if the
inner door handle is pulled.
To lock the child safety lock, insert a
screwdriver (1) into the hole and turn
it to the lock position.
To allow a rear door to be opened
from inside the vehicle, unlock the
child safety lock.
Safe Exit Assist (SEA) System
(If equipped)
Once the system decides it is dan-
gerous for a passenger to open a car
door by sensing the approaching of a
car from behind when the person is
opening the door, the warning mes-
sage "Watch for traffic" appears and
the alarming sound will continue for
five seconds.
If a car approaching from behind is
too fast or a door is opened sudden-
ly, the alarm system may not set off
in time, which increases the danger
of an accident.Therefore, make sure
nothing is coming in the way before
you open the door.
This function works for ten minutes
even after the ignition is turned off.
The function will be released as soon
as the car doors are locked with the
smart key.
The alarming sound will continue
while the Safe Exit Assist (SEA) sys-
tem is in activation.
The Safe Exit Assist (SEA) system is
activated when you select 'Driver
Assistance → Blind-Spot Safety →
Safe Exit Assistance (SEA)' from the
User Settings mode in the cluster
LCD display.
If children accidently open the
rear doors while the vehicle is
in motion, they could fall out of
the vehicle.The rear door safety
locks should always be used
whenever children are in the
vehicle.
WARNING
OAD045005N
OAD048541N
3-17
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
This system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables. The horn will
sound and the hazard warning lights
will blink continuously if any of the
following occur:
- A door is opened without using the
remote key or smart key.
- The trunk is opened without using
the remote key or smart key.
- The engine hood is opened.
The alarm continues for 30 seconds,
then the system resets. To turn off
the alarm, unlock the doors with the
remote key or smart key.
The Theft Alarm System automati-
cally sets 30 seconds after you lock
the doors and the trunk. For the sys-
tem to activate, you must lock the
doors and the trunk from outside the
vehicle with the remote key or smart
key or by pressing the button on the
outside of the door handles with the
smart key in your possession.
The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once to
indicate the system is armed.
Once the security system is set,
opening any door, the trunk, or the
hood without using the remote key or
smart key will cause the alarm to
activate.
The Theft Alarm System will not set if
the hood, the trunk, or any door is
not fully closed. If the system will not
set, check the hood, the trunk, or the
doors are fully closed.
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it.
Information
• Do not lock the doors until all pas-
sengers have left the vehicle. If the
remaining passenger leaves the
vehicle when the system is armed,
the alarm will be activated.
• If the vehicle is not disarmed with
the remote key or smart key, open
the doors by using the mechanical
key and place the ignition switch in
the ON position (for remote key) or
start the engine (for smart key) by
directly pressing the ignition switch
with the smart key.
• When the system is disarmed but a
door or trunk is not opened within
30 seconds, the system will be
rearmed.
i
TTHHEEFFTT--AALLAARRMM SSYYSSTTEEMM
3-18
Convenient features of your vehicle
The Driver Position Memory System
is provided to store and recall the fol-
lowing memory settings with a sim-
ple button operation.
- Driver's seat position
- Side view mirror position
- Instrument panel illumination intensity
If the battery is disconnected, the
position memory will be lost and the
driving positions must be stored in
the system again.
If the Driver Position Memory
System does not operate normally,
have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Storing Positions into Memory
1. Check that the shift lever is in P
(Park) while the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat position,
side view mirror position and
instrument panel illumination
intensity to positions comfortable
for the driver.
3. Press the SET button.The system
will beep once and notify you
"Press button to save settings"on
the LCD display.
4. Press one of the memory buttons
(1 or 2) within 4 seconds.The sys-
tem will beep twice when the
memory has been successfully
stored.
5.
"Driver 1 (or 2) settings saved" will
appear on the LCD display.
DDRRIIVVEERR PPOOSSIITTIIOONN MMEEMMOORRYY SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OAD045043L
Never attempt to operate the
driver position memory system
while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or proper-
ty damage.
WARNING
OLF047403N/OLF047404N
3-19
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Recalling Positions from
Memory
1. Check that the shift lever is in P
(Park) while the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
2. Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2). The system will beep
once, and then the driver’s seat
position, side view mirror position
and instrument panel illumination
intensity will automatically adjust
to the stored positions.
3.
"Driver 1(or 2) settings is applied" will
appear on the LCD display.
• While recalling the "1" memory
position, pressing the SET or 1
button temporarily stops the
adjustment of the recalled mem-
ory position. Pressing the 2 but-
ton recalls the "2" memory posi-
tion.
• While recalling the "2" memory
position, pressing the SET or 2
button temporarily stops the
adjustment of the recalled mem-
ory position. Pressing the 1 but-
ton recalls the "1" memory posi-
tion.
• While recalling the stored posi-
tions, pressing one of the con-
trol buttons for the driver's seat,
side view mirror or instrument
panel illumination will cause the
movement of that component to
stop and move in the direction
that the control button is
pressed.
Resetting the Driver's Seat
Memory System
Take the following procedures to reset
the driver's seat memory system,
when it does not operate properly.
To reset the driver's seat memo-
ry system
1. Set the ignition switch to the ON
position, set the gear in P (Park),
and open the driver's door.
2. Operate the control switch to set
the driver's seat and seatback to
the foremost position.
3. Simultaneously press the SET
button and push forward the seat
movement switch over 2 seconds.
NOTICE
OLF047401N/OLF047402N
3-20
Convenient features of your vehicle
While resetting the driver's seat
memory system
1. It starts with the notification
sound.
2. The driver's seat and seatback is
adjusted to the rearward position
with the notification sound.
3. The driver's seat and seatback is
re-adjusted to the default position
(central position) with the notifica-
tion sound.
However, in the following cases, the
resetting procedure and the notifica-
tion sound may stop.
- The memory button is pressed.
- The control switch is operated.
- The gear is shifted out of P (Park).
- The driving speed exceeds 2 mph
(3 km/h).
- The driver's door is closed.
• Reattempt to do the resetting
procedure again, when the reset-
ting procedure incompletely
stops or the notification sound
do not stop.
• Make sure that there is no obsta-
cle around the driver's seat in
advance of resetting the driver's
seat memory system.
Easy Access Function
When exiting the vehicle the driver’s
seat will move rearward when the
engine is turned off and the shift
lever in P (Park).
When entering the vehicle the dri-
ver’s seat will move forward when the
ignition switch is placed to the ACC
position.
You can activate or deactivate the
Easy Access Function from the User
Settings Mode on the LCD display.
For more details, refer to the "LCD
Display" section in this chapter.
NOTICE
3-21
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
SSTTEEEERRIINNGG WWHHEEEELL
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
The system assists you with steering
the vehicle. If the engine is turned off
or if the power steering system
becomes inoperative, you may still
steer the vehicle, but it will require
increased steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The steering effort may be high
immediately after placing the igni-
tion switch in the ON position.
This happens as the system performs
the EPS system diagnostics. When
the diagnostics are completed, the
steering wheel will return to its nor-
mal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
in the ON or LOCK/OFF position.
• Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving
speed.
• When you operate the steering wheel
in low temperature, abnormal noise
may occur. If temperature rises, the
noise will disappear. This is a normal
condition.
• When an error is detected from the
EPS, the warning light will illumi-
nate on the instrument cluster and
the steering efforts may be increased.
When the following symptoms occur,
immediately drive the vehicle to a
safe area and check it.
Tilt Steering/Telescopic
Steering
Adjust the steering wheel so it points
toward your chest, not toward your
face. Make sure you can see the
instrument cluster warning lights and
gauges. After adjusting, push the
steering wheel both up and down to
be certain it is locked in position.
Always adjust the position of the
steering wheel before driving.
i
If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate nor-
mally, the warning light ( ) will
illuminate on the instrument
cluster.You may steer the vehi-
cle, but it will require increased
steering efforts.Take your vehi-
cle to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system
checked as soon as possible.
CAUTION
NEVER adjust the steering
wheel while driving. This may
cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
WARNING
3-22
Convenient features of your vehicle
To change the steering wheel angle
and height:
1. Pull down the lock-release lever (1).
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (3).
3. Pull up the lock-release lever to
lock the steering wheel in place.
Information
After adjustment, sometimes the lock
release lever may not lock the steering
wheel. It is not a malfunction. This
occurs when two gears are not
engaged correctly. In this case, adjust
the steering wheel again and then lock
the steering wheel.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on your
steering wheel (see illustration). The
horn will operate only when this area
is pressed.
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist.
Do not press on the horn with a
sharp-pointed object.
NOTICE
i
OAD048006N
OAD048008N
3-23
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Inside Rearview Mirror
Before driving your vehicle, check to
see that your inside rearview mirror
is properly positioned. Adjust the
rearview mirror so that the view
through the rear window is properly
centered.
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the
liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
housing.
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever towards you
to reduce glare from the headlights
of the vehicles behind you during
night driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
NOTICE
MMIIRRRROORRSS
Make sure your line of sight is
not obstructed. Do not place
objects in the rear seat, cargo
area, or behind the rear head-
rests which could interfere with
your vision through the rear
window.
WARNING
NEVER adjust the mirror while
driving. This may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.
WARNING
To prevent serious injury during
an accident or deployment of
the air bag, do not modify the
rearview mirror and do not
install a wide mirror.
WARNING
OAD045009
Day
Night
3-24
Convenient features of your vehicle
Blue Link
®
center (if equipped)
For details, refer to the Blue Link
®
Owner's Guide, Navigation Manual
or Audio Manual.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with HomeLink
®
system and
Blue Link
®
(if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
and an Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System. During
nighttime driving, this feature will
automatically detect and reduce
rearview mirror glare. The
HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver
allows you to activate your garage
door(s), electric gate, home lighting,
etc.
(1) HomeLink Channel 1
(2) HomeLink Channel 2
(3) HomeLink Channel 3
(4) Garage Door Opener Status
Indicator : Closing or Closed
(5) HomeLink Operation Indicator
(6) Garage Door Opener Status
Indicator : Opening or Opened
(7) HomeLink User Interface
Indicator
OAD045011N
OOS047093N
HomeLink Indicator
HomeLink Button
Telematics buttons
3-25
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
Safety™ (NVS
®
) Mirror
(if equipped)
The NVS
®
Mirror automatically
reduces glare by monitoring light lev-
els in the front and the rear of the
vehicle. Any object that obstructs
either light sensor will degrade the
automatic dimming control feature.
For more information regarding
NVS
®
mirrors and other applica-
tions, please refer to the Gentex
website:
www.gentex.com
Your mirror will automatically dim
upon detecting glare from the vehi-
cles traveling behind you. The auto-
dimming function can be controlled
by pressing the Dimming ON/OFF
button:
1. Pressing and holding the button
for 3 seconds turns the auto-dim-
ming function OFF which is indi-
cated by the green Status
Indicator LED turning off.
2. Pressing and holding the button
for 3 seconds again turns the auto-
dimming function ON which is indi-
cated by the green Status Indicator
LED turning on.
The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion each time the vehicle is started.
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System can replace up to three
hand-held radio-frequency (RF)
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This innovative feature will
learn the radio frequency codes of
most current transmitters to operate
devices such as gate operators,
garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems, even home
lighting. Both standard and rolling
code-equipped transmitters can be
programmed by following the out-
lined procedures.
Additional HomeLink
®
information
can be found at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Retain the original transmitter of the
RF device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink
®
programming. It is
also suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink
®
buttons be erased for
security purposes.
3-26
Convenient features of your vehicle
Programming HomeLink
®
Please note the following:
• When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park the
vehicle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new bat-
tery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being pro-
grammed to HomeLink
®
for quicker
training and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the
ignition switch to be placed in the
ACC (or "Accessories") position for
programming and/or operation of
HomeLink
®
.
• In the event that there are still pro-
gramming difficulties or questions
after following the programming
steps listed below, contact
HomeLink
®
at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Programming
To program most devices, follow
these instructions:
1. Press and release (1), (2) or (3)
button.
• If the indicator (4) is turned ON
in Orange, go to Step 3) since it
is a new programming.
• If the indicator (4) is continuous-
ly turned ON or flashes in Green
rapidly several times, go to Step
2) since it is a programmed but-
ton.
2. Press and hold the button you
wish to program for approximately
15-25 seconds until the LED flash-
es in Orange for several times.
Before programming
HomeLink
®
to a garage door
opener or gate operator, make
sure people and objects are out
of the way of the device to pre-
vent potential harm or damage.
Do not use the HomeLink
®
with
any garage door opener that
lacks the safety stop and
reverse features required by
U.S. federal safety standards
(this includes any garage door
opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage
door that cannot detect an
object - signaling the door to
stop and reverse - does not
meet current U.S. federal safety
standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features
increases the risk of serious
injury or death.
WARNING
OOS047095N
3-27
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
3. Hold the Garage Door Opener
Original Transmitter (OT) near the
HomeLink Mirror.
4. Press the Original Transmitter
(OT) button until the indicator (4)
is turned continuously ON or
flashes in Green for approximately
10 seconds and it indicates the
programing is completed.
Information
• Some garage door openers require
to press the programmed button on
the mirror up to three times right
after the programming is just com-
pleted to operate the garage door.
• The indicator (4) is turned ON in
Orange and flashes for about 60sec-
onds, during the programing mode
and if a programing is not succeed-
ed within the 60 seconds, the pro-
graming mode will be abort.
HomeLink
®
should now activate your
rolling code equipped device.
Gate operator & Canadian program-
ming
During programming, your handheld
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press the
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System button while you
press and re-press ("cycle") your
handheld transmitter every two sec-
onds until the frequency signal has
been learned. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after
several seconds upon successful
training.
Operating HomeLink
®
1. Press and release one of the
HomeLink buttons (1, 2 or 3) that
programed.
2. The HomeLink indicator (4) will
operate as below:
- Indicates Green and is continu-
ously ON (Fixed Code Garage
Door Opener)
- Flashes in Green rapidly (Rolling
Code Garage Door Opener)
i
OOS047096N
OOS047095N
3-28
Convenient features of your vehicle
Erasing HomeLink
®
buttons
1. Press and hold the button (1) and
(3) simultaneously.
2. The indicator (4) is turned contin-
uously ON in orange for about 10
seconds.
3. Then the indicator (4) color
changes to Green and flashes
rapidly.
Release the buttons once the
green indicator flashes.
4. Now HomeLink button (1), (2) and
(4) memories are all cleared.
NVS
®
is a registered trademark and
Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex
Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark
owned by Johnson Controls,
Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
FCC ID: NZLUAHL5A
IC: 4112A-UAHL5A
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
3. The transceiver has been tested and
complies with FCC and Industry
Canada rules. Changes or modifica-
tions not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to
operate the device.
Two Way Communication Programing
1. Complete the HomeLink
"Programming" first.
2. Before the first 10 times HomeLink
button is pressed after the pro-
gramming, the following steps
MUST occur to program two way
communication. (only for some
older garage doors)
3. Press and release the programed
HomeLink button to activate the
garage door.
i
OOS047098N
OOS047099N
3-29
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
4. Once the garage door is stopped,
press and release the "Learn" or
"Smart" button on the Garage door
opener within 1 minute from the
time of pressing the programed
HomeLink button on mirror.
5. If the both indicator (4) and (6) are
flashing rapidly for about 5 sec-
onds, the two way synchronization
is completed.
Information
Some newer garage door openers pro-
vide two-way communication syn-
chronizing when programming the
original transmitter (OT).
Operating Two Way Communication
1. Press and release (1), (2) or (3)
button.
2. The indicator (4) and (6) operates
as below:
- If the indicator (4) flashes in
Orange, it indicates that the
garage door is "closing".
- If the indicator (4) is ON continu-
ously in Green, it indicates that
the garage door is "closed".
- If the indicator (6) flashes in
Orange, it indicates that the
garage door is "Opening".
- If the indicator (6) is ON continu-
ously in Green, it indicates that
the garage door is "Opened".
i
OOS047411N
OOS047099N
OOS047412N
3-30
Convenient features of your vehicle
- If the indicator (4) or (6) does not
turn to Green, it indicates that the
last status of garage door was
not received properly. The
HomeLink mirror tries to receive
the last known status of the
garage door for a few seconds.
Recalling Garage Door Status
Homelink mirror with two way com-
munication provides a way to view
the last stored message from the
garage door opener.In order to recall
the last known status of the last acti-
vated device, press the buttons "1
and 2" OR "2 and 3" simultaneously.
• If the indicator (4) is ON continu-
ously in Green, it indicates that the
last activated device was "closed"
properly.
• If the indicator (6) is ON continu-
ously in Green, it indicates that the
last activated device was "open"
properly.
Information
Two way communication range dis-
tance between "vehicle" and "garage
door opener" is 100m.
The range may be reduced or
increased a little due to obstacle con-
ditions around the garage door open-
er, such as houses or trees.
Side View Mirrors
Be sure to adjust mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand side view
mirrors.The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch.The
mirror heads can be folded to pre-
vent damage during an automatic
car wash or when passing through a
narrow street.
The right side view mirror is convex.
Objects seen in the mirror are closer
than they appear.
i
OAD045014
3-31
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Use your interior side view mirror or
direct observation to determine the
actual distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.
• Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the sur-
face of the glass.
• If the mirror is jammed with ice,
do not adjust the mirror by
force. Use an approved spray
de-icer (not radiator antifreeze)
spray, or a sponge or soft cloth
with very warm water, or move
the vehicle to a warm place and
allow the ice to melt.
Blind spot mirror
The Blind Spot Mirror (BSM) is a
supplemental mirror that reduces the
driver's blind spot by showing the
rear side area of the vehicle. The
blind spot mirror is equipped on the
left-hand side view mirror.
Do not clean the mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum
based cleaning products.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Do not adjust or fold the side
view mirrors while driving. This
may cause loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.
WARNING
• Always check the road condi-
tion while driving for unex-
pected situations even
though the vehicle is
equipped with a blind spot
mirror.
• The blind spot mirror is a
device made for convenience.
Do not solely rely on the mir-
ror but always pay attention to
traffic around you.
WARNING
OLF044477N
OLF044478N
3-32
Convenient features of your vehicle
Adjusting the side view mirrors
Adjusting the side mirrors:
1. Press either the L (driver's side) or
R (passenger's side) button (1) to
select the side view mirror you
would like to adjust.
2. Use the mirror adjustment control
switch to position the selected mir-
ror up, down, left or right.
3. After adjustment, put the button
into neutral (center) position to
prevent inadvertent adjustment.
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate while the switch
is pressed. Do not press the
switch longer than necessary,
the motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the side
view mirrors by hand or the
motor may be damaged.
Folding the side view mirrors
To fold the side view mirrors, grasp
the housing of the mirror and then
fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.
NOTICE
OAD045015N OAD045016
3-33
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Reverse Parking Aid Function
(if equipped)
When you move the shift lever to the
R (Reverse) position, the side view
mirror(s) will rotate downwards to aid
with driving in reverse. The position
of the side view mirror switch (1)
determines whether or not the mir-
rors will move:
Left/Right :When either the L (Left) or
R (Right) switch is select-
ed, both side view mirrors
will move.
Neutral : When neither switch is select-
ed, the side view mirrors will
not move.
The side view mirrors will automati-
cally revert to their original positions
if any of the following occur:
• The ignition switch is placed to
either the LOCK/OFF position or
the ACC position.
• The shift lever is moved to any
position except R (Reverse).
• The remote control side view mir-
ror switch is not selected.
OAD048461N
3-34
Convenient features of your vehicle
WWIINNDDOOWWSS
OAD045020N
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
(7) Power window lock switch
3-35
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Power Windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to be able to raise or lower
the windows.Each door has a Power
Window switch to control that door's
window. The driver has a Power
Window Lock switch which can block
the operation of passenger windows.
The power windows will operate for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC
or LOCK/OFF position. However, if
the front doors are opened, the
Power Windows cannot be operated
even within the 30 second period.
Information
• In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• While driving with the rear win-
dows down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) opened (or partially
opened), your vehicle may demon-
strate a wind buffeting or pulsation
noise. This noise is normal and can
be reduced or eliminated by taking
the following actions. If the noise
occurs with one or both of the rear
windows down, partially lower both
front windows approximately 1 inch
(2.5 cm). If you experience the noise
with the sunroof open, slightly close
the sunroof.
Window opening and closing
To open:
Press the window switch down to the
first detent position (5). Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop.
To close:
Pull the window switch up to the first
detent position (5). Release the win-
dow switch when you want the win-
dow to stop.
i
To avoid serious injury or death,
do not extend your head, arms
or body outside the windows
while driving.
WARNING
OAD045038
3-36
Convenient features of your vehicle
Auto down window (if equipped)
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers the
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is
in operation, pull up or press down
and release the switch.
Auto up/down window
(if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the sec-
ond detent position (6) completely
lowers or lifts the window even when
the switch is released. To stop the
window at the desired position while
the window is in operation, pull up or
press down and release the switch.
To reset the power windows
If the power windows do not operate
normally, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
1. Place the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the window and continue
pulling up on the power window
switch for at least one second.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have the
system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
The automatic reverse feature
doesn't activate while resetting
power window system. Make
sure body parts or other objects
are safely out of the way before
closing the windows to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage.
WARNING
3-37
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Automatic reverse (if equipped)
If a window senses any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it will
stop and lower approximately 12
inches (30 cm) to allow the object to
be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).
If the power window switch is pulled
up continuously again within 5 sec-
onds after the window is lowered by
the automatic window reverse fea-
ture, the automatic window reverse
will not operate.
Information
The automatic reverse feature is only
active when the "Auto Up" feature is
used by fully pulling up the switch to
the second detent.
Do not install any accessories on
the windows. The automatic
reverse feature may not operate.
NOTICE
i
OLF044032
Make sure body parts or other
objects are safely out of the way
before closing the windows to
avoid injuries or vehicle dam-
age.
Objects less than 0.16 inch (4
mm) in diameter caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel may
not be detected by the automat-
ic reverse window and the win-
dow will not stop and reverse
direction.
WARNING
3-38
Convenient features of your vehicle
Power window lock switch
The driver can disable the power
window switches on the rear passen-
ger doors by pressing the power win-
dow lock switch.
When the power window lock switch
is pressed:
• The rear passenger control will not
be able to operate the rear pas-
senger power window
• Note that the front passenger con-
trol is still able to operate the front
passenger window, and that the
driver master control can still oper-
ate all the power windows.
• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposite directions at
the same time. If this is done,the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
NOTICE
Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver's door power window
lock switch in the LOCK posi-
tion. Serious injury or death can
result from unintentional win-
dow operation by a child.
WARNING
OAD045021N
3-39
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
SSUUNNRROOOOFF ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control
switch located on the overhead con-
sole.
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
Information
• In cold and wet climates, the sun-
roof may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
• Do not continue to move the
sunroof control lever after the
sunroof is fully opened, closed,
or tilted. Damage to the motor or
system components could
occur.
• Make sure the sunroof is closed
fully when leaving your vehicle.
If the sunroof is left open,rain or
snow may wet the interior of the
vehicle. Also, leaving the sun-
roof open when the vehicle is
unattended may invite theft.
NOTICE
i
OAD045022
• Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
could result in loss of control
and an accident that may
cause death, serious injury, or
property damage.
• Make sure heads, hands, arms
or any other body parts or
objects are out of the way
before operating the sunroof.
• Do not extend your head,
arms or body outside the sun-
roof while driving, to avoid
serious injury.
• Do not leave the engine run-
ning and the key in your vehi-
cle with unsupervised chil-
dren. Unattended children
could operate the sunroof,
which could result in serious
injury.
• Do not sit on the top of the
vehicle. It may cause injury or
vehicle damage.
WARNING
3-40
Convenient features of your vehicle
Sunroof opening and closing
To open:
Press the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the first detent position.
Release the switch when you want
the sunroof to stop.
To close:
Press the sunroof control lever for-
ward to the first detent position.
Release the switch when you want
the sunroof to stop.
Sliding the sunroof
Pressing the sunroof control lever
backward or forward momentarily to
the second detent position complete-
ly opens or closes the sunroof even
when the switch is released. To stop
the sunroof at the desired position
while the sunroof is in operation,
press the sunroof control lever back-
ward or forward and release the
switch.
Information
To minimize wind noise while driving,
it is recommended that you drive with
the sunroof slightly closed (stop the
sunroof about 2 inch (5 cm) before the
maximum slide open position).
Tilting the sunroof
Tilt the sunroof open:
Push the sunroof control lever
upward until the sunroof moves to
the desired position.
To close the sunroof:
Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward until the sunroof moves to the
desired position.
i
OAD045023 OAD045024
3-41
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the sunroof
guide rail or between the sun-
roof and roof panel which can
make a noise.
• Do not try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, other-
wise the motor could be dam-
aged. In cold and wet climates,
the sunroof may not work prop-
erly.
Sunshade
The sunshade will open automatical-
ly with the sunroof when the glass
panel moves. If you want it closed,
move the sunshade manually.
The sunroof is made to slide
together with the sunshade. Do
not leave the sunshade closed
while the sunroof is open.
Resetting the sunroof
In some circumstances resetting the
sunroof operation may need to be
performed. Some instances where
resetting the sunroof may be
required include:
- When the 12V battery in the
engine room is either disconnected
or discharged
- When the 12V battery fuse is
replaced
- If the sunroof one-touch AUTO
OPEN/CLOSE operation is not
functioning properly
Sunroof resetting procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch to the ON
position or start the engine. It is
recommended to reset the sun-
roof while the engine is running.
2. Push the control lever forward.
The sunroof will close completely
or tilt depending on the condition
of the sunroof.
3. Release the control lever when
the sunroof stops moving.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OAD045037
3-42
Convenient features of your vehicle
4. Push the control lever forward
about 10 seconds.
- When the sunroof is in the
closed position :
The glass will tilt and slightly
move up and down.
- When the sunroof is in the tilt
position:
The glass will slightly move up
and down.
Do not release the lever until the
operation is completed.
If you release the lever during opera-
tion, start the procedure again from
step 2.
5. Within 3 seconds, push and hold
the control lever forward until the
sunroof operates as follows:
Tilt down → Slide Open → Slide
Close.
Do not release the lever until the
operation is completed.
If you release the lever during opera-
tion, start the procedure again from
step 2.
6. Release the sunroof control lever
after all steps have completed.
(The sunroof system has been
reset.)
Information
• If the sunroof is not reset when the
vehicle battery is disconnected or
discharged, or the sunroof fuse is
blown, the sunroof may not operate
normally.
• For more detailed information, we
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Sunroof Open Warning
(if equipped)
• If the driver turns off the engine
when the sunroof is not fully
closed, the warning chime will
sound for approximately 3 seconds
and the sunroof open warning will
appear on the LCD display.
• If the driver turns off the engine
and opens the door when the sun-
roof is not fully closed, the open
sunroof warning will appear on the
LCD display until the door is closed
or the sunroof is fully closed.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.
i
3-43
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
EEXXTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS
Hood
Opening the hood
1. Park the vehicle and set the park-
ing brake.
2. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
3. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, push up the sec-
ondary latch (1) inside of the hood
center and lift the hood (2).
4. Pull out the support rod and prop
the hood open with the support
rod (3).
OAD045025
OAD048039N
• After driving, the engine com-
partment and support rod will
be hot. Grasp the support rod
in the area wrapped in rubber
to prevent burns.
• The support rod must be
inserted completely into the
hole provided whenever you
inspect the engine compart-
ment. This will prevent the
hood from falling and possi-
bly injuring you.
WARNING
OAD048026N
3-44
Convenient features of your vehicle
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compart-
ment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be
removed from the engine com-
partment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip
to prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the hood halfway (front
edge approximately 12 inches (30
cm) from the bumper) before drop-
ping the hood to its locked posi-
tion. Then double check to make
sure the hood is secure. If the
hood can be raised again, it is not
securely locked. Open it again and
close it with more force.
Trunk
Opening the trunk
1. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
2. Then do one of the following :
• Hold down the trunk unlock button
located on your key fob or smart
key for more than 1 second.
• Additionally, for vehicles
equipped with smart key :
- While all doors are unlocked,
press the switch (1) inside the
trunk emblem to open the trunk
with or without the smart key on
your person.
• Before closing the hood,
ensure all obstructions are
removed from around the
hood opening.
• Always double check to be
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away.
Check there is no hood open
warning light or message dis-
played on the instrument clus-
ter. Driving with the hood
opened may cause a total loss
of visibility, which might
result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with
the hood in the raised posi-
tion, as vision is obstructed,
which might result in an acci-
dent, and the hood could fall
or be damaged.
WARNING
OAD048027N
■ Outside (if equipped)
3-45
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
- If any door is locked or all doors
are locked, the button (1) can still
be used to open the trunk, as
long as the smart key is on your
person.
- Use the trunk release lever.
3. Lift the trunk lid up.
Closing the trunk
Lower the trunk lid and press down
until it locks.
To prevent damage to the trunk lid
torsion bar and the attached hard-
ware, always close the trunk
before driving.
Information
In cold and wet climates, trunk lock
and trunk mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
Emergency trunk safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Emergency Trunk Safety Release
lever located inside the trunk. When
someone is inadvertently locked in
the trunk, the trunk can be opened
by moving the lever in the direction of
the arrow and pushing the trunk
open.
i
NOTICE
Always keep the trunk lid com-
pletely closed while the vehicle
is in motion. If it is left open or
ajar, poisonous exhaust gases
containing carbon monoxide
(CO) may enter the vehicle and
serious illness or death may
result.
WARNING
OAD048028N
■ Inside
The switch (1) on the trunk is
made of rubber. Do not press it
using a sharp object such as a
key, screwdriver, or drill.
CAUTION
OAD048029N
3-46
Convenient features of your vehicle
Smart Trunk (if equipped)
On a vehicle equipped with a smart
key, the trunk can be opened using
the Smart Trunk system.
How to use the Smart Trunk
The trunk can be opened with no-
touch activation satisfying all the
conditions below.
• After 15 seconds when all doors
are closed and locked
• Positioned in the detecting area for
more than 3 seconds.
• You and your passengers
must be aware of the location
of the Emergency Trunk
Safety Release lever in this
vehicle and how to open the
trunk in case you are acciden-
tally locked in the trunk.
• NEVER allow anyone to occu-
py the trunk of the vehicle at
any time. If the trunk is par-
tially or totally latched and the
person is unable to get out,
serious injury or death could
occur due to lack of ventila-
tion, exhaust fumes and rapid
heat build-up, or because of
exposure to cold weather con-
ditions. The trunk is also a
highly dangerous location in
the event of a crash because it
is not a protected occupant
space but is a part of the vehi-
cle's crush zone.
• Your vehicle should be kept
locked and the Smart Key
should be kept out of the reach
of children. Parents should
teach their children about the
dangers of playing in trunks.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only.
WARNING
OAD048030N
3-47
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
• The Smart Trunk does not operate
when:
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and is continu-
ously detected.
- The smart key is detected within 15
seconds after the doors are closed
and locked, and within 60 inches
(1.5 m) from the front door han-
dles. (for vehicles equipped with
Welcome Light)
- A door is not locked or closed.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
1. Setting
To activate the Smart Trunk, go to
User Settings Mode and select
Smart Trunk on the LCD display.
For more details, refer to the "LCD
Display" section in this chapter.
2. Detect and Alert
If you are positioned in the detecting
area (20~40 inches (50 ~100 cm)
behind the vehicle) carrying a smart
key, the hazard warning lights will
blink and chime will sound to alert
you the smart key has been detected
and the trunk will open.
Information
Do not approach the detecting area if
you do not want the trunk to open. If
you have unintentionally entered the
detecting area and the hazard warn-
ing lights and chime starts to operate,
leave the detecting area with the
smart key. The trunk will stay closed.
3. Automatic opening
The hazard warning lights will blink
and chime will sound 6 times and
then the trunk will open.
i
i
• Make sure you close the trunk
before driving your vehicle.
• Make sure there are no people
or objects around the trunk
before opening or closing the
trunk.
• Make sure objects in the trunk
do not come out when open-
ing the trunk on a slope. It
may cause serious injury.
• Make sure to deactivate the
Smart Trunk when washing
your vehicle. Otherwise, the
trunk may open inadvertently.
• The key should be kept out of
reach of children. Children
may inadvertently open the
Smart Trunk while playing
around the rear area of the
vehicle.
WARNING
3-48
Convenient features of your vehicle
How to deactivate the Smart
Trunk function using the smart
key
1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3.Trunk open
4. Panic
If you press any button of the smart
key during the Detect and Alert
stage, the Smart Trunk function will
be deactivated.
Make sure to be aware of how to
deactivate the Smart Trunk function
for emergency situations.
Information
• If you press the door unlock button
(2), the Smart Trunk function will
be deactivated temporarily. But, if
you do not open any door for 30 sec-
onds, the smart trunk function will
be activated again.
• If you press the trunk open button
(3) for more than 1 second, the
trunk opens.
• If you press the door lock button (1)
or trunk open button (3) when the
Smart Trunk function is not in the
Detect and Alert stage, the smart
trunk function will not be deactivat-
ed.
• In case you have deactivated the
Smart Trunk function by pressing
the smart key button and opened a
door, the smart trunk function can
be activated again by closing and
locking all doors.
Detecting area
• The Smart Trunk operates with a
welcome alert if the smart key is
detected within 20~40 inches
(50~100 cm) from the trunk.
• The alert stops at once if the smart
key is positioned outside the
detecting area during the Detect
and Alert stage.
i
OAD048550N
OAD048578N
3-49
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
• The Smart Trunk function will not
work if any of the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the
transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile two
way radio system or a cellular
phone.
- Another vehicle's smart key is
being operated close to your vehi-
cle.
• The detecting range may decrease
or increase when :
- One side of the tire is raised to
replace a tire or to inspect the vehi-
cle.
- The vehicle is parked on a slope or
unpaved road, etc.
Fuel Filler Door
Opening the fuel filler door
The fuel filler door must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pulling up
the fuel filler door release lever.
1. Turn the engine off.Locate the fuel
filler door release lever on the floor
on the left side of the driver seat.
2. Pull up on the release lever.
3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to
fully open.
4. To remove the fuel tank cap (2),
turn it counterclockwise. You may
hear a hissing noise as the pres-
sure inside the tank equalizes.
5. Place the cap on the fuel filler
door.
i
OAD048034N
OAD045035
3-50
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
If the fuel filler door does not open
because ice has formed around it, tap
lightly or push on the door to break
the ice and release the door. Do not
pry on the door. If necessary, spray
around the door with an approved de-
icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-
freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm
place and allow the ice to melt.
Closing the fuel filler door
1. To install the fuel tank cap, turn it
clockwise until it "clicks" one time.
2. Close the fuel filler door until it is
latched securely.
Information
• Tighten the cap until it clicks once,
otherwise the fuel cap open warn-
ing indicator light will illuminate.
• There may be an intermittent noise
near the refueling hole while the
engine is idling if the fuel cap is not
closed securely. This occurs nor-
mally with the OBD system.
• When refueling on unleveled
ground, the fuel gauge may not
point to the F position. It is not a
malfunction. If you move your
vehicle to a level ground, the fuel
gauge will move to the full position.
i
i
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. Failure to follow
these guidelines may result in
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station.
• Before refueling, note the
location of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,
at the gas station.
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle, you should eliminate the
potential build-up of static
electricity by touching a metal
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-
tance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas
source, with your bare hand.
• Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric cur-
rent and/or electronic interfer-
ence from cellular phones can
potentially ignite fuel vapors
and cause a fire.
WARNING
3-51
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• Use only approved portable
plastic fuel containers designed
to carry and store gasoline.
• When refueling, always move
the shift lever to the P (Park)
position, set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch to the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion. Sparks produced by
electrical components related
to the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire.
• Do not use matches or a
lighter and do not smoke or
leave a lit cigarette in your
vehicle while at a gas station,
especially during refueling.
• Do not over-fill or top-off your
vehicle tank, which can cause
gasoline spillage.
• If a fire breaks out during refu-
eling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately con-
tact the manager of the gas
station and then contact the
local fire department. Follow
any safety instructions they
provide.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuel-
ing.You can generate a build-
up of static electricity by
touching, rubbing or sliding
against any item or fabric
capable of producing static
electricity. Static electricity
discharge can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. If you
must re-enter the vehicle, you
should once again eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touch-
ing a metal part of the vehicle,
away from the fuel filler neck,
nozzle or other gasoline
source, with your bare hand.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be
sure to place the container on
the ground prior to refueling.
Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire.
Once refueling has begun,
contact between your bare
hand and the vehicle should
be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• If pressurized fuel sprays out,
it can cover your clothes or
skin and thus subject you to
the risk of fire and burns.
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
3-52
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel Requirements"
suggested in the Introduction chapter.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted sur-
faces may damage the paint.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction
of the fuel system or emission
control system.
NOTICE
i
3-53
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT CCLLUUSSTTEERR
1.Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5.Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display (including Trip computer)
OAD048100N/OAD048101N
■■
Conventional cluster
The actual cluster in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
■■
Supervision cluster (Type A)
3-54
Convenient features of your vehicle
OAD048103N/OAD048102N
The actual cluster in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
■■
Supervision cluster (Type B)
1.Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5.Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display (including Trip computer)
■■
Supervision cluster (Type C)
3-55
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Instrument Cluster Control
Adjusting instrument cluster
illumination
When the vehicle's parking lights or
headlights are on, press the illumina-
tion control button to adjust the
brightness of the instrument panel
illumination.
When pressing the illumination con-
trol button, the interior switch illumi-
nation intensity is also adjusted.
• The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is displayed.
• If the brightness reaches the maxi-
mum or minimum level, a chime
will sound.
OAD048108N
■ Conventional cluster ■ Supervision cluster
Never adjust the instrument
cluster while driving. Doing so
could lead to driver distraction
which may cause an accident
and lead to vehicle damage,
serious injury, or death.
WARNING
OAD045115/OAD048569L
3-56
Convenient features of your vehicle
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilo-
meters per hour (km/h).
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revo-
lutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
Engine coolant temperature
Gauge
This gauge indicates the tempera-
ture of the engine coolant when the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button is ON.
NOTICE
OAD048106N/OAD048107N
■ Conventional /
Supervision cluster
(Type A, B)
■ Supervision cluster
(Type C)
OAD048543N/OAD046106N
■ Conventional /
Supervision cluster
(Type A, B)
■ Supervision cluster
(Type C)
OAD048104N/OAD046103N
■ Conventional /
Supervision cluster
(Type A, B)
■ Supervision cluster
(Type C)
3-57
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
If the gauge pointer moves
beyond the normal range area
toward the "H" position, it indi-
cates overheating that may dam-
age the engine.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. If your vehicle
overheats, refer to "If the Engine
Overheats" in chapter 6.
Fuel gauge
This gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
Information
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a
low fuel warning light, which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is
nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier
than usual due to the movement of
fuel in the tank.
i
NOTICE
OAD048544N/OAD046107N
■ Conventional /
Supervision cluster
(Type A, B)
■ Supervision cluster
(Type C)
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addi-
tional fuel as soon as possible
after the warning light comes
on or when the gauge indicator
comes close to the "E (Empty)"
level.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
or reservoir cap when the
engine is hot. The engine
coolant is under pressure and
could severely burn. Wait until
the engine is cool before adding
coolant to the reservoir.
WARNING
3-58
Convenient features of your vehicle
Avoid driving with an extremely
low fuel level. Running out of fuel
could cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance that the vehicle has been driv-
en and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
Range
• The range is the estimated dis-
tance the vehicle can be driven
with the remaining fuel.
• If the estimated distance is below
1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will
display "----" as range.
NOTICE
OAD048563L
■ Conventional cluster ■ Supervision cluster ■ Supervision cluster
OAD045119N/OAD048551N
3-59
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been inter-
rupted, the range function may not
operate correctly.
• The range may differ from the actu-
al driving distance as it is only an
estimate of the available driving
range for the vehicle and driving
conditions.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallon
(6 liters) of fuel are added to the
vehicle.
• The range may vary significantly
based on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
Outside temperature gauge
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures by 1°F (1°C).
- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F
(-40°C ~ 60°C)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not change immediately
like a general thermometer (to avoid
distracting the driver).
To change the temperature unit from
°F to °C or °C to °F:
For conventional cluster:
- Press the TRIP button for more
than 5 seconds on the steering
wheel.
For supervision cluster:
- Go to the User Settings Mode ➝
Other ➝ Temperature Unit. Select
your desired unit.
For vehicles equipped with
Automatic Climate Control, you can
also:
- Press the AUTO button while
pressing the OFF button on the cli-
mate control unit for 3 seconds
Both the temperature unit on the
cluster LCD display and climate con-
trol screen will change.
i
OAD045116N
■ Conventional cluster
■ Supervision cluster
OAD048555N
3-60
Convenient features of your vehicle
Transmission Shift Indicator
Manual transmission shift indi-
cator (if equipped)
This indicator informs which gear is
desired while driving to save fuel.
• Shifting up :
▲
2,
▲
3,
▲
4,
▲
5,
▲
6
• Shifting down :
▼
1,
▼
2,
▼
3,
▼
4,
▼
5
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the
3
rd
gear is desired (currently
the shift lever is in the 2
nd
or 1
st
gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to
the 3
rd
gear is desired (current-
ly the shift lever is in the 4
th
, 5
th
,
or 6
th
gear).
When the system is not working
properly, the indicator is not dis-
played.
Automatic transmission and
dual clutch transmission shift
indicator (if equipped)
This indicator displays which auto-
matic transmission shift lever is
selected.
•Park :P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
•Drive :D
• Sports Mode
- Auto Transmission :1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
- Dual Clutch Transmission : 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6, 7
■ Conventional cluster ■ Supervision cluster
OAD045117/OAD048557N
■ Conventional cluster ■ Supervision cluster
OAD045185N/OAD048559N
3-61
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Shift indicator pop-up (if equipped)
The pop-up displays the current gear
position selected for 2 seconds
(P/R/N/D).
The shift indicator pop-up function
can be activated or deactivated from
the User Settings mode in the cluster
LCD display.
Warning and Indicator lights
Information
Make sure that all warning lights are
OFF after starting the engine. If any
light is still ON, this indicates a situa-
tion that needs attention.
Supplemental Restraint
System Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the "Seat
Belts" in chapter 2.
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds.
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
i
■ Supervision cluster
OAD048561N
3-62
Convenient features of your vehicle
If the brake fluid level in the reser-
voir is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check
the brake fluid level immediately
and add fluid as required (For
more details, refer to "Brake
Fluid" in chapter 7). After adding
brake fluid, check all brake com-
ponents for fluid leaks. If a brake
fluid leak is found, or if the warning
light remains on, or if the brakes
do not operate properly, do not
drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual sys-
tems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure is
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driv-
ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
al engine braking and stop the vehi-
cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys-
tem will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warn-
ing light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
3-63
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Electronic
Brake Force
Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate
at the same time while driving:
When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
- Electronic
Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on or
both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Lights are on, the
speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter
may not work. Also, the EPS Warning
Light may illuminate and the steering
effort may increase or decrease.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er.
i
Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) System
Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
3-64
Convenient features of your vehicle
Electronic Power
Steering (EPS)
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
- Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
affect drivability and/or fuel econ-
omy.
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) illuminates, potential catalyt-
ic converter damage is possible
which could result in loss of
engine power.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
NOTICE
3-65
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Charging System
Warning Light
When this warning light illuminates
while the engine is running, the bat-
tery is not being charged.Immediately
turn OFF all electrical accessories.
Try not to use electrically operated
controls, such as the power windows.
Keep the engine running.
Have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible.
If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the
electrical charging system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the engine oil pressure is
low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to "Engine Oil" in chapter
7). If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil or if oil is not avail-
able, have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
• If the engine does not stop
immediately after the Engine Oil
Pressure Warning Light is illumi-
nated, severe damage could
result.
• If the warning light stays on
while the engine is running, it
indicates that there may be seri-
ous engine damage or malfunc-
tion. In this case:
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2.Turn off the engine and check
the oil level. If the oil level is
low, fill the engine oil to the
proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the
warning light stays on after
the engine is started, turn the
engine off immediately. If this
occurs, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
3-66
Convenient features of your vehicle
Low Fuel Level
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
- Low Fuel Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below "E" can cause the
engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter.
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated (The
location of each underinflated tire
is displayed on the supervision
cluster LCD display).
For more details, refer to "Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
This warning light remains ON
after blinking for approximately 60
seconds, or repeatedly blinks ON
and OFF in 3 second intervals:
When there is a malfunction with the
TPMS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to "Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
NOTICE
Safe Stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors.
• If you notice any vehicle insta-
bility, immediately take your
foot off the accelerator pedal,
apply the brakes gradually
with light force, and slowly
move to a safe position off the
road.
WARNING
3-67
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Forward Collision
Avoidance Assist
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates :
• When you set the ignition switch
or Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
FCA. In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized dealer of
HYUNDAI.
For more details, refer to "Forward
Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA)
system" in chapter 5.
Lane Keeping Assist
(LKA) System Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• [Green] When the system operat-
ing conditions are satisfied.
• [White] The system operating con-
ditions are not satisfied.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the lane keeping assist
system.
If this occurs, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to "Lane
Keeping Assist (LKA) system" in
chapter 5.
Headlight Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
This warning light illuminates if one
of the exterior bulbs (headlamp,
DRL, turn signal lamp, stop lamp,
etc.) is not operating properly. One
of the bulbs may need to be
replaced. If the vehicle is equipped
with LED headlamps, have the vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
When replacing the bulb, use the same
wattage bulb.
For more details, refer to "BULB
WATTAGE" in chapter 8.
i
3-68
LED Headlight Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
• When there is a malfunction with
the LED headlight.
If this occurs, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
This warning light blinks:
When there is a malfunction with a
LED headlight related part.
If this occurs, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Continuous driving with the LED
Headlight Warning Light on or
blinking can reduce LED headlight
life.
Master Warning Light
This indicator light illuminates
• When there is a malfunction in
operation in any of the following
systems:
- Exterior lamp malfunction
- Blind-Spot Collision Warning
(BCW) malfunction (if equipped)
- Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)
System malfunction (if equipped)
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
- Service reminder
To identify the details of the warning,
look at the LCD display.
Door Ajar Warning
Light (for conventional
cluster)
This warning light illuminates:
• When a door is not closed secure-
ly.
Trunk Open Warning
Light (for conventional
cluster)
This warning light illuminates:
• When the trunk is not closed
securely.
Hood Open Warning
Light (for conventional
cluster)
This warning light illuminates:
• When the hood is not closed
securely.
NOTICE
Convenient features of your vehicle
3-69
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Icy Road Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driv-
er the road may be icy.
When the temperature on the out-
side temperature gauge is approxi-
mately below 40°F (4°C), the Icy
Road Warning Light and Outside
Temperature Gauge blinks and then
illuminates. Also, the warning chime
sounds 1 time.
You can activate or deactivate Icy
Road Warning function from the User
Settings mode in the cluster LCD dis-
play (if equipped with supervision
cluster).
Information
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive more
attentively and safely refraining from
over-speeding, rapid acceleration,
sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to
"Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)" in chapter 5.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
For more details, refer to
"Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)" in chapter 5.
i
3-70
Convenient features of your vehicle
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (without smart
key) (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in the key with the igni-
tion switch in the ON position.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (with smart key)
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates for
up to 30 seconds:
When the vehicle detects the smart
key in the vehicle with the Engine
Start/Stop button in the ACC or ON
position.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you cannot start the
engine.
This indicator light illuminates for
2 seconds and goes off:
If the smart key is in the vehicle and
the Engine Start/Stop button is ON,
but the vehicle cannot detect the
smart key.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
3-71
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
When you operate the turn signal
indicator.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system.
- The turn signal indicator light illu-
minates but does not blink
- The turn signal indicator light
blinks rapidly
- The turn signal indicator light
does not illuminate at all
If either of these conditions occur,
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position.
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Light ON Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
When the tail lights or headlights are
on.
High Beam Assist
(HBA) indicator light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates :
• When the high-Beam is on with the
light switch in the AUTO light posi-
tion.
• If your vehicle detects oncoming or
preceding vehicles, the High Beam
Assist (HBA) system will switch the
high beam to low beam automati-
cally.
For more details, refer to "High
Beam Assist (HBA) system" in this
chapter.
3-72
Convenient features of your vehicle
Cruise Indicator Light
(for conventional
cluster, if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
For more details, refer to "Cruise
Control System" in chapter 5.
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (for conventional
cluster, if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
When the cruise control speed is set.
For more information, refer to
"Cruise Control System" in chap-
ter 5.
Cruise Indicator Light
(for supervision clus-
ter, if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
For more details, refer to "Cruise
Control System" in chapter 5.
SPORT Mode Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you select "SPORT" mode
as drive mode.
For more details, refer to "Drive
Mode Integrated Control System"
in chapter 5.
SMART Mode Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you select ''SMART" mode
as drive mode.
For more details, refer to "Drive
Mode Integrated Control System''
in chapter 5.
60$57
3-73
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
LCD Display Messages
(if equipped)
Shift to P or N to start engine
(for smart key system and auto-
matic transmission/dual clutch
transmission)
This warning message is displayed if
you try to start the engine with the
shift lever not in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position.
Information
You can start the engine with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position. But,
for your safety, we recommend that
you start the engine with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position.
Shift to P
(for smart key system)
This message is displayed if you try
to turn off the engine without the shift
lever in P (Park) position.
At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton once more, it will turn to the ON
position).
Press START button again
(for smart key system)
This message is displayed if you
were unable to start the vehicle when
the Start/Stop button was pressed.
If this occurs, attempt to start the
engine by pressing the Start/Stop
button again.
If the warning message appears
each time you press the Start/Stop
button, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system and auto-
matic transmission/dual clutch
transmission)
This warning message is displayed if
the Engine Start/Stop button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake pedal.
In order to start the vehicle, press the
brake pedal to start the engine.
Press clutch pedal to start
engine (for smart key system
and manual transmission)
This warning message is displayed if
the Engine Start/Stop button is in the
ACC position twice by pressing the
button repeatedly without depressing
the clutch pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal to start the
engine.
i
3-74
Convenient features of your vehicle
Press START button with key
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
you press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton while the warning message "Key
not detected" is shown.
At this time, the immobilizer indicator
light blinks.
Low Key Battery
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the battery of the smart key is dis-
charged when the Engine Start/Stop
button changes to the OFF position.
Key not detected
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the smart key is not detected when
you press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton.
Key not in vehicle
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine Start/
Stop button.
When attempting to start the vehicle,
always have the smart key with you.
Door/Hood/Trunk open indicator
This warning is displayed indicating
which door, or the hood, or the trunk
is open.
If the door/hood/trunk open warning
message is blocked with another
warning message, an icon will
appear on the top of the LCD display.
OAD048135L
■ Supervision cluster
3-75
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Sunroof open indicator
This warning message is displayed
if you turn off the engine when the
sunroof is open.
Lights Mode
This indicator displays which exterior
light is selected using the lighting
control.
You can activate or deactivate Wiper/
Lights Display function from the User
Settings mode in the cluster LCD dis-
play.
Before driving the vehicle, you
should confirm that the door/
hood/trunk is fully closed.
Also, check there is no door/
hood/trunk open warning light
or message displayed on the
instrument cluster.
CAUTION
■ Conventional cluster ■ Supervision cluster
OAD048160N/OAD048137N OIK047145L
■ Supervision cluster
3-76
Convenient features of your vehicle
Wiper
This indicator displays which wiper
speed is selected using the wiper
control.
You can activate or deactivate Wiper/
Lights Display function from the User
Settings mode in the cluster LCD dis-
play.
Turn FUSE SWITCH on
This warning message is displayed if
the fuse switch under the steering
wheel is OFF.
If this message is displayed, turn the
fuse switch on.
For more details, refer to "Fuses"
in chapter 7.
Low pressure
This warning message is displayed if
the tire pressure is low. The corre-
sponding tire on the vehicle will be
illuminated.
For more details, refer to "Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
OAD048567L
■ Supervision cluster
OAD048579N
■ Supervision cluster
OAD048144N/OIK057165L
■ Conventional cluster ■ Supervision cluster
3-77
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse
This warning message is displayed if
the brake switch fuse is disconnect-
ed.
If this message is displayed, replace
the fuse with a new one before start-
ing the vehicle. If that is not possible,
you can start the engine by pressing
the Engine Start/Stop button for 10
seconds in the ACC position.
Low Fuel
This warning message is displayed if
the fuel tank is almost out of fuel.
When this message is displayed, the
vehicle range is approximately 30
miles.
When this message is displayed, the
low fuel level warning light in the
cluster will come on.
It is recommended to look for the
nearest fueling station and refuel as
soon as possible.
Engine has overheated
This warning message is displayed
when the engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 248°F (120°C). This
means that the engine is overheated
and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to "Overheating" in chapter 6.
Check headlight
This warning message is displayed if
the headlamps are not operating
properly. The headlamp bulb may
need to be replaced.
In addition, if a specific lamp(turn
signal lamp etc.) is not operating
properly, the warning message
according to a specific lamp (turn
signal lamp etc.) is displayed. A cor-
responding bulb may need to be
replaced.
When replacing the bulb, use the
same wattage bulb.
For more details, refer to "BULB
WATTAGE" in chapter 8.
NOTICE
3-78
Convenient features of your vehicle
Check High Beam Assist (HBA)
system (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with the High Beam
Assist (HBA) system. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to "High
Beam Assist (HBA) system" in
chapter 3.
Check Forward Collision
Avoidance Assist system
(if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with the Forward
Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA)
system. Have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to "Forward
Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA)
system" in chapter 5.
Check Blind-Spot Collision
Warning (BCW) system
(if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with the Blind-
Spot Collision Warning system. Have
the vehicle inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to "Blind-
Spot Collision Warning or Rear
Cross-Traffic Collision Warning
(RCCW) System in chapter 5.
Check Smart Cruise Control
System (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with the Smart
Cruise Control system. Have the
vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to "Smart
Cruise Control" in chapter 5.
Check Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with the Driver
Attention Warning (DAW). Have the
vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to "Driver
Attention Warning (DAW)" in chap-
ter 5.
Check Lane Keeping Assist
(LKA) system (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with the Check
Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system.
Have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to "Check
Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) sys-
tem" in chapter 5.
3-79
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
LCD Display Control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
(1) : MODE button for changing
modes
(2) ▲, ▼ : MOVE switch for chang-
ing items
(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for
setting or resetting the
selected item
LLCCDD DDIISSPPLLAAYY ((FFOORR SSUUPPEERRVVIISSIIOONN CCLLUUSSTTEERR))
OAD048548N/OAD048109N
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type C
3-80
Convenient features of your vehicle
LCD Display Modes
Modes Symbol Description
Trip Computer
This mode displays information related to driving such as tripmeter, fuel
economy, etc.
For more details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Turn By Turn (TBT)
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the navigation.
Assist
(If equipped)
The Driver Assist mode displays the status of the following features:
- Smart Cruise Control (SCC) system
- Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system
- Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system
- Tire pressure
For more details, refer to "Smart Cruise Control)", "Lane Keeping
Assist (LKA) system”, “Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system” in
chapter 5 and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.
User Settings In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.
Master Warning
The Master Warning mode displays warning messages related to the vehicle
when one or more systems is not operating normally.
The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.
3-81
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Trip computer mode
The trip computer mode displays
information related to vehicle driving
parameters including range, fuel
economy, trip meter information and
vehicle speed.
For more details, refer to "Trip
Computer" in this chapter.
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
Assist mode
SCC/LKA/DAW
This mode displays the state of the
Smart Cruise Control (SCC), Lane
Keeping Assist (LKA) and Driver
Attention Warning (DAW).
For more details, refer to each
system information in chapter 5.
OIK047124N OIK047147N OAD048535N
3-82
Convenient features of your vehicle
Tire Pressure
This mode displays information relat-
ed to Tire Pressure.
For more details, refer to "Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
Master warning mode
This warning light informs the driver
the following situations.
- Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist
system malfunction (if equipped)
- Forward Collision-Avoidance
Assist radar blocked (if equipped)
- Blind-Spot Collision Warning sys-
tem malfunction (if equipped)
- Blind-Spot Collision Warning radar
blocked (if equipped)
- Smart Cruise Control malfunction
(if equipped)
- Lamp malfunction
- High Beam Assist malfunction (if
equipped)
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) malfunction
The Master Warning Light illumi-
nates if one or more of the above
warning situations occur. At this time,
a Master Warning icon ( ) will
appear beside the User Settings icon
( ), on the LCD display.
If the warning situation is solved, the
master warning light will be turned off
and the Master Warning icon will dis-
appear.
OAD048536L
OIK047173L
3-83
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
User settings mode
In this mode, you can change the
settings of the instrument cluster,
doors, lamps, etc.
1. Driver Assistance
2. Door
3. Lights
4. Sound
5. Convenience
6. Service interval
7. Other
8. Language
9. Reset
The information provided may differ
depending on which functions are
applicable to your vehicle.
Shift to P to edit settings/Engage
parking brake to edit settings
This warning message appears if
you try to adjust the User Settings
while driving.
Quick guide help
This mode provides quick guides for
the systems in the User Settings
mode.
Select an item, press and hold the
OK button.
For more details, about each sys-
tem, refer to this Owner's Manual.
OAD048572L
OAD048162N/OAD048161N
3-84
Convenient features of your vehicle
Driver Assistance
Items Explanation
SCC Reaction
• Fast/Normal/Slow
To adjust the sensitivity of the Smart Cruise Control system.
For more details, refer to ''Smart Cruise Control'' in chapter 5.
Driver Attention Warning
To adjust the sensitivity of the Driver Attention Warning (DAW).
- High Sensitivity/Normal Sensitivity/Off
For more details, refer to the "Driver Attention Warning (DAW)" in chapter 5.
Warning Timing
• Normal / Later
To select when to provide a warning for all driver assistance.
Forward Safety
• Active Assist: If selected, the system controls the vehicle and provides a warning when a colli-
sion is detected.
• Warning Only: If selected, the system provides a warning when a collision is detected.
• Off: Deactivates the system.
For more details, refer to the "Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist system" in chapter 5.
❈❈
The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.
3-85
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Driver Assistance
Items Explanation
Lane safety
To adjust the Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) function.
- Active LKA
- Lane Keeping Assist
- Lane Departure Warning
For more details, refer to the "Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system" in chapter 5.
Blind-Spot Safety
• Safe Exit Assist (SEA)
To activate or deactivate the Safe Exit Assist (SEA) function.
For more details, refer to "Safe Exit Assist" in this chapter.
• Rear Cross-Traffic Safety
To activate or deactivate the Rear Cross-Traffic Safety function.
For more details, refer to "Blind-Spot Collision Warning" in chapter 5.
• Warning Only: If selected, the system provides a warning when a collision is detected.
• Off: Deactivates the system.
For more details, refer to the "Blind-Spot Collision Warning" in chapter 5.
❈❈
The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.
3-86
Convenient features of your vehicle
Door
Items Explanation
Auto Lock
• Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 15km/h
(9.3mph).
• Enable on Shift:All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transmission shift lever is shift-
ed from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
Auto Unlock
• Disable : The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.
• On key out/On vehicle off : All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is
removed from the ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button is set to the OFF position.
• On Shift to P: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transmission shift lever is
shifted to the P (Park) position.
Two Press Unlock
• Off: The two press unlock function will be deactivated.Therefore, all doors will unlock if the door
unlock button is pressed.
• On: Only the driver's door will unlock if the door unlock button is pressed. When the door unlock
button is pressed again within 4 seconds, the remaining doors will unlock.
Horn Feedback
To activate or deactivate the horn feedback.
If the horn feedback is activated, after locking the door by pressing the lock button on the remote
key, and pressing it again within 4 seconds, the horn feedback sound will operate once to indicate
that all doors are locked (if equipped with remote key).
Smart Trunk
To activate or deactivate the smart trunk.
For more details, refer to "Smart trunk" in this chapter.
❈❈
The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.
3-87
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Lights
Items Explanation
One Touch Turn Signal
• Off:The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.
• 3, 5, 7 Flashes: The turn signal indicator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
For more details, refer to "Lighting" in this chapter.
Headlight Delay
To activate or deactivate the headlamp delay function.
For more details, refer to "Lighting" in this chapter.
❈❈
The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.
❈❈
The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.
Sound
Items Explanation
Welcome sound To activate or deactivate the welcome sound function.
3-88
Convenient features of your vehicle
Items Explanation
Seat Easy Access
• Off:The seat easy access function is deactivated.
• Normal / Extended: When you turn off the engine, the driver's seat will automatically move rear-
ward short (Normal) or long (Extended) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more comfortably.
For more details, refer to "Driver Position Memory System" in this chapter.
Welcome light To activate or deactivate the welcome light function.
Wireless Charging System
To activate or deactivate the wireless charging system in the front seat.
For more details, refer to "Wireless Charging System" in this chapter.
Wiper/Lights Display
To activate or deactivate the Wiper/ Light mode.
When activated, the LCD display shows the selected Wiper/Light mode whenever you changed the
mode.
Gear Position Pop-up
To activate or deactivate the gear position pop-up.
When activated, the gear position will be displayed on the LCD display.
Icy road warning To activate or deactivate the icy road warning.
Convenience
❈❈
The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.
3-89
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Items Explanation
Service Interval To activate or deactivate the service interval function.
Adjust Interval If the service interval menu is activated, you may adjust the time and distance.
Reset To reset the service interval.
Service interval
If the service interval is activated and the time and distance is adjusted, messages are displayed in the following
situations each time the vehicle is turned on.
- Service in: Displayed to inform the driver the remaining mileage and days to service.
- Service required: Displayed when the mileage and days to service has been reached or passed.
Information
If any of the following conditions occur, the mileage and number of days to service may be incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
i
3-90
Convenient features of your vehicle
Items Explanation
Fuel Economy Reset
• Off:The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever refueling.
• After Ignition:When the engine has been OFF for 4 hours or longer the average fuel economy will
reset automatically.
• After Refueling: The average fuel economy will reset automatically after adding 6 liters (1.6 gal-
lons) of fuel or more and after driving speed exceeds 1 km/h (1 mph).
For more details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Fuel Economy Unit
To select the fuel economy unit.
(US gallon, UK gallon)
Temperature Unit
To select the temperature unit.
(°C,°F)
Tire Pressure Unit
To select the tire pressure unit.
(psi, kPa, bar)
Other
❈❈
The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.
Reset
You can reset the menus in the User Settings Mode. All menus in the User Settings Mode are reset to factory set-
tings, except language and service interval.
Items Explanation
Language To select language.
Language
3-91
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Conventional Cluster
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
Information
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip modes
To change the trip mode, press the
TRIP button on the steering wheel.
i
TTRRIIPP CCOOMMPPUUTTEERR
• Tripmeter [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
TRIP A
• Tripmeter [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
Service Information
Digital Speed ON/OFF
TRIP B
• Range
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAD048549L
3-92
Convenient features of your vehicle
Range
Range (1)
• The range is the estimated dis-
tance the vehicle can be driven
with the remaining fuel in the fuel
tank.
- Distance range:
1 ~ 9999 mi. or 1 ~ 9999 km
• If the estimated distance is below
1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will
display "----" as the range.
Information
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been inter-
rupted, the range function may not
operate correctly.
• The range may differ from the actu-
al driving distance as it is an esti-
mate of the available driving dis-
tance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 1 gallon
(3 liters) of fuel are added to the
vehicle.
• The fuel economy and range may
vary significantly based on driving
conditions, driving habits, and con-
dition of the vehicle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and fuel consumption since
the last average fuel economy
reset.
- Fuel economy range:
0.0 ~ 99.9 MPG or L/100km or
km/L
• To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the RESET button
on the steering wheel for more
than 1 second when the average
fuel economy is displayed.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
This mode displays the instanta-
neous fuel economy while driving
when the vehicle speed is greater
than 6.2 mph (10 km/h).
- Fuel economy range:
0 ~ 50 MPG or 0 ~ 30 L/100km
i
OAD048565N
3-93
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Trip A/B
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving
distance since the last tripmeter
reset.
- Distance range:
0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi. or km
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
RESET button on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second
when the tripmeter is displayed.
Elapsed Time (2)
• The elapsed time is the total driv-
ing time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm):
00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press
the RESET button on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second
when the elapsed time is dis-
played.
Information
The elapsed time will continue to be
counted while the engine is still run-
ning (for example, when the vehicle is
in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)
Average Vehicle Speed (3)
• The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range:
0~160 MPH or 0~240 km/h
• To reset the average vehicle
speed, press the RESET button on
the steering wheel for more than 1
second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
Information
• The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance has
been less than 0.19 miles (300
meters) since the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button was
turned to ON.
• The average vehicle speed will con-
tinue to be calculated and will start
to decrease if the vehicle is stopped
while the engine is still running (for
example, when the vehicle is in traf-
fic or stopped at a stop light.)
i
i
OAD045152N
3-94
Convenient features of your vehicle
Service information
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 900 miles (1,500 km) or 30
days, the service symbol ( ) will
blink for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button to the ON position.
Information
To change or deactivate the service inter-
val, consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
If you exceed the specified service
interval, the service symbol ( )
will blink each time you turn ON the
vehicle.
To reset the service interval, press
the RESET button for more than 5
seconds and then when the miles
and days blink press the RESET but-
ton for more than 1 second.
If the service interval is not set, the
service symbol ( ) will not be dis-
played.
Digital speedometer
This message shows the speed of
the vehicle (in mph).
To turn the digital speedometer ON
and OFF press the RESET button for
more than 1 second when the digital
speedometer is displayed.
i
OAD045181N
OAD045180N OAD045177N/OAD045178N
3-95
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Supervision Cluster
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
Information
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip modes
To change the trip mode, toggle the
UP/DOWN arrow switch "▲ , ▼" on
the steering wheel.
i
OAD048580N
• Tripmeter
• Fuel Economy
• Timer
Accumulated Info
• Tripmeter
• Fuel Economy
• Timer
Drive Info
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy
Digital Speedometer
Smart Shift
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-96
Convenient features of your vehicle
Average fuel economy/
Instant fuel economy
Average Fuel Economy (1)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automati-
cally.
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the OK button on the
steering wheel for more than 1 sec-
ond when the average fuel economy
is displayed.
Automatic reset
To automatically reset the average
fuel economy, select between "After
Ignition" or "After Refueling" in the
User Settings mode in the cluster
LCD display.
- After ignition: When the engine has
been OFF for 4 hours or longer the
average fuel economy will reset
automatically.
- After refueling: The average fuel
economy will reset automatically
after adding 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of
fuel or more and after driving speed
exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).
Information
The vehicle must be driven for a min-
imum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since
the last ignition key cycle before the
average fuel economy will be recalcu-
lated.
Instant Fuel Economy (2)
• The instantaneous fuel economy is
displayed according to the bar
graph in the LCD display while
driving.
i
OIK047124N
3-97
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Accumulated Info display
This display shows the accumulated
trip distance (1), the average fuel
economy (2), and the total driving
time (3).
The information is accumulated start-
ing from the last reset.
To reset the details, press and hold
the OK button when viewing the
Accumulated driving info. The trip
distance, the average fuel economy,
and total driving time will reset simul-
taneously.
The accumulated driving information
will continue to be counted while the
engine is still running (for example,
when the vehicle is in traffic or
stopped at a stop light).
Information
The vehicle must be driven for a min-
imum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since
the last ignition key cycle before the
average fuel economy will be recalcu-
lated.
Drive Info display
This display shows the trip distance
(1), the average fuel economy (2),
and the total driving time (3).
The information is combined for each
ignition cycle. However, when the
engine has been OFF for 4 hours or
longer the Drive Info screen will reset.
To reset the details, press and hold
the OK button when viewing the Drive
Info. The trip distance, the average
fuel economy, and total driving time
will reset simultaneously.
i
OIK047174N OIK047176N
3-98
Convenient features of your vehicle
The driving information will continue to
be counted while the engine is still run-
ning (for example, when the vehicle is
in traffic or stopped at a stop light).
Information
The vehicle must be driven for a mini-
mum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since the
last ignition key cycle before the average
fuel economy will be recalculated.
Digital speedometer
This digital speedometer display
shows the speed of the vehicle.
Smart shift
This mode displays the currently
selected drive mode.
For more details, refer to "Drive
Mode Integrated Control System''
in chapter 5.
i
OIK047151N OIK047179N
3-99
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
LLIIGGHHTT
Exterior Lights
Lighting control
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
1. OFF position
2. AUTO headlamp position
(if equipped)
3. Parking lamp position
4. Headlamp position
Daytime running light (DRL)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
can make it easier for others to see
the front of your vehicle during the
day, especially after dawn and before
sunset.
The DRL system will turn the dedi-
cated lamp OFF when :
• The headlamps are ON.
• The parking lamps are ON.
• The vehicle is turned off.
• The parking brake is engaged.
AUTO light position (if equipped)
The parking lamp and headlamp will
be turned ON or OFF automatically
depending on the amount of light
outside the vehicle.
Even with the AUTO light feature in
operation, it is recommended to
manually turn ON the lamps when
driving at night or in a fog, driving in
the rain, or when you enter dark
areas, such as tunnels and parking
facilities.
OOS047404N
OAD048436N
3-100
Convenient features of your vehicle
• Do not cover or spill anything on
the sensor (1) located in front of
the instrument panel.
• Do not clean the sensor using a
window cleaner, the cleanser
may leave a light film which
could interfere with sensor oper-
ation.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of metallic coat-
ing on the front windshield, the
AUTO light system may not work
properly.
Parking lamp position ( )
The parking lamp, license plate lamp
and instrument panel lamp are
turned ON.
Headlamp position ( )
The headlamp, parking lamp, license
plate lamp and instrument panel
lamp are turned ON.
Information
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlamp.
i
NOTICE
OAD048537N OOS047406N
3-101
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlamp,
push the lever away from you. The
lever will return to its original posi-
tion.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlamp high beams are
switched on.
To turn off the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever towards you. The low
beams will turn on.
To flash the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever towards you, then
release the lever. The high beams
will remain ON as long as you hold
the lever towards you.
High Beam Assist (HBA)
(if equipped)
The High Beam Assist (HBA) is a
system that automatically adjusts the
headlamp range (switches between
high beam and low beam) according
to the brightness of other vehicles
and road conditions.
Operating condition
1. Place the headlamp switch in the
AUTO position.
2.Turn on the high beam by pushing
the lever away from you.
The High Beam Assist (HBA) ( )
indicator will illuminate.
Do not use high beam when
there are other vehicles
approaching you. Using high
beam could obstruct the other
driver's vision.
WARNING
OOS047407N
OOS047408N
OOS047409N
3-102
Convenient features of your vehicle
3.The High Beam Assist (HBA) will
turn on when vehicle speed is
above 25 mph (40 km/h).
• If the headlamp switch is pushed
away when the High Beam Assist
(HBA) is operating, the High Beam
Assist (HBA) will turn off and the
high beam will be on continuously.
• If the headlamp switch is pulled
towards you when the high beam
is off, the high beam will turn on
without the High Beam Assist
(HBA) canceled. When you let go
of the light switch, the lever will
move to the middle and the high
beam will turn off.
• If the headlamp switch is pulled
towards you when the high beam
is on by the High Beam Assist
(HBA), the low beam will be on
and the High Beam Assist (HBA)
will turn off.
• If the headlamp switch is placed
to the headlamp ON position, the
High Beam Assist (HBA) will turn
off and the low beam will be on
continuously.
When the High Beam Assist (HBA) is
operating, the high beam switches to
low beam if any of the following con-
ditions occur :
- When the headlamp of an on-com-
ing vehicle is detected.
- When the tail lamp of a vehicle in
front is detected.
- When the headlamp or tail lamp of
a motorcycle or a bicycle is detect-
ed.
- When the surrounding ambient light
is bright enough that high beams
are not required.
- When streetlights or other lights
are detected.
- When the headlamp switch is not in
the AUTO position.
- When the High Beam Assist (HBA)
is off.
- When vehicle speed is below 22mph
(35 km/h).
Warning light and message
When the High Beam Assist (HBA) is
not working properly, the Check High
Beam Assist warning message will
come on for a few second. After the
message disappears, the master
warning light ( ) will illuminate.Take
your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system
checked.
OIK047132N
3-103
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
The system may not operate nor-
mally if any of the following con-
ditions should occur:
1) When the illumination from
an on-coming vehicle or a
vehicle in front is dim. Such
examples may include:
• When the headlamps of an on-
coming vehicle or the tail
lamps of a vehicle in front is
covered with dust, snow, or
water.
• When the headlamps on an on-
coming vehicle are OFF, but the
fog lamps are ON.
2) When the High Beam Assist
camera is adversely affected
by an external condition.
Such examples may include:
• When the vehicle's head-
lamps have been damaged or
not repaired properly.
• When the vehicle headlamps
are not aimed properly.
• When the vehicle is driven on
a narrow curved road or rough
road
• When the vehicle is driven on
an uphill road or downhill
road
• When only part of the vehicle in
front is visible on a crossroad
or curved road.
• When there is a traffic light,
reflecting sign, flashing sign or
mirror.
• When the road conditions are
bad such as being wet or cov-
ered with snow.
• When a vehicle suddenly
appears from a curve.
• When the vehicle is tilted from
a flat tire or being towed.
• When the Lane Keeping Assist
(LKA) system warning light
illuminates.
• When the light from the on-
coming or front vehicle is not
detected because of exhaust
fume, smoke, fog, snow, etc.
• When the front window is cov-
ered with foreign matters such
as ice,dust,fog,or is damaged.
3) When the forward visibility is
poor. Such examples may
include:
• When the headlamps of an on-
coming vehicle or a vehicle in
front is not detected due to
poor outside visibility (smog,
smoke, dust, fog, heavy rain,
snow, etc.).
• When the lamp of the on-com-
ing or front vehicle is covered
with dust, snow or water.
• When the windshield visibility
is poor.
WARNING
3-104
Convenient features of your vehicle
Turn signals and lane change
signals
To signal a turn, push down on the
lever for a left turn or up for a right
turn in position (A).
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one
of the turn signal bulbs may be
burned out and will require replace-
ment.
Onetouch turn signal function
To activate the One Touch Turn
Signal function, push the turn signal
lever up or down to position (B) and
then release it.
OOS047410N
• Do not attempt to disassem-
ble the front view camera
without the assistance of an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer
technician. If camera is
removed for any reason, the
system may need to be re-cal-
ibrated. Have the system
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the windshield of your vehi-
cle is replaced, most likely the
front view camera will need to
be re-calibrated. If this occurs,
have your vehicle inspected
and have the system re-cali-
brated by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Be careful that water doesn't
get into the High Beam Assist
(HBA) unit and do not remove
or damage related parts of the
High Beam Assist (HBA) sys-
tem.
• Do not place objects on the
crash pad that reflect light
such as mirrors, white paper,
etc.The system may malfunc-
tion if sunlight is reflected.
• At times, the High Beam
Assist (HBA) may not work
properly. The system is for
your convenience only. It is
the responsibility of the driver
for safe driving practices and
always check the road condi-
tions for your safety.
• When the system does not
operate normally, change the
headlamp position manually
between the high beam and
low beam.
WARNING
3-105
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
The lane change signals will blink 3,
5 or 7 times.
You can activate or deactivate the
One Touch Turn Signal function or
choose the number of blinking (3, 5,
or 7) from the User Settings Mode
(Light) on the LCD display (if
equipped with supervision cluster).
For more details, refer to the "LCD
Display" section in this chapter.
Battery saver function
The purpose of this feature is to help
prevent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lamp when the
key is removed (remote key) or when
the driver turns the engine off (smart
key) and opens the driver-side door.
With this feature, the parking lamps
will turn off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lamps on
when the engine is turned off, perform
the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lamps OFF and
ON again using the light switch on
the steering column.
Headlamp delay function
(if equipped)
If the key is removed from the ignition
switch or placed in the ACC position
or the LOCK/OFF position with the
headlamps ON, the headlamps
(and/or parking lamps) remain on for
about 5 minutes. However, if the dri-
ver’s door is opened and closed, the
headlights are turned off after 15
seconds. Also, with the engine off if
the driver's door is opened and
closed, the headlamps (and/or park-
ing lamps) are turned off after 15
seconds.
The headlamps (and/or parking
lamps) can be turned off by pressing
the lock button on the remote key or
smart key twice or turning the light
switch to the OFF or AUTO position.
You can activate or deactivate the
Headlamp Delay function from the
User Settings Mode (Light) on the
LCD display (if equipped with super-
vision cluster).
For more details, refer to the "LCD
Display" section in this chapter.
If the driver exits the vehicle
through another door besides the
driver door, the battery saver func-
tion does not operate and the
headlamp delay function does not
turn OFF automatically.
This may cause the battery to dis-
charge. To avoid battery dis-
charge, turn OFF the headlamps
manually from the headlamp
switch before exiting the vehicle.
NOTICE
3-106
Convenient features of your vehicle
Interior Lights
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is turned off or the battery will dis-
charge.
Interior lamp AUTO cut
The interior lamps will automatically
go off approximately 20 minutes after
the engine is turned off and the
doors are closed.If a door is opened,
the lamp will go off 40 minutes after
the engine is turned off. If the doors
are locked by the remote key or
smart key and the vehicle enters the
armed stage of the theft alarm sys-
tem, the lamps will go off five sec-
onds later.
Front lamps
(1) Front Map Lamp
(2) Front Door Lamp
(3) Front Room Lamp ON
(4) Front Room Lamp OFF
Front Map Lamp :
Press either of lenses turn the map
lamp on or off. This light produces a
spot beam for convenient use as a
map lamp at night or as a personal
lamp for the driver and the front pas-
senger.
Front Door Lamp ( ):
The front or rear room lamps come
on when the front or rear doors are
opened if the engine is running or
not.When doors are unlocked by the
remote key or smart key, the front
and rear lamps come on for approxi-
mately 30 seconds as long as any
door is not opened. The front and
rear room lamps go out gradually
after approximately 30 seconds if the
door is closed. However, if the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position or all
doors are locked, the front and rear
lamps will turn off.If a door is opened
with the ignition switch in the ACC
position or the OFF position, the
front and rear lamps stay on for
about 20 minutes.
NOTICE
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark. The
interior lights may obscure your
view and cause an accident.
WARNING
OAD045405
■ Type A
OAD045406
■ Type B
3-107
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Front room lamp
•:
Press the button to turn ON the
room lamp for the front/rear seats.
•:
Press the button to turn OFF the
room lamp for the front/rear seats
regardless of front or rear door
open position.
Rear lamp
Rear Room Lamp ( ) :
Press this switch to turn the room
lamp on and off.
Trunk room lamp
The trunk room lamp comes on
when the trunk is opened.
The trunk lamp comes on as long
as the trunk lid is open.To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, close the trunk lid securely
after using the trunk.
NOTICE
OAD048408NOAD045407
3-108
Convenient features of your vehicle
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
Push the switch to turn the light on or
off.
• :The lamp will turn on if this
button is pressed.
• :The lamp will turn off if this
button is pressed.
Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor
is closed without the lamp off, it
may discharge the battery or dam-
age the sunvisor.
Welcome System (if equipped)
Welcome light
Door handle lamp (if equipped)
When all the doors (and trunk) are
closed and locked, the door handle
lamp will come on for about 15 sec-
onds if any of the below is per-
formed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
• When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
• When the vehicle is approached
with the smart key in possession.
Headlamp and Parking lamp
When the headlamp (with the lamp
switch in the headlamp or AUTO
position) is on and all doors (and
trunk) are locked and closed, the
parking lamp and headlamp will
come on for 15 seconds if/or any of
the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button on the remote key or
smart key the parking lamp and
headlamp will turn off immediately.
You can activate or deactivate the
Welcome Light from the User
Settings Mode on the LCD display (if
equipped with supervision cluster).
For more details, refer to the "LCD
Display" section in this chapter.
NOTICE
OAD045410
OAD048434N
3-109
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Interior lamp
When the interior lamp switch is in
the DOOR position and all doors
(and trunk) are closed and locked,
the room lamp will come on for 30
seconds if any of the below is per-
formed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
• When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button on the remote key or
smart key the room lamp will turn off
immediately.
3-110
Convenient features of your vehicle
A :Wiper speed control
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C :Wash with brief wipes
Windshield Wipers
Operates as follows when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward and
release.The wipers will oper-
ate continuously if the lever is
held in this position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation.
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. To
vary the speed setting, move
the speed control lever.The top
most setting will run the wipers
most frequently (for more rain).
The bottom setting will run the
wipers the least frequently (for
less rain).
LO :The wiper runs at a lower speed.
HI : The wiper runs at a higher speed.
Information
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
If you do not remove the snow and/or
ice before using the wiper and washer,
it may damage the wiper and washer
system.
i
WWIIPPEERRSS AANNDD WWAASSHHEERRSS
OLF044278
3-111
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Windshield Washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles. The spray and
wiper operation will continue until
you release the lever. If the washer
does not work, you may need to add
washer fluid to the washer fluid
reservoir.
• To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not oper-
ate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers and washer system,
use anti-freezing washer fluids
in the winter season or cold
weather.
NOTICE
When the outside temperature
is below freezing, ALWAYS
warm the windshield using the
defroster to prevent the washer
fluid from freezing on the wind-
shield and obscuring your
vision which could result in an
accident and serious injury or
death.
WARNING
OLF044095N
3-112
Convenient features of your vehicle
Rear View Monitor
The Rear View Monitor will activate
when the engine is running and the
shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion.
This is a supplemental system that
provides a view of the area behind
the vehicle through the display audio
or AVN screen while the vehicle is in
the R (Reverse) position.
Always keep the camera lens
clean. The camera may not work
normally if the lens is covered
with dirt or snow.
NOTICE
DDRRIIVVEERR AASSSSIISSTT SSYYSSTTEEMM
The Rear View Monitor is not a
safety device. It only serves to
assist the driver in identifying
objects directly behind the mid-
dle of the vehicle. The camera
does NOT cover the complete
area behind the vehicle.
WARNING
• Never rely solely on the Rear
View Monitor when backing-
up.
• ALWAYS look around your
vehicle to make sure there are
no objects or obstacles
before moving the vehicle in
any direction to prevent a col-
lision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven
close to objects, particularly
pedestrians, and especially
children.
WARNING
OAD048114N
OAD048113
3-113
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
DDEEFFRROOSSTTEERR
To prevent damage to the conduc-
tors bonded to the inside surface
of the rear window, never use
sharp instruments or window
cleaners containing abrasives to
clean the window.
If you want to defrost and defog
the front windshield, refer to the
"Windshield Defrosting and
Defogging" section in this chap-
ter.
Rear Window Defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the interior and exterior of the rear
window, while engine is running.
• To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the cen-
ter facia switch panel.The indicator
on the rear window defroster but-
ton illuminates when the defroster
is ON.
• To turn off the defroster, press the
rear window defroster button
again.
Information
• If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it
off before operating the rear
defroster.
• The rear window defroster auto-
matically turns off after approxi-
mately 20 minutes or when the igni-
tion switch is in the LOCK/OFF
position.
Side view mirror defroster
If your vehicle is equipped with the
side view mirror defrosters, they will
operate at the same time you turn on
the rear window defroster.
i
NOTICE
OAD048323N
■ Manual climate control system
OAD048324N
■ Automatic climate control system
3-114
Convenient features of your vehicle
MMAANNUUAALL CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OAD048300N
1. Fan speed control knob
2.Temperature control knob
3. Mode selection knob
4. Front windshield defroster posi-
tion
5. Rear window defroster button
6. Air intake control button
7. A/C (Air conditioning) button
3-115
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Heating and Air Conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling :
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air or recirculated
air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
OAD048302N
3-116
Convenient features of your vehicle
Mode selection
The mode selection knob controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dash-
board outlets, or windshield. Five
symbols are used to represent Face,
Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and
Defrost air position.
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, C, E)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield, side
window defrosters, and side vents.
Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters, and side vents.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side vents.
OAD048301N
3-117
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
MAX A/C-Level (B, D)
(if equipped)
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool
the inside of the vehicle faster. Air
flow is directed toward the upper
body and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and
the recirculated air position cannot
be selected. Turn the fan speed
mode to adjust.
Instrument panel vents
The instrument panel vent air flow
can be directed up/down or left/right
using the vent adjustment lever.
The air flow can also be closed using
the vent adjustment lever. To close
the instrument panel vents, slide the
vent adjustment lever to the LEFT
until it clicks.
Temperature control
The temperature will increase by
turning the knob to the right.
The temperature will decrease by
turning the knob to the left.
OAD048305N
OAD048303N
OAD048304N
3-118
Convenient features of your vehicle
Air intake control
This button is used to select the out-
side (fresh) air position or recirculated
air position.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Information
Prolonged use of the air conditioning
with the recirculated air position
selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
i
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, that may cause
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
(without the air conditioning
selected) may allow humidity
to increase inside the vehicle
which may fog the glass and
obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause seri-
ous injury or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
WARNING
OAD048306N
3-119
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Fan speed control
Turn the knob to the right to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the
knob to the left to decrease fan
speed and airflow.
Setting the fan speed control knob to
the "0" position turns off the fan.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Press the A/C button to turn the sys-
tem on (indicator light will illuminate)
and off.
System Operation
Ventilation
1. Select the Face Level mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Select the Floor Level mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system on.
If the windshield fogs up, select the
Floor & Defrost mode or select
the Front Defrost mode.
OAD048308N OAD048309N
3-120
Convenient features of your vehicle
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the car through the
ventilation system, temporarily set
the air intake control to the recircu-
lated air position. Return the con-
trol to the fresh air position when
the irritation has passed. This will
help keep the driver alert and com-
fortable.
• To prevent the inside of the wind-
shield from fogging, set the air
intake control to the fresh air posi-
tion and fan speed to the desired
position, turn on the air condition-
ing system, and adjust the temper-
ature control to desired tempera-
ture.
Air conditioning
All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning
Systems are filled with environmen-
tally friendly R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the air conditioning button.
3. Set the mode to the Face Level
mode.
4. Set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. However,
prolonged operation of the recircu-
lated air position will excessively
dry the air.In this case, change the
air position.
5. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position then set the fan
speed control to the highest speed.
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the engine tem-
perature gauge closely while driv-
ing up hills or in heavy traffic
when outside temperatures are
high. Air conditioning system
operation can cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blow-
er fan, but turn the air condition-
ing system off if the engine tem-
perature gauge indicates engine
overheating.
NOTICE
3-121
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Air conditioning system operation
tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time to
let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• After sufficient cooling has been
achieved, switch back from the recir-
culated air to the fresh outside air
position.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the
windows on rainy or humid days,
decrease the humidity inside the
vehicle by operating the air condition-
ing system with the windows and
sunroof closed.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to
ensure maximum system perform-
ance.
• If you operate air conditioner exces-
sively, the difference between the
temperature of the outside air and
that of the windshield could cause the
outer surface of the windshield to fog
up, causing loss of visibility. In this
case, set the mode selection knob or
button to the position and fan
speed control to the lower speed.
System Maintenance
Climate control air filter
This filter is installed behind the
glove box. It filters the dust or other
pollutants that enter the vehicle
through the heating and air condi-
tioning system.
Have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer according to the maintenance
schedule. If the car is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air con-
ditioner filter inspections and
changes are required.
If the air flow rate suddenly decreas-
es, the system should be checked at
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative influence on the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrig-
erant is used. Otherwise, damage
to the compressor and abnormal
system operation may occur.
NOTICE
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
3-122
Convenient features of your vehicle
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Air Conditioning refrigerant label
The actual Air Conditioning refriger-
ant label in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below :
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
location of the air conditioning refrig-
erant label.
ODH043365
■ Example
Because the refriger-
ant is at very high
pressure, the air con-
ditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used, oth-
erwise damage to the vehicle
and personal injury may occur.
WARNING
3-123
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM
OAD048310L
1. Driver's temperature control knob
2. Front windshield defrost button
3. Rear window defrost button
4. Fan speed control knob
5. Air intake control button
6. Passenger's temperature control knob
7. AUTO (automatic control) button
8. OFF button
9. Air conditioning button
10. Mode selection button
11. SYNC button
12. Climate control information screen
Operating the blower when the
ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion could cause the battery to dis-
charge. Operate the blower when
the engine is running.
NOTICE
3-124
Convenient features of your vehicle
Automatic Heating and Air
Conditioning
The Automatic Climate Control
System is controlled by setting the
desired temperature.
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake
and air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by the temperature set-
ting you select.
2.Turn the temperature control knob
to the desired temperature. If the
temperature is set to the lowest
setting (Lo), the air conditioning
system will operate continuously.
To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time
to deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The 'AUTO'
sign will illuminate on the infor-
mation display once again.)
- Fan speed control knob
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other functions
operate automatically.
For your convenience and to improve
the effectiveness of the climate con-
trol, use the AUTO button and set the
temperature to 73°F (23°C).
To change the temperature unit from
°F to °C or °C to °F:
Press the AUTO button for 3 seconds
while pressing the OFF button.
OAD048311N
OAD048312N
3-125
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Never place anything near the
sensor to ensure better control of
the heating and cooling system.
Manual Heating and Air
Conditioning
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pushing
buttons other than the AUTO button.
In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons selected.
When pressing any button except the
AUTO button while using automatic
operation, the functions not selected
will be controlled automatically.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling:
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
7. Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
NOTICE
OAD048313N
3-126
Convenient features of your vehicle
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
OAD048302N
OAD048314N
3-127
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
The air flow outlet direction is cycled
as follows:
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
OAD048316N
3-128
Convenient features of your vehicle
Instrument panel vents
The instrument panel vent air flow
can be directed up/down or left/right
using the vent adjustment lever.
The air flow can also be closed using
the vent adjustment lever. To close
the instrument panel vents, slide the
vent adjustment lever to the LEFT
until it clicks.
Temperature control
Turn the knob to the right to increase
the fan speed temperature and air-
flow. Turn the knob to the left to
decrease fan temperature.
The temperature will increase or
decrease by 1°F/0.5°C for each but-
ton press. When set to the lowest
temperature setting, the air condi-
tioning will operate continuously.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
• Press the "SYNC" button to operate
the driver and passenger side tem-
perature equally.
The passenger side temperature will
be set to the same temperature as
the driver side temperature.
• Turn the left temperature control
knob.The driver and passenger side
temperature will be adjusted equally.
Adjusting the driver and passen-
ger side temperature individually
Press the "SYNC" button again to
operate the driver and passenger
side temperature individually. The
button indicator will turn off.
OAD048317L
OAD048318N
OAD048304N
■ Driver's side ■ Passenger's side
3-129
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Fahrenheit.
To change the temperature unit from
°F to °C or °C to °F:
- On the instrument cluster, go to
User Settings Mode ➝ Other
Features ➝ Temperature Unit.
- Press the AUTO button for 3 sec-
onds while pressing the OFF but-
ton.(Automatic climate control sys-
tem)
Both the temperature unit on the
cluster LCD display and climate con-
trol screen will change.
Air intake control
This button is used to select the out-
side (fresh) air position or recirculat-
ed air position.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Information
Prolonged use of the air conditioning
with the recirculated air position
selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
i
OAD048319N
3-130
Convenient features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by turning the fan
speed control knob.
The higher the fan speed is, the
more air is delivered.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
Information
For better sound quality, fan speed
may automatically slow down for a
couple of minutes when you activate
voice recognition or hands free.
Air conditioning
Push the A/C button to manually turn
the system on (indicator light will illu-
minate) and off.
i
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, that may cause
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
(without the air conditioning
selected) may allow humidity
to increase inside the vehicle
which may fog the glass and
obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause seri-
ous injury or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
WARNING
OAD048321NOAD048320N
3-131
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
OFF mode
Push the OFF button of the front to
turn off the air climate control sys-
tem. You can still operate the mode
and air intake buttons as long as the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
System Operation
Ventilation
1. Select the Face Level mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Select the Floor Level mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system on.
If the windshield fogs up, select the
Floor & Defrost mode or press
the Front Defrost mode.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the car through the
ventilation system, temporarily set
the air intake control to the recircu-
lated air position. Return the con-
trol to the fresh air position when
the irritation has passed. This will
help keep the driver alert and com-
fortable.
• To prevent the inside of the wind-
shield from fogging, set the air
intake control to the fresh air posi-
tion and fan speed to the desired
position, turn on the air conditioning
system, and adjust the temperature
control to desired temperature.
OAD048322N
3-132
Convenient features of your vehicle
Air conditioning
All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning
Systems are filled with environmen-
tally friendly R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the air conditioning button.
3. Set the mode to the Face Level
mode.
4. Set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. However,
prolonged operation of the recircu-
lated air position will excessively
dry the air.In this case, change the
air position.
5. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position then set the fan
speed control to the highest speed.
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the engine tem-
perature gauge closely while driv-
ing up hills or in heavy traffic
when outside temperatures are
high. Air conditioning system
operation can cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blow-
er fan, but turn the air condition-
ing system off if the engine tem-
perature gauge indicates engine
overheating.
Air conditioning system operation
tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• After sufficient cooling has been
achieved, switch back from the
recirculated air to the fresh outside
air position.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system with the win-
dows and sunroof closed.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
• If you operate air conditioner
excessively, the difference between
the temperature of the outside air
and that of the windshield could
cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, causing loss
of visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button to
the position and fan speed
control to the lower speed.
NOTICE
3-133
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
System Maintenance
Climate control air filter
This filter is installed behind the
glove box. It filters the dust or other
pollutants that enter the vehicle
through the heating and air condi-
tioning system.
Have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer according to the maintenance
schedule. If the car is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air condi-
tioner filter inspections and changes
are required.
If the air flow rate suddenly decreas-
es, the system should be checked at
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative influence on the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrig-
erant is used. Otherwise, damage
to the compressor and abnormal
system operation may occur.
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
Because the refriger-
ant is at very high
pressure, the air con-
ditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used, oth-
erwise damage to the vehicle
and personal injury may occur.
WARNING
3-134
Convenient features of your vehicle
Air Conditioning refrigerant
label
The actual Air Conditioning refriger-
ant label in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below :
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
location of the air conditioning refrig-
erant label.
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set
the mode to the floor-defrost posi-
tion.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, side view mirrors, and all side
windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi-
ciency and to reduce the probability
of fogging up the inside of the wind-
shield.
If the engine temperature is still
cold after starting, then a brief
engine warm up period may be
required for the vented air flow to
become warm or hot.
NOTICE
WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD DDEEFFRROOSSTTIINNGG AANNDD DDEEFFOOGGGGIINNGG
Windshield heating
Do not use the or posi-
tion during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temper-
ature of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility could cause an acci-
dent resulting in serious injury
or death. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button
to the position and fan
speed control knob or button to
a lower speed.
WARNING
ODH043365
■ Example
3-135
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Manual Climate Control System
To defog inside windshield
1. Select any fan speed except “0”
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the or position.
4.The outside (fresh) air will be
selected automatically. Additionally,
the air conditioning will automatical-
ly operate if the mode is selected to
the position.
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, press the correspon-
ding button manually.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme
hot position.
3. Select the position.
4.The outside (fresh) air and air con-
ditioning will be selected automat-
ically.
Automatic Climate Control
System
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired fan speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4.The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is
not selected automatically, adjust the
corresponding button manually.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
OAD048325N
OAD048326N
OAD048327N
3-136
Convenient features of your vehicle
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2.Set the temperature to the
extreme hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4.The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
Defogging logic (if equipped)
To reduce the probability of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning are con-
trolled automatically according to
certain conditions such as or
position. To cancel or return the
defogging logic, do the following.
Manual climate control system
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2.Select the defroster position ( ).
3. Press the air intake control button
at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The process should be completed
within 10 seconds after the defroster
mode ( ) was selected.
The indicator on the air intake button
blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of
interval. It indicates that the defog-
ging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
Automatic climate control system
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defroster button ( ).
3.While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button at least 5 times with-
in 3 seconds.
The climate control information
screen will blink 3 times with 0.5 sec-
onds of interval. It indicates that the
defogging logic is canceled or
returned to the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
OAD048328N
3-137
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Auto Defogging System (Only
for Automatic Climate Control
System, if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the possibil-
ity of fogging up the inside of the
windshield by automatically sensing
the moisture of inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is
on.
Information
The auto defogging system may not
operate normally, when the outside
temperature is below 50 °F (-10 °C).
When the Auto Defogging
System operates, the indi-
cator will illuminate.
If higher level of moisture are sensed
in the vehicle, the Auto Defogging
System will operate in the following
order:
Step 1) The A/C button will turn ON.
Step 2) The air intake control will
change to Fresh mode.
Step 3) The mode will be changed to
defrost to direct airflow to the
windshield.
Step 4) The fan speed will be set to
MAX.
If the air conditioning is off or recircu-
lated air position is manually select-
ed while Auto Defogging System is
ON, the Auto Defogging System
Indicator will blink 3 times to signal
that the manual operation has been
canceled.
To cancel or reset the
Auto Defogging System
Press the front windshield defroster
button for 3 seconds when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
When the Auto Defogging System is
canceled, ADS OFF symbol will blink
3 times and the ADS OFF will be dis-
played on the climate control infor-
mation screen.
When the Auto Defogging System is
reset, ADS OFF symbol will blink 6
times without a signal.
i
OAD048331N
3-138
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
• When the air conditioning is turned
on by Auto defogging system, if you
try to turn off the air conditioning,
the indicator will blink 3 times and
the air conditioning will not be
turned off.
• For efficiency, do not select recircu-
lated air position while Auto defog-
ging system is operating.
• When Auto defogging mode is
selected, fan speed, temperature and
intake mode which is adjusted man-
ually are canceled for better defog-
ging result.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
NOTICE
i
3-139
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL AADDDDIITTIIOONNAALL FFEEAATTUURREESS ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
Automatic Ventilation
(if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position or when the engine is run-
ning and temperature is below 59°F
(15°C) with the recirculated air posi-
tion selected more than five minutes,
the air intake position will automati-
cally change to the outside (fresh) air
position.
To cancel or reset the Automatic
Ventilation
When the air conditioning system is
on, select Face Level mode and
while pressing the A/C button, press
the recirculated air position button
five times within three seconds.
Sunroof Inside Air
Recirculation (if equipped)
When the heater or air conditioning
system is on with the sunroof
opened, the outside (fresh) air posi-
tion will be automatically selected. At
this time, if you press the recirculated
air position button, the recirculated
air position will be selected but will
change back to the outside (fresh) air
position after 3 minutes.
When the sunroof is closed, the air
intake position will return to the orig-
inal position that was selected.
To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartments.
NOTICE
SSTTOORRAAGGEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
Never store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot tem-
peratures for extended periods.
WARNING
ALWAYS keep the storage com-
partment covers closed secure-
ly while driving. Items inside
your vehicle are moving as fast
as the vehicle. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there
is a crash, the items may fly out
of the compartment and may
cause an injury if they strike the
driver or a passenger.
WARNING
3-140
Convenient features of your vehicle
Center Console Storage
To open :
Grab and hold the latch (1) on the
arm rest then lift the lid.
Sliding Armrest (if equipped)
To move the armrest forward:
Grab and hold the latch (1) on the arm
rest then slide the armrest forward.
To move the armrest rearward:
Grab and hold the latch (1) on the
armrest then push the armrest rear-
ward.
Glove Box
To open:
Pull the lever (1).
OAD048411 OAD048435
Do not grab the front portion of
the armrest (1) when moving
the armrest rearward. You may
pinch your fingers.
WARNING
OAD048412N
ALWAYS close the glove box
door after use.
An open glove box door can
cause serious injury to the pas-
senger in an accident, even if
the passenger is wearing a seat
belt.
WARNING
3-141
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Sunglass Holder
To open:
Push and release the cover and the
holder will slowly open. Place your
sunglasses in the compartment door
with the lenses facing out.
To close:
Push back into position.
Make sure the sunglass holder is
closed while driving.
OAD045413
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sun-
glass holder. Such objects
can be thrown from the holder
in the event of a sudden stop
or an accident, possibly injur-
ing the passengers in the
vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses
forcibly into a sunglass hold-
er. It may cause personal
injury if you try to open it
forcibly when the glasses are
jammed in holder.
WARNING
3-142
Convenient features of your vehicle
IINNTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS
Cup Holder
Cups or small beverages cups may
be placed in the cup holders.
Front cup holder liner can be
removed for cleaning.
Rear
• Cup holders in center console rear:
Pull the cup holder cover rear-
wards to completely unfold the cup
holder.
• Cup holders in armrest: Pull the
armrest down to use the cup hold-
ers.
• Avoid abrupt starting and
braking when the cup holder
is in use to prevent spilling
your drink. If hot liquid spills,
you could be burned. Such a
burn to the driver could cause
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
• Do not place uncovered or
unsecured cups, bottles,
cans, etc., in the cup holder
containing hot liquid while the
vehicle is in motion. Injuries
may result in the event of sud-
den stop or collision.
• Only use soft cups in the cup
holders. Hard objects can
injure you in an accident.
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of
direct sun light and do not put
them in a hot vehicle. It may
explode.
WARNING
OAD045416
■ Front
OAD048538L
■ Rear (if equipped)
• Type A
OAD045417
■ Rear (if equipped)
• Type B
3-143
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• Keep your drinks sealed while
driving to prevent spilling your
drink. If liquid spills, it may get
into the vehicle's electrical/elec-
tronic system and damage elec-
trical/electronic parts.
• When cleaning spilled liquids,
do not dry the cup holder at high
temperature. This may damage
the cup holder.
Sunvisor
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side
(2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down
the sunvisor and slide the mirror
cover (3).
Adjust the sunvisor forward or back-
ward (4) as needed. Use the ticket
holder (5) to hold tickets (if
equipped).
Close the vanity mirror cover secure-
ly and return the sunvisor to its origi-
nal position after use.
Do not put several tickets in the
ticket holder at one time. This
could cause damage to the ticket
holder.
NOTICE
NOTICE
For your safety, do not block
your view when using the sunvi-
sor.
WARNING
OAD045418L
3-144
Convenient features of your vehicle
Power Outlet (if equipped)
The power outlet is designed to pro-
vide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems.
The devices should draw less than
180 W (Watts) with the engine run-
ning.
To prevent damage to the Power
Outlets :
• Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and
remove the accessory plug after
use. Using the accessory plug
for prolonged periods of time
with the engine off could cause
the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric acces-
sories which are less than 180 W
(Watts) in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power out-
let.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet.These devices may
cause excessive audio static
and malfunctions in other elec-
tronic systems or devices used
in your vehicle.
• Push the plug in as far as it will
go. If good contact is not made,
the plug may overheat and the
fuse may open.
• Plug in battery equipped electri-
cal/electronic devices with
reverse current protection. The
current from the battery may
flow into the vehicle's electri-
cal/electronic system and cause
system malfunction.
NOTICE
Avoid electrical shocks. Do not
place your fingers or foreign
objects (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet or touch the power outlet
with a wet hand.
WARNING
OAD048419
OAD048577L
■ Type B
■ Type A
3-145
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Wireless Cellular Phone
Charging System (if equipped)
[A]: Indicator light, [B]: Charging pad
On certain models, the vehicle
comes equipped with a wireless cel-
lular phone charger.
The system is available when all
doors are closed, and when the igni-
tion switch is ON.
To charge a cellular phone
The wireless cellular phone charging
system charges only the Qi-enabled
cellular phones ( ). Read the label
on the cellular phone accessory
cover or visit your cellular phone
manufacturer's website to check
whether your cellular phone supports
the Qi technology.
The wireless charging process starts
when you put a Qi-enabled cellular
phone on the wireless charging unit.
1. Remove other items, including the
smart key, from the wireless charg-
ing unit. If not, the wireless charg-
ing process may be interrupted.
Place the cellular phone on the
center of the charging pad ( ).
2. The indicator light is orange when
the cellular phone is charging.The
indicator light turns green when
phone charging is complete.
3. You can turn ON or OFF the wire-
less charging function in the user
settings mode on the instrument
cluster. For further information,
refer to the "LCD Display Modes"
in this chapter.
If your cellular phone is not charging:
- Slightly change the position of the
cellular phone on the charging
pad.
- Make sure the indicator light is
orange.
The indicator light will blink orange for
10 seconds if there is a malfunction in
the wireless charging system.
In this case, temporarily stop the
charging process, and re-attempt to
charge your cellular phone again.
The system warns you with a mes-
sage on the LCD display if the cellular
phone is still on the wireless charging
unit after the engine is turned OFF
and the front door is opened.
Information
For some manufacturers' cellular
phones, the system may not warn you
even though the cellular phone is left
on the wireless charging unit. This is
due to the particular characteristic of
the cellular phone and not a malfunc-
tion of the wireless charging.
i
OAD048575L
3-146
Convenient features of your vehicle
• The wireless cellular phone
charging system may not sup-
port certain cellular phones,
which are not verified for the Qi
specification ( ).
• When placing your cellular
phone on the charging mat,
position the phone in the middle
of the mat for optimal charging
performance. If your cell phone
is off to the side, the charging
rate may be less and in some
cases the cell phone may experi-
ence higher heat conduction.
• In some cases, the wireless
charging may stop temporarily
when the Remote Key or Smart
Key is used, either when starting
the vehicle or locking/unlocking
the doors, etc.
• When charging certain cellular
phones, the charging indicator
may not change to green when
the cell phone is fully charged.
• The wireless charging process
may temporarily stop, when tem-
perature abnormally increases/
decreases inside the wireless cel-
lular phone charging system.Stop
the charging cellular phone and
wait until temperature falls to a
certain level.
• The wireless charging process
may temporarily stop when there
is any metallic item, such as a
coin, between the wireless cellular
phone charging system and the
cellular phone.
• When charging some cellular
phones with a self-protection fea-
ture, the wireless charging speed
may decrease and the wireless
charging may stop.
• If the cellular phone has a thick
cover, the wireless charging may
not be possible.
• If the cell phone is not completely
contacting the charging pad, wire-
less charging may not operate
properly.
• Some magnetic items like credit
cards, phone cards or rail tickets
may be damaged if left with the
cellular phone during the charging
process.
• When any cellular phone without a
wireless charging function or a
metallic object is placed on the
charging pad, a small noise may
sound.This small sound is due to
the vehicle discerning compatibil-
ity of the object placed on the
charging pad. It does not affect
your vehicle or the cellular phone
in any way.
Information
If the ignition switch is in the LOCK/
OFF position, the charging also stops.
Information
This device complies with part 15 of
the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
i
i
NOTICE
3-147
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
USB Charger (if equipped)
The USB charger is located inside
the console box between the driver’s
seat and the front passenger’s seat.
Insert the USB charger into the USB
port, and re-charge a smart phone or
a tablet PC.
A charging status/charging comple-
tion message is displayed on a
screen of a smart phone or a tablet
PC.
A smart phone or a tablet PC may
get warmer during the re-charging
process.It does not indicate any mal-
function with the charging system.
A smart phone or a tablet PC, which
adopts a different re-charging
method, may not be properly re-
charged. In this case, use an exclu-
sive charger of your device.
This USB charging terminal will not
allow you to play your media on the
AVN unit. To connect your media to
the AVN unit, use the USB port in the
multi box and follow steps in chapter
4 - Multimedia.
Clock
For clock setting details, please refer
to Setup Mode in chapter 4 or the
Multimedia System user's manual
that was supplied with your vehicle.
Clothes Hanger (if equipped)
These hangers are not designed to
hold large or heavy items.
Do not adjust the clock while
driving, you may lose your
steering control and cause an
accident that results in severe
personal injury or death.
WARNING
OAD045428 OOS047065
3-148
Convenient features of your vehicle
Floor Mat Anchor(s)
ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors
to attach the front floor mats to the
vehicle. The anchors on the front
floor carpet keep the floor mats from
sliding forward.
ODM042334
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat
to the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehi-
cle's floor mat anchor(s)
before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to
the vehicle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top
of one another (e.g. all-weath-
er rubber mat on top of a car-
peted floor mat). Only a single
floor mat should be installed
in each position.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver's side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal opera-
tion, HYUNDAI recommends
that the HYUNDAI floor mat
designed for use in your vehicle
be installed.
WARNING
Do not hang other objects such
as hangers or hard objects
except clothes. Also, do not put
heavy, sharp or breakable
objects in the clothes pockets.
In an accident or when the cur-
tain air bag is inflated, it may
cause vehicle damage or per-
sonal injury.
WARNING
OGSB047265L
Multimedia System
Multimedia System.................................................4-2
AUX, USB and iPod
®
port ...............................................4-2
Antenna ...............................................................................4-2
Steering Wheel Audio Controls......................................4-3
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Hands-Free...........4-4
Audio (Display Audio) / Video /
Navigation System (AVN).................................................4-4
4
4-2
Multimedia System
• If you install an aftermarket HID
head lamp, your vehicle's audio
and electronic devices may not
function properly.
• Prevent chemicals such as per-
fume, cosmetic oil, sun cream,
hand cleaner, and air freshener
from contacting the interior
parts because they may cause
damage or discoloration.
AUX, USB and iPod
®
Port
You can use an AUX port or USB
cable to connect audio devices to the
vehicle AUX or USB port.
Information
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
❈ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Antenna
Shark fin antenna (if equipped)
The shark fin antenna will receive the
transmit data (example: XM signal).
Glass antenna
Your vehicle uses a glass antenna to
receive both AM and FM signals.
i
NOTICE
MMUULLTTIIMMEEDDIIAA SSYYSSTTEEMM
OAD048427N
OAD048424N
4-3
Multimedia System
4
• To prevent damage to the rear
glass antenna, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaner
containing abrasives to clean
the window. Clean the inside
surface of the rear glass window
with a piece of soft cloth.
• Avoid adding metallic coatings
to the rear glass window. These
can degrade AM and FM broad-
cast signals.
Steering Wheel Audio Control
Do not operate multiple audio
remote control buttons simultane-
ously.
VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)
• Press the VOLUME switch up to
increase volume.
• Press the VOLUME switch down to
decrease volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
If the SEEK/PRESET switch is
pressed up or down and held for 0.8
second or more, it will function in the
following modes:
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button. It will SEEK until you
release the button.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the FF/RW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET switch is
pressed up or down, it will function
in the following modes:
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
TION UP/DOWN button.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/
DOWN button.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OAD048446N
■ Type A
OAD048542N
■ Type B
4-4
Multimedia System
MODE (3)
Press the MODE button to toggle
through Radio, XM or AUX modes.
MUTE ( ) (4)
• Press the MUTE button to mute the
sound.
• Press the MUTE button again to
activate the sound.
Information
Detailed information for audio control
buttons is described later in this chap-
ter or in the Car Multimedia User's
Manual that was supplied with this
vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Hands-Free
You can use the phone wirelessly by
using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
(1) Call / Answer button
(2) Call end button
(3) Microphone
Detailed information for the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
hands-free is described later in this
chapter or in the Car Multimedia
User's Manual.
Audio (Display Audio) / Video /
Navigation System (AVN)
Detailed information for the AVN sys-
tem is described in the Car
Multimedia User's Manual.
i
OAD048447N
■ Type A
OAD045430
■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
5
Before Driving ........................................................5-4
Before Entering the Vehicle...........................................5-4
Before Starting ..................................................................5-4
Ignition Switch........................................................5-6
Key Ignition Switch ...........................................................5-6
Engine Start/Stop Button................................................5-9
Manual Transmission...........................................5-16
Manual Transmission Operation..................................5-16
Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-18
Automatic Transmission ......................................5-19
Automatic Transmission Operation.............................5-19
Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-24
Dual Clutch Transmission....................................5-26
Dual clutch transmission operation............................5-26
LCD display for transmission temperature and
warning message.............................................................5-28
Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-37
Braking System ....................................................5-39
Power Brakes...................................................................5-39
Disc Brakes Wear Indicator ..........................................5-40
Rear Drum Brakes...........................................................5-40
Parking Brake...................................................................5-40
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-42
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-44
Vehicle Stability Management (VSM).........................5-48
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ....................................5-49
Good Braking Practices.................................................5-49
Drive Mode Integrated Control System............5-51
Blind-spot Collision Warning (BCW) .................5-54
System description .........................................................5-54
System setting and activation......................................5-55
Warning and system control ........................................5-56
Detecting sensor .............................................................5-58
Limitations of the system .............................................5-60
Rear Cross-traffic Collision Warning (RCCW)
System ...................................................................5-64
System description .........................................................5-64
System setting and activation......................................5-64
Warning and system control ........................................5-66
Detecting sensor .............................................................5-67
Limitations of the system .............................................5-69
Forward Collision Avoidance (FCA) System.....5-73
System Setting and Activation.....................................5-73
FCA Warning Message and System Control ............5-75
FCA Sensor .......................................................................5-78
System Malfunction .......................................................5-79
Limitations of the System.............................................5-81
5
Forward Collision Avoidance (FCA) System
(with hyundai smart sense)................................5-86
System Setting and Activation.....................................5-86
FCA Warning Message and System Control ............5-89
FCA Sensor (Front Radar/Front Camera).................5-91
System Malfunction .......................................................5-93
Limitations of the System.............................................5-95
Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) System.................5-100
LKA System Operation.................................................5-101
Warning Light and Message ......................................5-104
Limitations of the System...........................................5-106
LKA System Function Change ...................................5-108
Driver Attention Warning (DAW) System.......5-109
System Setting and Activation ..................................5-109
Resetting the System...................................................5-110
System Standby.............................................................5-111
System Malfunction .....................................................5-111
Cruise Control.....................................................5-113
Cruise Control Operation ............................................5-113
Smart Cruise Control System ...........................5-118
Smart Cruise Control Switch ......................................5-119
Smart Cruise Control Speed .......................................5-120
Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-to-Vehicle
Distance...........................................................................5-124
Sensor to Detect Distance to the
Vehicle Ahead ................................................................5-126
To Adjust the Sensitivity of
Smart Cruise Control....................................................5-128
To Convert to Cruise Control Mode .........................5-129
Limitations of the System...........................................5-129
Special Driving Conditions................................5-134
Hazardous Driving Conditions....................................5-134
Rocking the Vehicle......................................................5-134
Smooth Cornering.........................................................5-135
Driving at Night .............................................................5-135
Driving in the Rain........................................................5-135
Driving in Flooded Areas.............................................5-136
Highway Driving ............................................................5-136
Winter Driving ....................................................5-137
Snow or Icy Conditions................................................5-137
Winter Precautions.......................................................5-139
Vehicle Load Limit..............................................5-141
Tire Loading Information Label.................................5-142
Trailer Towing.....................................................5-146
5-3
Driving your vehicle
5
Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.
Do not inhale engine exhaust.
If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. Exposure to CO can
cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose.
If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of
the vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine
only long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.
Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in
an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
Keep the air intakes clear.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the wind-
shield clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.
If you must drive with the trunk open:
Close all windows.
Open instrument panel air vents.
Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.
WARNING
5-4
Driving your vehicle
Before Entering the Vehicle
• Be sure all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean
and unobstructed.
• Remove frost, snow, or ice.
• Visually check the tires for uneven
wear and damage.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Before Starting
• Make sure the hood, the trunk, and
the doors are securely closed and
locked.
• Adjust the position of the seat and
steering wheel.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Verify all the lights work.
• Fasten your seat belt. Check that
all passengers have fastened their
seat belts.
• Check the gauges and indicators in
the instrument panel and the mes-
sages on the instrument display
when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• Check that any items you are car-
rying are stored properly or fas-
tened down securely.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
ety of automobile components
including components found in
the interior furnishings in a
vehicle, contain or emit harmful
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects and reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and cer-
tain products of components
contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive
harm.
WARNING
BBEEFFOORREE DDRRIIVVIINNGG
5-5
Driving your vehicle
5
NEVER drink or take drugs and
drive.
Drinking or taking drugs and
driving is dangerous and may
result in an accident and SERI-
OUS INJURY or DEATH.
Drunk driving is the number
one contributor to the highway
death toll each year. Even a
small amount of alcohol will
affect your reflexes, percep-
tions and judgment. Just one
drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions
and emergencies and your reac-
tion time gets worse with each
additional drink.
Driving while under the influ-
ence of drugs is as dangerous
or more dangerous than driving
under the influence of alcohol.
You are much more likely to
have a serious accident if you
drink or take drugs and drive. If
you are drinking or taking
drugs, don't drive. Do not ride
with a driver who has been
drinking or taking drugs.
Choose a designated driver or
call a taxi.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-
lowing precautions:
• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.
All passengers must be prop-
erly belted whenever the vehi-
cle is moving. For more
details, refer to "Seat Belts" in
chapter 2.
• Always drive defensively.
Assume other drivers or pedes-
trians may be careless and
make mistakes.
• Stay focused on the task of
driving. Driver distraction can
cause accidents.
• Leave plenty of space between
you and the vehicle in front of
you.
WARNING
5-6
Key Ignition Switch
Whenever the front door is opened,
the ignition switch will illuminate, pro-
vided the ignition switch is not in the
ON position. The light will go off
immediately when the ignition switch
is turned on or go off after about 30
seconds when the door is closed. (if
equipped)
Never use aftermarket keyhole
covers.This may generate start-up
failure due to communication fail-
ure
NOTICE
IIGGNNIITTIIOONN SSWWIITTCCHH
Driving your vehicle
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-
lowing precautions:
• NEVER allow children or any
person who is unfamiliar with
the vehicle to touch the igni-
tion switch or related parts.
Unexpected and sudden vehi-
cle movement can occur.
• NEVER reach through the
steering wheel for the ignition
switch, or any other control,
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area may cause a
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
WARNING
NEVER turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK or ACC position
while the vehicle is in motion
except in an emergency. This
will result in the engine turning
off and loss of power assist for
the steering and brake systems.
This may lead to loss of direc-
tional control and braking func-
tion, which could cause an acci-
dent.
Before leaving the driver's seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in 1st gear (for manual trans-
mission vehicle) or P (Park, for
automatic transmission/dual
clutch transmission vehicle)
position, apply the parking
brake, and turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position.
Unexpected vehicle movement
may occur if these precautions
are not followed.
WARNING
OAD055082L
5-7
Driving your vehicle
5
Key ignition switch positions
Switch
Position
Action Notice
LOCK
To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, put
the key in at the ACC position and turn the key
towards the LOCK position.
The ignition key can be removed in the LOCK posi-
tion.
(The shift lever must be in the P (Park) position for
automatic transmission/dual clutch transmission
vehicles)
ACC
Electrical accessories are usable.
The steering wheel unlocks.
ON
This is the normal key position when the engine
has started.
All features and accessories are usable.
The warning lights can be checked when you turn
the ignition switch from ACC to ON.
Do not leave the ignition switch in the ON position
when the engine is not running in order to prevent
the battery from discharging.
START
To start the engine, turn the ignition switch to the
START position.The switch returns to the ON posi-
tion when you let go of the key.
The engine will crank until you release the key.
5-8
Starting the engine
Vehicle with manual transmission:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in neu-
tral.
3. Depress the clutch and brake ped-
als.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the
START position. Hold the key
(maximum of 10 seconds) until the
engine starts and release it.
Information
Depress the brake pedal and clutch
pedal until the engine starts.
Vehicle with automatic transmission/
dual clutch transmission:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the
START position. Hold the key
(maximum of 10 seconds) until the
engine starts and release it.
Information
• It is best to maintain a moderate
engine speed until the vehicle engine
comes up to normal operating tem-
perature. Avoid harsh or abrupt
acceleration or deceleration while
the engine is still cold.
• Whether the engine is cold or warm,
always start the vehicle with your
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
depress the accelerator while start-
ing the vehicle. Do not race the
engine while warming it up.
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
• Do not hold the ignition key in
the START position for more
than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10
seconds before trying again.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle
to start the engine.
NOTICE
i
i
Driving your vehicle
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes, such as high
heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-
flops, etc., may interfere with
your ability to use the brake and
accelerator pedals.
WARNING
5-9
Driving your vehicle
5
Engine Start/Stop Button
Whenever the front door is opened,
the Engine Start/Stop button will illu-
minate and will go off 30 seconds
after the door is closed.
• NEVER press the Engine
Start/Stop button while the
vehicle is in motion except in
an emergency. This will result
in the engine turning off and
loss of power assist for the
steering and brake systems.
WARNING
To turn the engine off in an
emergency:
Press and hold the Engine
Start/Stop button for more than
two seconds OR rapidly press
and release the Engine Start/
Stop button three times (within
three seconds).
If the vehicle is still moving, you
can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by
pressing the Engine Start/Stop
button with the shift lever in the
N (Neutral) position.
This may lead to loss of direc-
tional control and braking
function, which could cause
an accident.
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, set the parking
brake, press the Engine Start/
Stop button to the OFF posi-
tion, and take the Smart Key
with you. Unexpected vehicle
movement may occur if these
precautions are not followed.
• NEVER reach through the
steering wheel for the Engine
Start/Stop button or any other
control while the vehicle is in
motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in this area may
cause a loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
WARNING
To reduce risk of serious injury
or death, NEVER allow children
or any person who is unfamiliar
with the vehicle to touch the
Engine Start/Stop button or
related parts. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can
occur.
WARNING
OAD055001
5-10
Driving your vehicle
Engine Start/Stop button positions
- Vehicle with manual transmission
Button Position Action Notice
OFF
To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and
then press the Engine Start/Stop button.
Not illuminated
ACC
Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the
button is in the OFF position without depress-
ing the clutch pedal.
Electrical accessories are usable.
If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the
ACC position for more than one hour, the bat-
tery power will turn off automatically to prevent
the battery from discharging.
Orange indicator
5-11
Driving your vehicle
5
Button Position Action Notice
ON
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is
in the ACC position without depressing the
clutch pedal.
The warning lights can be checked before
the engine is started.
Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
the ON position when the engine is not run-
ning to prevent the battery from discharging.
Blue indicator
START
To start the engine, depress the clutch and
brake pedals and press the Engine Start/
Stop button with the shift lever in neutral.
If you press the Engine Start/Stop button
without depressing the clutch pedal, the
engine does not start and the Engine
Start/Stop button changes as follows:
OFF
→→
ACC
→→
ON
→→
OFF
Not illuminated
- Vehicle with manual transmission
5-12
Driving your vehicle
Engine Start/Stop button positions
- Vehicle with automatic transmission/dual clutch transmission
Button Position Action Notice
OFF
To turn off the engine, press the Engine
Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park).
When you press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton without the shift lever in P (Park), the
Engine Start/Stop button does not turn to the
OFF position, but turns to the ACC position.
ACC
Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the
button is in the OFF position without depress-
ing the brake pedal.
Electrical accessories are usable.
If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the
ACC position for more than one hour, the bat-
tery power will turn off automatically to prevent
the battery from discharging.
5-13
Driving your vehicle
5
Button Position Action Notice
ON
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is
in the ACC position without depressing the
brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked before
the engine is started.
Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
the ON position when the engine is not run-
ning to prevent the battery from discharging.
START
To start the engine, depress the brake pedal
and press the Engine Start/Stop button with
the shift lever in the P (Park) or in the N
(Neutral) position.
For your safety, start the engine with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position.
If you press the Engine Start/Stop button with-
out depressing the brake pedal, the engine
does not start and the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton changes as follows:
OFF
→→
ACC
→→
ON
→→
OFF
However, the engine may start if you depress
the brake pedal within 0.5 second after press-
ing the Engine Start/Stop button from the OFF
position.
- Vehicle with automatic transmission/dual clutch transmission
5-14
Driving your vehicle
Starting the engine
Information
• The engine will start by pressing the
Engine Start/Stop button, only when
the smart key is in the vehicle.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle, if it is far away from the driver,
the engine may not start.
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ACC or ON position, if any
door is open, the system checks for
the smart key. If the smart key is not
in the vehicle, the " " indicator
will blink and the warning "Key not
in vehicle" will come on and if all
doors are closed, the chime will also
sound for about 5 seconds. Keep the
smart key in the vehicle when using
the ACC position or if the vehicle
engine is ON.
Vehicle with manual transmission:
1. Always carry the smart key with
you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in neu-
tral.
4. Depress the clutch and brake ped-
als.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton.
Information
Depress the brake pedal and clutch
pedal until the engine starts.
Vehicle with automatic transmis-
sion/dual clutch transmission:
1. Always carry the smart key with
you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton.
i
i
• Always wear appropriate
shoes when operating your
vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes, such as
high heels, ski boots, sandals,
flip-flops, etc., may interfere
with your ability to use the
brake and accelerator pedals.
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle can move and lead
to an accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is
normal. The vehicle may sud-
denly move if the brake pedal
is released when the rpm is
high.
WARNING
5-15
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
• Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains station-
ary. Start driving at moderate
engine speeds. (Aggressive acceler-
ating and decelerating should be
avoided.)
• Always start the vehicle with your
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
depress the accelerator while start-
ing the vehicle. Do not race the
engine while warming it up.
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
• If the engine stalls while you are
in motion, do not attempt to
move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position.
If traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving
and press the Engine Start/Stop
button in an attempt to restart
the engine.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle
to start the engine.
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
When the stop lamp switch fuse is
blown, you can't start the engine
normally. Replace the fuse with a
new one. If you are not able to
replace the fuse, you can start the
engine by pressing and holding
the Engine Start/Stop button for
10 seconds with the Engine
Start/Stop button in the ACC posi-
tion.
Do not press the Engine Start/
Stop button for more than 10 sec-
onds except when the stop lamp
switch fuse is blown.
For your safety always depress
the brake pedal before starting the
engine.
Information
If the smart key battery is weak or the
smart key does not work correctly,
you can start the engine by pressing
the Engine Start/Stop button with the
smart key in the direction of the pic-
ture above.
i
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
OAD055002
5-16
Manual Transmission
Operation
The manual transmission has 6 for-
ward gears.The transmission is fully
synchronized in all forward gears so
shifting to either a higher or a lower
gear is easily accomplished.
To shift to R (Reverse), make sure
the vehicle has completely stopped,
and then move the shift lever to neu-
tral before moving into R (Reverse).
When you've come to a complete
stop and it's hard to shift into 1st gear
or R (Reverse):
1. Put the shift lever in neutral and
release the clutch pedal.
2. Depress the clutch pedal, and
then shift into 1 (first) or R
(Reverse) gear.
During cold weather, shifting may
be difficult until the transmission
lubricant has warmed up.
Using the clutch
The clutch pedal should be
depressed all the way before:
- Starting the engine
The engine will not start without
depressing the clutch pedal.
- Shifting into gear, up shifting to the
next higher gear, or down shifting
to the next lower gear.
When releasing the clutch pedal,
release it slowly. The clutch pedal
should always be fully released while
driving.
NOTICE
MMAANNUUAALL TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN
Driving your vehicle
OAD055004
The shift lever can be moved without
pressing the button (1).
The button (1) must be pressed while
moving the shift lever to R (Reverse).
Before leaving the driver's seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in 1
st
gear when the vehicle is
parked on a uphill and in R
(Reverse) on a downhill, set the
parking brake, and place the
ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF
position. Unexpected vehicle
movement may occur if these
precautions are not followed.
WARNING
5-17
Driving your vehicle
Downshifting
Down shift to a lower gear when
slowing down in heavy traffic or driv-
ing up a steep hill to prevent high
engine loads.
Also, downshifting reduces the
chance of stalling and helps reaccel-
erate the vehicle when you need to
increase your speed.
When the vehicle is going downhill,
downshifting helps maintain safe
speed by providing engine braking
(brake power from the engine) and
results in less wear on the brakes.
To prevent damage to the engine,
clutch and transmission:
• When downshifting from 5
th
gear to 4
th
gear, be careful not to
inadvertently push the shift
lever sideways engaging the 2
nd
gear. A drastic downshift may
cause the engine speed to
increase to the point the
tachometer will enter the red-
zone and may cause engine
damage.
• Do not downshift more than two
gear at a time or downshift the
gear when the engine is running
at high speed (5,000 RPM or
higher).
Such down shifting may damage
the engine, clutch and the trans-
mission.
NOTICE
5
To prevent unnecessary wear or
damage to the clutch:
• Do not rest your foot on the
clutch pedal while driving.
• Do not hold the vehicle with
the clutch on an incline, while
waiting for the traffic light,etc.
• Always depress the clutch
pedal down fully to prevent
noise or damage.
• Do not depress the clutch
pedal again until it is fully
released.
• Do not start with the 2
nd
(sec-
ond) gear engaged except
when you start on a slippery
road.
• Do not drive with cargo
loaded more than required
loading capacity.
CAUTION
5-18
Good Driving Practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear
and coast down a hill. This is
extremely dangerous.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can
cause the brakes and related parts
to overheat and malfunction.
When you are driving down a long
hill, slow down and shift to a lower
gear. Engine braking will help slow
down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. This will help avoid
over-revving the engine, which can
cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter
cross winds. This gives you much
better control of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you shift into R
(Reverse) to prevent damage to
the transmission.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears.On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
Driving your vehicle
Do not use aggressive engine
braking (shifting from a higher
gear to a lower gear) on slip-
pery roads. This could cause
the tires to slip and may result
in an accident.
WARNING
• Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you
follow all posted speed limits.
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belt-
ed occupant.
WARNING
5-19
Driving your vehicle
5
AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN
Move shift lever.
Press the shift button, then move shift lever.
Depress the brake pedal, press ths shift button, and then move shift lever.
OAD058005N
Automatic Transmission Operation
The automatic transmission has six forward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected automatically in the D (Drive) position.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death:
• ALWAYS check the surround-
ing areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a vehicle into
D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, then set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur
if these precautions are not
followed.
• When using Manual Shift
Mode, do not use aggressive
engine braking (shifting from
a higher gear to a lower gear)
on slippery roads. This could
cause the tires to slip and may
result in an accident.
WARNING
5-20
Driving your vehicle
Transmission ranges
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must
depress firmly on the brake pedal
and make sure your foot is off the
accelerator pedal.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot shift the lever out of P
(Park), see "Shift-Lock Release" in
this section.
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before turning the engine off.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion may
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
• After the vehicle has stopped,
always make sure the shift
lever is in P (Park), apply the
parking brake, and turn the
engine off.
• When parking on an incline,
block the wheels to prevent
the vehicle from rolling down.
• Do not use the P (Park) posi-
tion in place of the parking
brake.
WARNING
Always come to a complete
stop before shifting into or out
of R (Reverse); you may dam-
age the transmission if you shift
into R (Reverse) while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
CAUTION
5-21
Driving your vehicle
5
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged.
Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart
a stalled engine. Shift into P (Park) if
you need to leave your vehicle for
any reason.
Always depress the brake pedal
when you are shifting from N
(Neutral) to another gear.
D (Drive)
This is the normal driving position.
The transmission will automatically
shift through a six-gear sequence,
providing the best fuel economy and
power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or driving uphill depress
the accelerator pedal further until
you feel the transmission downshift
to a lower gear.
The DRIVE MODE switch, located
on the shift lever console, allows the
driver to switch from NORMAL mode
to SPORT mode.
For more details, refer to "Drive
Mode Integrated Control System"
later in this chapter.
S (Sport) mode
• To shift into S mode, move the shift
lever from D (Drive) to the center of
the manual shift mode.The engine
and transmission control logic is
automatically optimized for sporty
driving.
• In S mode, if you move the shift lever
to + (up) or - (down), the gear will
change to manual shift mode. If the
shift lever is moved back into D
(Drive), it will change to D (Drive).
The vehicle will perform according to
the mode selected from drive mode
(NORMAL, SPORT, SMART).
Do not shift into gear unless
your foot is firmly on the brake
pedal. Shifting into gear when
the engine is running at high
speed can cause the vehicle to
move very rapidly. You could
lose control of the vehicle and
hit people or objects.
WARNING
OAD058196N
5-22
Driving your vehicle
Manual shift mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, manual shift mode is
selected by pushing the shift lever
from the D (Drive) position into the
manual gate. To return to D (Drive)
range operation, push the shift lever
back into the main gate.
In manual shift mode, moving the
shift lever backwards and forwards
will allow you to select the desired
range of gears for the current driving
conditions.
+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
Information
• Only the six forward gears can be
selected. To reverse or park the
vehicle, move the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) or P (Park) position as
required.
• Downshifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When
the vehicle stops, 1
st
gear is automat-
ically selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches
the red zone the transmission will
upshift automatically.
• If the driver presses the lever to
+ (Up) or - (Down) position, the
transmission may not make the
requested gear change if the next
gear is outside of the allowable
engine rpm range. The driver must
execute upshifts in accordance with
road conditions, taking care to keep
the engine rpms below the red zone.
• When accelerating from a stop on a
slippery road, push the shift lever
forward into the + (Up) position.
This allows the transmission to shift
into the 2
nd
gear which is better for
smooth driving on a slippery road.
Push the shift lever to the - (Down)
side to shift back to the 1
st
gear.
• When driving in Manual Shift
Mode, slow down before shifting to
a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged if the
engine rpms are outside of the
allowable range.
i
OAD058006N
++
++
((
((
UU
UU
PP
PP
))
))
--
--
((
((
DD
DD
OO
OO
WW
WW
NN
NN
))
))
5-23
Driving your vehicle
5
Shift-lock system
For your safety, the automatic trans-
mission has a shift-lock system
which prevents shifting the transmis-
sion from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transmission from P
(Park) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or place the igni-
tion switch in the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
Shift-lock release
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position into R (Reverse)
position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, and then do the following:
1. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Carefully remove the cap (1) cov-
ering the shift-lock release access
hole.
4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screw-
driver) into the access hole and
press down on the tool.
5. Move the shift lever.
6. Remove the tool from the shift-
lock override access hole then
install the cap.
If you need to use the shift-lock
release, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
immediately.
Parking
Always come to a complete stop and
continue to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key
with you when exiting the vehicle.
OAD058084N
5-24
Good Driving Practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Do not move the shift lever to N
(Neutral) when driving. Doing so
may result in an accident because
of a loss of engine braking.
• Do not drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
consistent pedal pressure can
result in the brakes overheating,
brake wear and possibly even
brake failure.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the
incline with the accelerator pedal.
This can cause the transmission to
overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
• Depressing both accelerator and
brake pedals at the same time can
trigger logic for engine power
reduction to assure vehicle decel-
eration. Vehicle acceleration will
resume after the brake pedal is
released.
• Always apply the parking brake
when leaving the vehicle. Do not
depend on placing the transmis-
sion in P (Park) to keep the vehicle
from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears.On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator.
Driving your vehicle
• When you stay in the vehicle
with the engine running, be
careful not to depress the
accelerator pedal for a long
period of time. The engine or
exhaust system may overheat
and start a fire.
• The exhaust gas and the
exhaust system are very hot.
Keep away from the exhaust
system components.
• Do not stop or park over flam-
mable materials, such as dry
grass, paper or leaves. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
WARNING
5-25
Driving your vehicle
5
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belt-
ed occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you
follow all posted speed limits.
WARNING
5-26
Driving your vehicle
• The dual clutch transmission can
be thought of as an automatically
shifting manual transmission. It
gives the driving feel of a manual
transmission, yet provides the
ease of a fully automatic transmis-
sion.
• When D (Drive) is selected, the
transmission will automatically shift
through the gears similar to a con-
ventional automatic transmission.
Unlike a traditional automatic
transmission, the gear shifting can
sometimes be felt and heard as the
actuators engage the clutches and
the gears are selected.
• The dual clutch transmission incor-
porates a dry-type dual clutch
mechanism, which allows for better
acceleration performance and
increased fuel efficiency while driv-
ing. But it differs from a conven-
tional automatic transmission
because it does not incorporate a
torque converter. Instead, the tran-
sition from one gear to the next is
managed by clutch slip, especially
at lower speeds.
DDUUAALL CCLLUUTTCCHH TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
Move shift lever.
Press the shift button, then move shift lever.
Depress the brake pedal, press the shift button, and then move shift lever.
OAD058005N
Dual clutch transmission operation
The dual clutch transmission has seven forward speeds and one reverse
speed.The individual speeds are selected automatically when the shift lever
is in the D (Drive) position.
5-27
Driving your vehicle
5
As a result, shifts are sometimes
more noticeable, and a light vibra-
tion can be felt as the transmission
shaft speed is matched with the
engine shaft speed. This is a nor-
mal condition of the dual clutch
transmission.
• The dry-type clutch transfers
torque more directly and provides
a direct-drive feeling which may
feel different from a conventional
automatic transmission. This may
be more noticeable when launch-
ing the vehicle from a stop or when
traveling at low, stop-and-go vehi-
cle speeds.
• When rapidly accelerating from a
lower vehicle speed, the engine
rpm may increase dramatically as
a result of clutch slip as the dual
clutch transmission selects the cor-
rect gear. This is a normal condi-
tion.
• When accelerating from a stop on
an incline, press the accelerator
smoothly and gradually to avoid
any shudder feeling or jerkiness.
• When traveling at a lower vehicle
speed, if you release the accelera-
tor pedal quickly, you may feel
engine braking before the trans-
mission changes gears. This
engine braking feeling is similar to
operating a manual transmission at
low speed.
• When driving downhill, you may
wish to move the gear shift lever to
Manual Shift mode and downshift
to a lower gear in order to control
your speed without using the brake
pedal excessively.
• When you turn the engine on and
off, you may hear clicking sounds
as the system goes through a self-
test.This is a normal sound for the
dual clutch transmission.
• During the first 1000 miles, you
may feel that the vehicle may not
be smooth when accelerating at
low speed. During this break-in
period, the shift quality and per-
formance of your new vehicle is
continuously optimized.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death:
• ALWAYS check the surround-
ing areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a vehicle into
D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, then set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur
if these precautions are not
followed.
• Do not use aggressive engine
braking (shifting from a high-
er gear to a lower gear) on
slippery roads. This could
cause the tires to slip and may
result in an accident.
WARNING
5-28
Driving your vehicle
• Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive) or
R (Reverse).
• Do not put the shift lever in N
(Neutral) while driving.
LCD display for transmission
temperature and warning mes-
sage
Transmission temperature
gauge
• Select trip computer mode on the
LCD display and move to the trans-
mission temperature screen to see
the temperature of the dual clutch
transmission.
• Try to drive so that the temperature
gauge do not show high/overheat.
When the transmission is over-
heated, the warning message will
display on the LCD. Follow the dis-
played message.
• The transmission temperature is
displayed in three colors (white,
orange and red) as it increases (if
equipped with the cluster type B
and C).
• Orange temperature gauge is dis-
played right before the warning
message appears on the LCD dis-
play. (if equipped)
NOTICE
If the transmission cannot shift
into Drive or Reverse, the posi-
tion indicator D or R)on the
cluster will blink. Contact an
authorized Hyundai dealer to
have the system checked.
WARNING
OJS048123N/OJS058137L
• Increase (high temperature) of
the transmission temperature
gauge usually appears on an
incline when the vehicle is
stopped for a long time using
accelerator pedal, without
depressing the brake pedal.
• To maintain the optimal trans-
mission performance, drive
so that the white gauge is not
exceeded (if equipped).
CAUTION
5-29
Driving your vehicle
5
Normal (below marking 10)
• In order to maintain the optimal
gear shift performance, drive so that
the temperature gauge is below the
point (below marking 10).
• Gauge color according to cluster
type
- Type A : White
- Type B : White
Information
The temperature gauge may increase
rapidly if clutch slip occurs excessive-
ly due to repeated stop-and-go driving
on steep grades and when Hill Hold is
maintained for a long time. In order to
prevent excessive temperature
increase, use the brake during low
speed driving or when stopping the
vehicle on a hill.
Before entering High/Overheat
(from marking 10 to 14)
• This zone shows that the dual
clutch temperature of the DCT is
before entering the high/overheat
zone.When the clutch temperature
is within this zone (from marking
10 to 14), drive minimizing the
clutch slip so that the temperature
gauge is below the point (marking
10).
i
OAD058178N
OAD058179N
5-30
Driving your vehicle
• If the dual clutch temperature con-
tinues to increase and reaches
marking 14, the warning alarm
sounds and the temperature gauge
pops up on the cluster.
The DCT warning message is not
displayed.
• Gauge color according to cluster
type
- Type A : White
- Type B : Orange
High/Overheat
(from marking 15 to 16)
• This zone shows that the dual
clutch temperature of the DCT has
entered the high/overheat zone.
The DCT warning alarm sounds,
warning message is displayed on
the cluster and the temperature
gauge disappears from the cluster.
Follow the displayed warning
message.
• To check the temperature status of
the dual clutch when overheated,
move to the temperature gauge
screen by selecting the trip com-
puter mode. Then, you can check
the temperature status of the dual
clutch.
• Gauge color according to cluster
type
- Type A : White
- Type B : Red
OAD058180N
5-31
Driving your vehicle
5
DCT warning messages
Steep grade
This warning message is displayed
when vehicle is driven slowly on a
grade and the vehicle detects that
the brake pedal is not applied.
Driving up hills or on steep grades:
• To hold the vehicle on an incline
use the foot brake or the parking
brake.
• When in stop-and-go traffic on an
incline, keep some distance ahead
before moving the vehicle forward.
Then hold the vehicle on the incline
with the foot brake.
• If the vehicle is held on a hill by
applying the accelerator pedal or
by creeping with brake pedal dis-
engaged, the clutch and transmis-
sion may overheat which can result
in damage. At this time, a warning
message will appear on the LCD
display.
• If the LCD display warning is
active, the foot brake must be
applied.
• Ignoring the warnings can lead to
damage to the transmission.
Transmission high temperature
• Under certain conditions, such as
repeated stop-and-go launches on
steep grades, sudden take off or
acceleration, or other harsh driving
conditions, the transmission clutch
temperatures will increase exces-
sively. Finally the clutch in trans-
mission could be overheated.
• When the clutch is overheated, the
safe protection mode engages and
the gear position indicator on the
cluster blinks with a chime. At this
time, "Transmission temp. is high!
Stop safely" warning message will
appear on the LCD display and
driving may not be smooth.
OJS048123N/OJS058139L
OAD058175N
5-32
Driving your vehicle
• If this occurs, pull over to a safe
location, stop the vehicle with the
engine running, apply the brakes
and shift the vehicle to P (Park)
with engine on, and allow the
transmission to cool.
• If you ignore this warning, the driv-
ing condition may become worse.
You may experience abrupt shifts,
frequent shifts, or jerkiness. To
return to the normal driving condi-
tion, stop the vehicle and apply the
foot brake or shift into P (Park).
Then allow the transmission to cool
for a few minutes with engine on,
before driving off.
• When possible, drive the vehicle
smoothly.
Transmission overheated
• If the vehicle continues to be driven
and the clutch temperatures reach
the maximum temperature limit, the
"Transmission Hot! Park with engine
on" warning will be displayed.
When this occurs the clutch is dis-
abled until the clutch cools to nor-
mal temperatures.
• The warning will display a time to
wait for the transmission to cool.
• If this occurs, pull over to a safe
location, stop the vehicle with the
engine running, apply the brakes
and shift the vehicle to P (Park)
with engine on for a certain time,
and allow the transmission to cool.
• When the message "Trans cooled.
Resume driving" appears you can
continue to drive your vehicle.
• When possible, drive the vehicle
smoothly.
If any of the warning messages in
the LCD display continue to blink, for
your safety, contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-
tem checked.
OAD058177N
OJS058137L/OAD058176N
5-33
Driving your vehicle
5
Transmission ranges
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must
depress firmly on the brake pedal
and make sure your foot is off the
accelerator pedal.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot shift the lever out of P
(Park), see "Shift-Lock Release" in
this chapter.
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before turning the engine off.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transmission if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged.
Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart
a stalled engine, or if it is necessary
to stop with the engine ON.
Shift into P (Park) if you need to
leave your vehicle for any reason.
Always depress the brake pedal
when you are shifting from N
(Neutral) to another gear.
NOTICE
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion may
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
• After the vehicle has stopped,
always make sure the shift
lever is in P (Park), apply the
parking brake, and turn the
engine off.
• When parking on an incline,
place the shift lever in P (Park)
and apply the parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill.
• For safety, always engage the
parking brake with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position
except for the case of emer-
gency parking.
• Do not use the P (Park) posi-
tion in place of the parking
brake.
WARNING
5-34
Driving your vehicle
D (Drive)
This is the normal driving position.
The transmission will automatically
shift through a seven-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or driving uphill depress
the accelerator pedal further until
you feel the transmission downshift
to a lower gear.
The DRIVE MODE switch, located
on the shift lever console, allows the
driver to switch from NORMAL mode
to SPORT mode.
For more details, refer to "Drive
Mode Integrated Control System"
later in this chapter.
Always make sure the vehicle is
stationary, at a complete stop,
before selecting D (Drive).
S (Sport) mode
• To shift into S mode, move the shift
lever from D (Drive) to the center of
the manual shift mode.The engine
and transmission control logic is
automatically optimized for sporty
driving.
• In S mode, if you move the shift lever
to + (up) or - (down), the gear will
change to manual shift mode. If the
shift lever is moved back into D
(Drive), it will change to D (Drive).
The vehicle will perform according to
the mode selected from drive mode
(NORMAL, SPORT, SMART).
NOTICE
Do not shift into gear unless
your foot is firmly on the brake
pedal. Shifting into gear when
the engine is running at high
speed can cause the vehicle to
move very rapidly. You could
lose control of the vehicle and
hit people or objects.
WARNING
• Do not shift into gear unless
your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal. Shifting into gear
when the engine is running at
high speed can cause the
vehicle to move very rapidly.
You may lose control of the
vehicle and cause accidents.
• Do not drive with the shift
lever in N (Neutral). The
engine brake will not work
and may lead to an accident.
WARNING
OAD058196N
5-35
Driving your vehicle
5
Manual shift mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, manual shift mode is
selected by pushing the shift lever
from the D (Drive) position into the
manual gate. To return to D (Drive)
range operation, push the shift lever
back into the main gate.
In Manual Shift Mode, moving the
shift lever backwards and forwards
will allow you to select the desired
range of gears for the current driving
conditions.
+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
Information
• Only the seven forward gears can be
selected. To reverse or park the
vehicle, move the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) or P (Park) position as
required.
• Downshifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When
the vehicle stops, 1
st
gear is automat-
ically selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches
the red zone the transmission will
upshift automatically.
• If the driver presses the lever to
+ (Up) or - (Down) position, the
transmission may not make the
requested gear change if the next
gear is outside of the allowable
engine rpm range. The driver must
execute upshifts in accordance with
road conditions, taking care to keep
the engine rpms below the red zone.
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
The paddle shifter is available when
the shift lever is in the D (Drive) posi-
tion or the manual shift mode.
i
OAD058006N
++
++
((
((
UU
UU
PP
PP
))
))
--
--
((
((
DD
DD
OO
OO
WW
WW
NN
NN
))
))
OAD058114N
5-36
Driving your vehicle
With the shift lever in the D posi-
tion
The paddle shifter will operate when
the vehicle speed is more than
6 mph (10 km/h).
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear and the
system changes from automatic
mode to manual mode.
When the vehicle speed is lower
than 6 mph (10 km/h), if you depress
the accelerator pedal for more than 5
seconds or if you move the shift lever
from Manual Shift Mode to D (Drive),
the system changes from manual
mode to automatic mode.
With the shift lever in the manual
shift mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear.
If the [+] and [-] paddle shifters are
pulled at the same time, gear
change may not occur.
Shift-Lock System
For your safety, the dual clutch trans-
mission has a shift-lock system
which prevents shifting the transmis-
sion from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transmission from P
(Park) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or place the igni-
tion switch in the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
Shift-Lock Release
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position into R (Reverse)
position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, and then do the following:
1. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Carefully remove the cap (1) cov-
ering the shift-lock release access
hole.
4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screw-
driver) into the access hole and
press down on the tool.
NOTICE
OAD058084N
5-37
Driving your vehicle
5
5. Move the shift lever.
6. Remove the tool from the shift-
lock override access hole then
install the cap.
If you need to use the shift-lock
release, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
immediately.
Parking
Always come to a complete stop and
continue to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position. Take the key
with you when exiting the vehicle.
Good Driving Practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Do not move the shift lever to N
(Neutral) when driving. Doing so
may result in an accident because
of a loss of engine braking and the
transmission could be damaged.
• Do not drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
consistent pedal pressure can
result in the brakes overheating,
brake wear and possibly even
brake failure.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the
incline with the accelerator pedal.
This can cause the transmission to
overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
When you stay in the vehicle
with the engine running, be
careful not to depress the accel-
erator pedal for a long period of
time. The engine or exhaust
system may overheat and start
a fire.
The exhaust gas and the
exhaust system are very hot.
Keep away from the exhaust
system components.
Do not stop or park over flam-
mable materials, such as dry
grass, paper or leaves. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
WARNING
5-38
Driving your vehicle
• Depressing both accelerator and
brake pedals at the same time can
trigger logic for engine power
reduction to assure vehicle decel-
eration. Vehicle acceleration will
resume after the brake pedal is
released.
• When driving in Manual Shift
Mode, slow down before shifting to
a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged if the
engine rpms are outside of the
allowable range.
• Always apply the parking brake
when leaving the vehicle. Do not
depend on placing the transmis-
sion in P (Park) to keep the vehicle
from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears.On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you
follow all posted speed limits.
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belt-
ed occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
WARNING
5-39
Driving your vehicle
5
Power Brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the brakes will not work.
You can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than typical. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be longer than
with power brakes.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering con-
trol on slippery surfaces.
BBRRAAKKIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM
Take the following precautions:
• Do not drive with your foot
resting on the brake pedal.
This will create abnormal high
brake temperatures, exces-
sive brake lining and pad
wear, and increased stopping
distances.
• When descending down a
long or steep hill, move the
gear shift lever to Manual
Shift Mode and manually
downshift to a lower gear in
order to control your speed
without using the brake pedal
excessively. Applying the
brakes continuously will
cause the brakes to overheat
and could result in a tempo-
rary loss of braking perform-
ance.
• Wet brakes may impair the
vehicle's ability to safely slow
down; the vehicle may also
pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Applying
the brakes lightly will indicate
whether they have been
affected in this way. Always
test your brakes in this fash-
ion after driving through deep
water.To dry the brakes, light-
ly tap the brake pedal to heat
up the brakes while maintain-
ing a safe forward speed until
brake performance returns to
normal. Avoid driving at high
speeds until the brakes func-
tion correctly.
WARNING
5-40
Driving your vehicle
Disc Brakes Wear Indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high pitched warning sound from
your front or rear brakes. You may
hear this sound come and go or it
may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Note that some driving conditions or
climates may cause a brake squeal
when you first apply (or lightly apply)
the brakes. This is normal and does
not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
Information
Always replace brake pads as com-
plete front or rear axle sets.
Rear Drum Brakes
(if equipped)
Your rear drum brakes do not have
wear indicators. Therefore, have the
rear brake linings inspected if you
hear a rear brake rubbing noise.Also
have your rear brakes inspected
each time you change or rotate your
tires and when you have the front
brakes replaced.
Parking Brake
Always set the parking brake before
leaving the vehicle. To apply the
parking brake:
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Pull up the parking brake lever as far
as possible.
i
NOTICE
OAD055008
5-41
Driving your vehicle
5
To release:
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
While pressing the release button
(1), slightly pull up on the parking
brake lever then lower the parking
brake lever (2).
If the parking brake does not release
or does not release all the way, have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, do not oper-
ate the parking brake while the
vehicle is moving except in an
emergency situation. It could
damage the brake system and
lead to an accident.
WARNING
OAD055009
• Whenever leaving the vehicle
or parking, always come to a
complete stop and continue
to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into P
(Park) position, then apply the
parking brake, and place the
ignition switch in the LOCK/
OFF position.
Vehicles with the parking
brake not fully engaged are at
risk for moving inadvertently
and causing injury to yourself
or others.
• NEVER allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
• Only release the parking
brake when you are seated
inside the vehicle with your
foot firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING
5-42
Driving your vehicle
• Do not apply the accelerator
pedal while the parking brake is
engaged. If you depress the
accelerator pedal with the park-
ing brake engaged, warning will
sound. Damage to the parking
brake may occur.
• Driving with the parking brake
on can overheat the braking sys-
tem and cause premature wear
or damage to brake parts. Make
sure the parking brake is
released and the Brake Warning
Light is off before driving.
Check the Parking
Brake Warning Light
by placing the ignition
switch to the ON posi-
tion (do not start the
engine).
This light will be illuminated when the
parking brake is applied with the igni-
tion switch in the START or ON posi-
tion.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is released and the Brake
Warning Light is OFF.
If the Parking Brake Warning Light
remains on after the parking brake is
released while engine is running,
there may be a malfunction in the
brake system. Immediate attention is
necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately.If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE
An Anti-Lock Braking System
(ABS) or an Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system will not
prevent accidents due to
improper or dangerous driving
maneuvers. Even though vehi-
cle control is improved during
emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance
between you and objects ahead
of you. Vehicle speeds should
always be reduced during
extreme road conditions. The
braking distance for cars
equipped with ABS or ESC may
be longer than for those without
these systems in the following
road conditions.
Drive your vehicle at reduced
speeds during the following
conditions:
• Rough, gravel or snow-cov-
ered roads.
WARNING
5-43
Driving your vehicle
5
ABS is an electronic braking system
that helps prevent a braking skid.
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time.
Using ABS
To obtain the maximum benefit from
your ABS in an emergency situation,
do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Depress your
brake pedal as hard as possible.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear sounds from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding
sensation in the brake pedal. This is
normal and it means your ABS is
active.
ABS does not reduce the time or dis-
tance it takes to stop the vehicle.
Always maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front of you.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from sudden changes in
direction, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather con-
ditions.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of stabili-
ty. Always steer moderately when
braking hard. Severe or sharp steer-
ing wheel movement can still cause
your vehicle to veer into oncoming
traffic or off the road.
On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake sys-
tem may result in a longer stopping
distance than for vehicles equipped
with a conventional brake system.
The ABS warning light ( ) will stay
on for several seconds after the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
During that time, the ABS will go
through self-diagnosis and the light
will go off if everything is normal. If
the light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS. Contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible
• On roads where the road sur-
face is pitted or has different
surface height.
• Tire chains are installed on
your vehicle.
The safety features of an ABS
or ESC equipped vehicle should
not be tested by high speed
driving or cornering.This could
endanger the safety of yourself
or others.
5-44
Driving your vehicle
Information
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the ABS
warning light ( ) may turn on at the
same time. This happens because of
the low battery voltage. It does not
mean your ABS is malfunctioning.
Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system helps to stabilize the
vehicle during cornering maneuvers.
ESC checks where you are steering
and where the vehicle is actually
going. ESC applies braking pressure
to any one of the vehicle's brakes
and intervenes in the engine man-
agement system to assist the driver
with keeping the vehicle on the
intended path. It is not a substitute
for safe driving practices. Always
adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
i
If the ABS warning light ( ) is
on and stays on, you may have
a problem with the ABS. Your
power brakes will work normal-
ly. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death, contact your
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
When you drive on a road hav-
ing poor traction, such as an icy
road, and apply your brakes
continuously, the ABS will be
active continuously and the
ABS warning light ( ) may
illuminate. Pull your car over to
a safe place and turn the engine
off.
Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a
problem with your ABS system.
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION
OAD058010N
5-45
Driving your vehicle
5
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the ESC and the ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate for approxi-
mately three seconds. After both
lights go off, the ESC is enabled.
When operating
When the ESC is in opera-
tion, the ESC indicator light
blinks:
• When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear sounds from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding
sensation in the brake pedal. This
is normal and it means your ESC is
active.
• When the ESC activates, the
engine may not respond to the
accelerator as it does under rou-
tine conditions.
• If the Cruise Control was in use
when the ESC activates, the
Cruise Control automatically disen-
gages. The Cruise Control can be
reengaged when the road condi-
tions allow. See "Cruise Control
System" later in this chapter. (if
equipped)
• When moving out of the mud or
driving on a slippery road, the
engine RPM (revolutions per
minute) may not increase even if
you press the accelerator pedal
deeply. This is to maintain the sta-
bility and traction of the vehicle and
does not indicate a problem.
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when
cornering. The ESC system will
not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns,
abrupt maneuvers, and
hydroplaning on wet surfaces
can result in severe accidents.
WARNING
5-46
Driving your vehicle
ESC OFF condition
To cancel ESC operation :
• State 1
Press the ESC OFF button briefly.
The ESC OFF indicator light and
message (if equipped with supervi-
sion cluster) will illuminate. In this
state, the traction control function of
ESC (engine management) is dis-
abled, but the brake control function
of ESC (braking management) still
operates.
• State 2
Press and hold the ESC OFF button
continuously for more than 3 sec-
onds. The ESC OFF indicator light
and message (if equipped with
supervision cluster) illuminates and
a warning chime sounds. In this
state, both the traction control func-
tion of ESC (engine management)
and the brake control function of
ESC (braking management) are dis-
abled.
If the ignition switch is placed to the
LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off,
ESC remains off.Upon restarting the
engine, the ESC will automatically
turn on again.
Indicator lights
When the ignition switch is placed to
the ON position, the ESC indicator
light illuminates, then goes off if the
ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever the ESC is operating.
If ESC indicator light stays on, your
vehicle may have a malfunction with
the ESC system. When this warning
light illuminates have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off.
■ ESC indicator light (blinks)
■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)
5-47
Driving your vehicle
5
Driving with wheels and tires with
different sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. Before
replacing tires, make sure all four
tires and wheels are the same
size. Never drive the vehicle with
different sized wheels and tires
installed.
ESC OFF usage
When Driving
The ESC OFF mode should only be
used briefly to help free the vehicle if
stuck in snow or mud by temporarily
stopping operation of the ESC to
maintain wheel torque.
To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving on
a flat road surface.
To prevent damage to the trans-
mission:
• Do not allow wheel(s) of one
axle to spin excessively while
the ESC, ABS,and parking brake
warning lights are displayed.
The repairs would not be cov-
ered by the vehicle warranty.
Reduce engine power and do
not spin the wheel(s) excessive-
ly while these lights are dis-
played.
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, make sure the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated).
Information
Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or standard brake system opera-
tion.
i
NOTICE
NOTICE
When the ESC is blinking, this
indicates the ESC is active:
Drive slowly and NEVER
attempt to accelerate. NEVER
turn the ESC off while the ESC
indicator light is blinking or you
may lose control of the vehicle
resulting in an accident.
WARNING
5-48
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle Stability Management
(VSM)
The Vehicle Stability Management
(VSM) is a function of the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system. It
helps ensure the vehicle stays stable
when accelerating or braking sud-
denly on wet, slippery and rough
roads where traction over the four
tires can suddenly become uneven.
VSM operation
VSM ON condition
The VSM operates when:
• The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately
above 9 mph (15 km/h) on curve
roads.
• Vehicle speed is approximately
above 12 mph (20 km/h) when the
vehicle is braking on rough roads.
When operating
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may activate the
ESC, you may hear sounds from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sen-
sation in the brake pedal.This is nor-
mal and it means your VSM is active.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on a banked road such
as gradient or incline.
• Driving rearward.
• ESC OFF indicator light is on.
• EPS (Electric Power Steering)
warning light ( ) is on or
blinks.
NOTICE
Take the following precautions
when using the Vehicle Stability
Management (VSM):
• ALWAYS check the speed and
the distance to the vehicle
ahead. The VSM is not a sub-
stitute for safe driving prac-
tices.
• Never drive too fast for the
road conditions.The VSM sys-
tem will not prevent acci-
dents. Excessive speed in bad
weather, slippery and uneven
roads can result in severe
accidents.
WARNING
5-49
Driving your vehicle
5
VSM OFF condition
To cancel VSM operation, press the
ESC OFF button. ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) will illuminate.
To turn on VSM, press the ESC OFF
button again.The ESC OFF indicator
light will go out.
Driving with wheels and tires with dif-
ferent sizes may cause the ESC sys-
tem to malfunction. Before replacing
tires, make sure all four tires and
wheels are the same size. Never
drive the vehicle with different sized
tires and wheels installed.
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)
The Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)
helps prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards when starting a vehicle
from a stop on a hill. The system
operates the brakes automatically for
approximately 2 seconds and releas-
es the brake after 2 seconds or when
the accelerator pedal is depressed.
• The HAC does not operate when
the shift lever is in P (Park) or N
(Neutral)
• The HAC activates even though
the ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is off but does not acti-
vate when the ESC has malfunc-
tioned.
Good Braking Practices
NOTICE
If ESC indicator light ( ) or
EPS warning light ( ) stays on
or blinks, your vehicle may have
a malfunction with the VSM sys-
tem.When the warning light illu-
minates, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
Always be ready to depress the
accelerator pedal when starting
off on a incline. The HAC acti-
vates only for approximately 2
seconds.
WARNING
Whenever leaving the vehicle or
parking, always come to a com-
plete stop and continue to
depress the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever into the 1
st
gear
(for manual transmission vehi-
cle) or P (Park, for automatic
transmission vehicle) position,
then apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in
the LOCK/OFF position.
Vehicles parked with the park-
ing brake not applied or not
fully engaged may roll inadver-
tently and may cause injury to
the driver and others. ALWAYS
apply the parking brake before
exiting the vehicle.
WARNING
5-50
Driving your vehicle
Wet brakes can be dangerous! The
brakes may get wet if the vehicle is
driven through standing water or if it
is washed.Your vehicle will not stop
as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet
brakes may cause the vehicle to pull
to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns
to normal, taking care to keep the
vehicle under control at all times. If
the braking action does not return to
normal, stop as soon as it is safe to
do so and call an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
DO NOT drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
constant pedal pressure can result in
the brakes overheating, brake wear,
and possibly even brake failure.
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe location.
Keep your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped to
prevent the vehicle from rolling for-
ward.
5-51
Driving your vehicle
5
The drive mode may be selected
according to the driver's preference
or road condition.
The system resets to be in the NOR-
MAL mode, when the engine is
restarted.
Information
If there is a problem with the instru-
ment cluster, the drive mode will be in
NORMAL mode and may not change
to SPORT mode.
The mode changes, as below, when-
ever the DRIVE MODE button is
pressed.
NORMAL mode
In NORMAL mode the engine and
transmission control logic work
together to provide regular daily driv-
ing performance with some fuel effi-
ciency.
• When NORMAL mode is selected,
it is not displayed on the instrument
cluster.
SPORT mode
SPORT mode manages
the driving dynamics by
automatically adjusting the
steering effort, and the
engine and transmission control
logic for enhanced driver perform-
ance.
• When SPORT mode is selected by
pressing the DRIVE MODE button,
the SPORT indicator will illuminate.
• Whenever the engine is restarted,
the Drive Mode will revert back to
NORMAL mode.If SPORT mode is
desired, re-select SPORT mode
from the DRIVE MODE button.
• When SPORT mode is activated:
- The engine rpm will tend to
remain raised over a certain
length of time even after releas-
ing the accelerator
- Upshifts are delayed when accel-
erating
Information
In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency
may decrease.
i
i
DDRRIIVVEE MMOODDEE IINNTTEEGGRRAATTEEDD CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM
OAD058016N
SPORT
NORMAL SMART
(if equipped)
5-52
Driving your vehicle
SMART mode
SMART mode selects the
proper driving mode
between NORMAL and
SPORT by judging the
driver's driving habits (i.e.
Economical or Aggressive) from the
brake pedal depression or the steer-
ing wheel operation.
• Press the DRIVE MODE button to
select SMART mode. When
SMART mode is activated, the
indicator illuminates on the instru-
ment cluster.
• Vehicle's equipped with a supervi-
sion cluster the indicator illumi-
nates in green, when the driver's
driving is categorized to be eco-
nomic. It illuminates in white, when
the driver's driving is categorized
to be normal. It illuminates in yel-
low, when the driver's driving is
categorized to be sportive during
abrupt braking or sharp curving.
• Whenever the engine is restarted,
the drive mode will revert back to
NORMAL mode. If SMART mode
is desired, re-select SMART mode.
• SMART mode automatically con-
trols gear shifting patterns, engine
torque, in accordance with the dri-
ver's driving habits.
Information
When you dynamically drive the vehi-
cle in SMART mode by abruptly
decelerating or sharply turning the
driving mode changes to SPORT
mode. However, it may adversely
affect fuel economy.
Various driving situations, which
you may encounter in SMART
mode
• The driving mode automatically
changes to SMART SPORT, when
you abruptly accelerate the vehicle
or repetitively operate the steering
wheel (Your driving is categorized
to be sporty.). In this mode, your
vehicle drives in a lower gear for
abrupt accelerating/decelerating
and increases the engine brake
performance.
• You may still sense the engine
braking performance, even when
you release the accelerator pedal
in SMART SPORT mode. It is
because your vehicle remains in
lower gear over a certain period of
time for next acceleration. Thus, it
is a normal driving situation, not
indicating any malfunction.
• The driving mode automatically
changes to SMART SPORT mode
only in harsh driving situations. In
most of the normal driving situa-
tions, the driving mode sets to be
in SMART NORMAL mode.
i
60$57
5-53
Driving your vehicle
5
Limitation of SMART mode
The SMART mode may be limited in
following situations.(The OFF indica-
tor illuminates in those situations.)
• The driver manually moves the
shift lever :
It deactivates SMART mode. The
vehicle drives, as the driver manu-
ally moves the shift lever.
• The cruise control is activated :
The cruise control system may
deactivate the SMART mode when
the vehicle is controlled by the set
speed of the smart cruise control
system. (SMART mode is not
deactivated just by activating the
cruise control system.)
• The transmission oil temperature is
either extremely low or extremely
high :
The SMART mode can be active in
most of the normal driving situa-
tions. However, an extremely high/
low transmission oil temperature
may temporarily deactivate the
SMART mode, because the trans-
mission condition is out of normal
operation condition.
5-54
Driving your vehicle
System Description
Blind-Spot Collision Warning
(BCW)
The Blind-Spot Collision Warning
(BCW) system uses radar sensors in
the rear bumper to monitor and warn
the driver of an approaching vehicle
in the driver's blind spot area.
1) Blind-Spot Area
The blind spot detection range varies
relative to vehicle speed.
Note that if your vehicle is traveling
much faster than the vehicles around
you, the warning will not occur.
2) Closing at high speed
The Lane Change Assist feature will
alert you when a vehicle is approach-
ing in an adjacent lane at a high rate
of speed. If the driver activates the
turn signal when the system detects
an oncoming vehicle, the system
sounds an audible alert.
BBLLIINNDD--SSPPOOTT CCOOLLLLIISSIIOONN WWAARRNNIINNGG ((BBCCWW)) ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OAD058153L
OAD058154L
• Always be aware of road con-
ditions while driving and be
alert for unexpected situa-
tions even though the Blind-
Spot Collision Warning (BCW)
system is operating.
• The Blind-Spot Collision
Warning (BCW) system is
supplemental systems to
assist you.Do not entirely rely
on the systems. Always pay
attention, while driving, for
your safety.
• The Blind-Spot Collision
Warning (BCW) system is not
substitutes for proper and
safe driving. Always drive
safely and use caution when
changing lanes or backing up
the vehicle.
The Blind-Spot Collision
Warning (BCW) system may
not detect every object along-
side the vehicle.
WARNING
5-55
Driving your vehicle
5
System Setting and Activation
System setting
• The driver can activate the system
by placing the ignition switch to the
ON position and by selecting ‘User
Settings → Driver Assistance →
Blind-Spot Safety’.
- The BCW turns on and gets
ready to be activated when
'Warning Only' is selected. Then,
if a vehicle approaches the dri-
ver's blind spot area a warning
sounds.
- The system is deactivated and
the indicator on the BCW button
is extinguished when 'Off' is
selected.
• If you press BCW switch while
'Warning Only' is selected the indi-
cator on the button will turn off and
the system will deactivate.
• If you press the BCW switch while
the system is canceled the indica-
tor on the button illuminates and
the system activates.
When the system is initially turned
on and when the engine is turned
off then on again while the system
is in activation, the warning light
will illuminate for 3 seconds on the
outer side view mirror.
• If the engine is turned off then on
again, the system maintains the
previous state.
• The driver can select the initial
warning activation time in the User
Settings in the LCD display by
selecting 'User Settings → Driver
Assistance → Warning Timing'.
• The options for the initial Blind-
Spot Collision Warning includes
the following:
- Normal:
When this condition is selected,
the initial Blind-Spot Collision
Warning is activated normally. If
this setting feels sensitive
change the option to 'later'.
The warning activation time may
feel late if a vehicle at the side or
rear abruptly accelerates.
OTMA058088MX
OAD058115N OTMA058089
5-56
Driving your vehicle
- Later:
Select this warning activation
time when the traffic is light and
you are driving in a low speed.
Information
If you change the warning timing, the
warning time of other systems may
change. Always be aware before
changing the warning timing.
Operating Conditions
The system enters the ready status,
when the following conditions are
satisfied :
The vehicle speed is above approxi-
mately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Warning and System Control
Blind-Spot Collision Warning
(BCW) system
First stage alert
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a yellow
warning light will illuminate on the
outer side view mirror.
Once the detected vehicle is no
longer within the blind spot area, the
warning will turn off according to the
driving conditions of the vehicle.
i
OAD055028
5-57
Driving your vehicle
5
OAD055029
■ Left side
OAD055030
■ Right side
[A] : Warning sound
Second stage alert
A warning chime to alert the driver will activate when:
1. A vehicle has been detected in the blind spot area by the radar system
AND.
2. The turn signal is applied (same side as where the vehicle is being detect-
ed).
When this alert is activated, the warning light on the outer side view mir-
ror. Will also blink. And a warning chime will sound.
If you turn off the turn signal indicator, the second stage alert will be deac-
tivated.
Once the detected vehicle is no longer within the blind spot area, the warn-
ing will turn off according to the driving conditions of the vehicle.
• The warning light on the
outer side view mirror will illu-
minate whenever a vehicle is
detected at the rear side by
the system.
To avoid accidents, do not
focus only on the warning
light and neglect to see the
surrounding of the vehicle.
• Drive safely even though the
vehicle is equipped with a
Blind-Spot Collision Warning
(BCW) system. Do not solely
rely on the system but check
your surrounding before
changing lanes or backing the
vehicle up.
• The system may not alert the
driver in some conditions so
always check your surround-
ings while driving.
WARNING
5-58
Driving your vehicle
Detecting Sensor
The rear radars are the sensors
inside the rear bumper for detecting
the side and rear areas.Always keep
the rear bumper clean for proper
operation of the system.
• The driver should always use
extreme caution while operat-
ing the vehicle, whether or not
the warning light on the out-
side rearview mirror illumi-
nates or there is a warning
alarm.
• Playing the vehicle audio sys-
tem at high volume may offset
the Blind-Spot Collision
Warning system warning
sounds.
• If any other warning sound
such as seat belt warning
chime is already generated,
the Blind-Spot Collision
Warning (BCW) system warn-
ing may not sound.
CAUTION
OAD058031N
• The system may not work
properly when the bumper
has been damaged, or if the
rear bumper has been
replaced or repaired.
• The sensing range differs
somewhat according to the
width of the road. When the
road is narrow, the system
may detect other vehicles in
the next lane.
• The system may turn off due
to strong electromagnetic
waves.
• Always keep the sensors
clean.
• NEVER arbitrarily disassem-
ble the sensor component nor
apply any impact on the sen-
sor component.
CAUTION
5-59
Driving your vehicle
5
Warning message
Blind-Spot Collision Warning
(BCW) system disabled.
Radar blocked
This warning message may appear
when :
- One or both of the sensors on the
rear bumper is blocked by dirt or
snow or a foreign object.
- Driving in rural areas where the
sensor does not detect another
vehicle for an extended period of
time.
- When there is inclement weather
such as heavy snow or rain.
If any of these conditions occur, the
light on the BCW switch and the sys-
tem will turn off automatically.
When the BCW canceled warning
message is displayed in the cluster,
check to make sure that the rear
bumper is free from any dirt or snow
in the areas where the sensor is
located. Remove any dirt, snow, or
foreign material that could interfere
with the radar sensors.
After any dirt or debris is removed,
the system should operate normally
after about 10 minutes of driving the
vehicle.
If the system still does not operate
normally have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Be careful not to apply unnec-
essary force on the radar sen-
sor or sensor cover.If the sen-
sor is forcibly moved out of
proper alignment, the system
may not operate correctly. In
this case, a warning message
may not be displayed. Have
the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not apply foreign objects
such as a bumper sticker or a
bumper guard near the radar
sensor or apply paint to the
sensor area. Doing so may
adversely affect the perform-
ance of the sensor.
OIK057092L
5-60
Driving your vehicle
Check Blind-Spot Collision
Warning (BCW) system
If there is a problem with the BCW
system, a warning message will
appear and the light on the switch
will turn off. The system will turn off
automatically. Have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Limitations of the System
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations, because the sys-
tem may not detect other vehicles or
objects in certain circumstances.
• The vehicle is driven in inclement
weather such as heavy rain or
snow.
• The sensor is polluted with rain,
snow, mud, etc.
• The rear bumper where the sensor
is located is covered with a foreign
object such as a bumper sticker, a
bumper guard, a bike rack, etc.
• The rear bumper is damaged, or
the sensor is out of the original
default position.
• The vehicle height gets lower or
higher due to heavy loading in a
trunk, abnormal tire pressure, etc.
• When the temperature of the rear
bumper is high.
• When the sensors are blocked by
other vehicles, walls or parking-lot
pillars.
• The vehicle is driven on a curved
road.
• The vehicle is driven through a toll-
gate.
• The road pavement (or the periph-
eral ground) abnormally contains
metallic components (i.e. possibly
due to subway construction).
• There is a fixed object near the
vehicle, such as a guardrail.
• While going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane is
different.
• Driving on a narrow road where
trees or grass or overgrown.
• Driving in rural areas where the
sensor does not detect another
vehicle or structure for an extended
period of time.
• Driving on a wet road.
• Driving on a road where the
guardrail or wall is in double struc-
ture.
• A big vehicle is near such as a bus
or truck.
• When the other vehicle approach-
es very close.
• When the other vehicle passes at a
very fast speed.
OAD058169L/OTM058151L
■ Type A ■ Type B
5-61
Driving your vehicle
5
• While changing lanes.
• If the vehicle has started at the
same time as the vehicle next to
you and has accelerated.
• When the vehicle in the next lane
moves two lanes away from you
OR when the vehicle two lanes
away moves to the next lane from
you.
• A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
• A flat trailer is near.
• If there are small objects in the
detecting area such as a shopping
cart or a baby stroller.
• If there is a low height vehicle such
as a sports car.
• Temperature is extremely low
around the vehicle.
• Driving on a curve
The system may not operate proper-
ly when driving on a curved road. In
certain instances, the system may
not detect the vehicle in the next
lane.
Always pay attention to road and
driving conditions, while driving.
The system may not operate proper-
ly when driving on a curved road. In
certain instances, the system may
recognize a vehicle in the same lane.
Always pay attention to road and
driving conditions, while driving.
OAD058155N OAD058156N
5-62
Driving your vehicle
• Driving where the road is merg-
ing/dividing
The system may not operate proper-
ly when driving where the road is
merging/dividing. In certain
instances, the system may not detect
the vehicle in the next lane.
Always pay attention to road and
driving conditions, while driving.
• Driving on a slope
The system may not operate proper-
ly when driving on a slope. In certain
instances, the system may not detect
the vehicle in the next lane.
Also, in certain instances the system
may wrongly recognize the ground or
structures.
Always pay attention to road and
driving conditions, while driving.
• Driving where the heights of the
lanes are different
The system may not operate proper-
ly when driving where the heights of
the lanes are different.
In certain instances, the system may
not detect the vehicle on a road with
different lane heights (i.e. underpass
joining section, grade separated
intersections, etc.).
Always pay attention to road and
driving conditions, while driving.
OAD058149NOAD058157N OAD058150N
5-63
Driving your vehicle
5
[A] : noise barrier, [B] : guardrail
• Driving where there is a structure
beside the road
The system may not operate proper-
ly when driving where there is struc-
ture beside the road.
In certain instances, the system may
wrongly recognize the structures (i.e.
noise barriers, guardrail, double
guardrail, median strip, bollard,
street light, road sign, tunnel wall,
etc.) beside the road.
Always pay attention to road and
driving conditions, while driving.
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
i
OAD058151N
5-64
Driving your vehicle
System Description
Rear Cross-Traffic Collision
Warning (RCCW) system
The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision
Warning (RCCW) system uses radar
sensors to monitor the approaching
cross traffic from the left and right
side of the vehicle when your vehicle
is in reverse.
The blind spot detection range varies
relative to the approaching vehicle
speed.
System Setting and Activation
System setting
• The driver can activate the sys-
tems by placing the ignition switch
to the ON position and by selecting
'User Settings → Driver Assistance
→ Blind-Spot Safety → Rear
Cross-Traffic Safety'. The RCCW
turns on and gets ready to be acti-
vated when 'Rear Cross-Traffic
Safety' is selected.
• When the engine is turned off then
on again, the systems always get
ready to be activated.
RREEAARR CCRROOSSSS--TTRRAAFFFFIICC CCOOLLLLIISSIIOONN WWAARRNNIINNGG ((RRCCCCWW)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OAD058158N
• Always be aware of road con-
ditions while driving and be
alert for unexpected situa-
tions even though the Rear
Cross-Traffic Collision
Warning system is operating.
• The Rear Cross-Traffic
Collision Warning system is
supplemental systems to
assist you.Do not entirely rely
on the systems. Always pay
attention, while driving, for
your safety.
• The Rear Cross-Traffic
Collision Warning system is
not substitutes for proper and
safe driving. Always drive
safely and use caution when
backing up the vehicle.
WARNING
OTMA058095MX
5-65
Driving your vehicle
5
• When the system is initially turned
on and when the engine is turned
off then on again, the warning light
will illuminate for 3 seconds on the
outside rearview mirror.
The driver can select the initial warn-
ing activation time in the User
Settings in the LCD display by
selecting ‘User Settings → Driver
Assistance → Warning Timing’. The
options for the initial Rear Cross-
Traffic Collision Warning includes the
following:
- Normal:
When this condition is selected, the
initial Rear Cross-Traffic Collision
Warning is activated normally. If this
setting feels sensitive, change the
option to 'Later'.
The warning activation time may feel
late if a vehicle at the side or rear
abruptly accelerates.
- Later:
Select this warning activation time
when the traffic is light and you are
driving in a low speed.
Information
If you change the warning timing, the
warning time of other systems may
change. Always be aware before
changing the warning timing.
Operating conditions
To operate:
Go to the 'User Settings → Driver
Assistance → Blind-Spot Safety →
Rear Cross-Traffic Safety' on the
LCD display. The system will turn on
and standby to activate.
The system will activate when vehi-
cle speed is below 10 km/h (7 mph)
and with the shift lever in R
(Reverse).
* The system will not activate when
the vehicle speed exceeds 10
km/h (7 mph).The system will acti-
vate again when the speed is
below 10 km/h (7 mph).
The system's detecting range is
approximately 1 - 65 ft (0.5 – 20 m).
An approaching vehicle will be
detected if their vehicle speed is
within 2.5 - 22.5 mph (4 - 36 km/h).
Note that the detecting range may
vary under certain conditions. As
always, use caution and pay close
attention to your surroundings when
backing up your vehicle.
i
OTMA058089
5-66
Driving your vehicle
Warning and system control
Rear Cross-Traffic Collision
Warning (RCCW) system
If the vehicle detected by the sensors
approaches from the rear left/right
side of your vehicle, the warning
chime will sound, the warning light
on the outside rearview mirror will
blink and a message will appear on
the LCD display.If the rear view mon-
itor system is in activation, a mes-
sage will also appear on the audio or
AVN screen.
The warning will stop when:
- the detected vehicle moves out of
the sensing area or
- when the vehicle is right behind
your vehicle or
- when the vehicle is not approach-
ing your vehicle or
- when the other vehicle slows
down.
■ Left ■ Right
OAD058116N/OAD058117N
• When the operation condition
of the Rear Cross-Traffic
Collision Warning system is sat-
isfied, the warning will occur
every time a vehicle approaches
the side or rear of your stopped
(0 mph vehicle speed) vehicle.
• The system's warning or brake
may not operate properly if the
left or right of your vehicle's
rear bumper is blocked by a
vehicle or obstacle.
• The driver should always use
extreme caution while operat-
ing the vehicle, whether or not
the warning light on the out-
side rearview mirror illumi-
nates or there is a warning
alarm.
• Playing the vehicle audio sys-
tem at high volume may offset
the system's warning sounds.
CAUTION
5-67
Driving your vehicle
5
Detecting sensor
The rear radars are the sensors
inside the rear bumper for detecting
the side and rear areas.Always keep
the rear bumper clean for proper
operation of the system.
• The Rear Cross-Traffic
Collision Warning system is
not a substitute for safe driv-
ing practices, but a conven-
ience function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always drive cautiously to
prevent unexpected and sud-
den situations from occur-
ring. Pay attention to the road
conditions at all times.
• If any other warning sound
such as seat belt warning
chime is already generated,
the Rear Cross-Traffic
Collision Warning system
warning may not sound.
• Drive safely even though the
vehicle is equipped with a
Rear Cross-Traffic Collision
Warning system. Do not sole-
ly rely on the system but
check your surrounding when
backing the vehicle up.
• The driver is responsible for
accurate brake control.
• Always pay extreme caution
while driving.The Rear Cross-
Traffic Collision Warning sys-
tem may not operate properly
or unnecessarily operate in
accordance with your driving
situations.
WARNING
OAD058031N
• The system may not work
properly when the bumper
has been damaged, or if the
rear bumper has been
replaced or repaired.
• The system may turn off due
to strong electromagnetic
waves.
CAUTION
5-68
Driving your vehicle
Warning message
Blind-Spot Collision Warning
(BCW) system disabled. Radar
blocked
This warning message may appear
when:
- One or both of the sensors on the
rear bumper is blocked by dirt or
snow or a foreign object.
- Driving in rural areas where the
sensor does not detect another
vehicle for an extended period of
time.
- When there is inclement weather
such as heavy snow or rain.
If any of these conditions occur, the
light on the BCW switch and the sys-
tem will turn off automatically.
When the BCW canceled warning
message is displayed in the cluster,
check to make sure that the rear
bumper is free from any dirt or snow
in the areas where the sensor is
located. Remove any dirt, snow, or
foreign material that could interfere
with the radar sensors.
After any dirt or debris is removed,
the system should operate normally
after about 10 minutes of driving the
vehicle.
If the system still does not operate
normally have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Always keep the sensors
clean.
• NEVER arbitrarily disassem-
ble the sensor component nor
apply any impact on the sen-
sor component.
• Be careful not to apply unnec-
essary force on the radar sen-
sor or sensor cover.If the sen-
sor is forcibly moved out of
proper alignment, the system
may not operate correctly. In
this case, a warning message
may not be displayed. Have
the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not apply foreign objects
such as a bumper sticker or a
bumper guard near the radar
sensor or apply paint to the
sensor area. Doing so may
adversely affect the perform-
ance of the sensor.
OIK057092L
5-69
Driving your vehicle
5
Check Blind-Spot Collision
Warning (BCW) system
If there is a problem with the BCW
system, a warning message will
appear and the light on the switch
will turn off. The system will turn off
automatically.RCCW will not operate
also if the BCW system turns off due
to malfunction. Have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Limitations of the system
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations, because the sys-
tem may not detect other vehicles or
objects in certain circumstances.
• The vehicle is driven in inclement
weather such as heavy rain or
snow.
• The sensor is polluted with rain,
snow, mud, etc.
• The rear bumper where the sensor
is located is covered with a foreign
object such as a bumper sticker, a
bumper guard, a bike rack, etc.
• The rear bumper is damaged, or
the sensor is out of the original
default position.
• The vehicle height gets lower or
higher due to heavy loading in a
trunk, abnormal tire pressure, etc.
• When the temperature of the rear
bumper is high.
• When the sensors are blocked by
other vehicles, walls or parking-lot
pillars.
• The vehicle is driven on a curved
road.
• The road pavement (or the periph-
eral ground) abnormally contains
metallic components (i.e. possibly
due to subway construction).
• There is a fixed object near the
vehicle, such as a guardrail.
• While going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane is
different.
• Driving on a narrow road where
trees or grass or overgrown.
• Driving in rural areas where the
sensor does not detect another
vehicle for an extended period of
time.
• Driving on a wet road.
• Driving on a road where the
guardrail or wall is in double struc-
ture.
• A big vehicle is near such as a bus
or truck.
• When the other vehicle approach-
es very close.
• When the other vehicle passes at a
very fast speed.
• While changing lanes.
OAD058169L/OTM058151L
■ Type A ■ Type B
5-70
Driving your vehicle
• If the vehicle has started at the
same time as the vehicle next to
you and has accelerated.
• When the vehicle in the next lane
moves two lanes away from you
OR when the vehicle two lanes
away moves to the next lane from
you.
• A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
• A flat trailer is near.
• If there are small objects in the
detecting area such as a shopping
cart or a baby stroller.
• If there is a low height vehicle such
as a sports car.
• Temperature is extremely low
around the vehicle.
[A] : Structure
• Driving where there is a vehicle or
structure near
The system may not operate proper-
ly when driving where there is a vehi-
cle or structure near.
In certain instances, the system may
not detect the vehicle approaching
from behind and the warning may not
operate properly.
Always pay attention to your sur-
rounding while driving.
• When the vehicle is in a complex
parking environment
The system may not operate proper-
ly when the vehicle is in a complex
parking environment.
In certain instances, the system may
not be able to exactly determine the
risk of collision for the vehicles which
are parking or pulling out near your
vehicle (e.g. a vehicle escaping
beside your vehicle, a vehicle park-
ing or pulling out in the rear area, a
vehicle approaching your vehicle
making a turn, etc.).
If this occurs, the warning may not
operate properly.
OAD058159N OAD058160N
5-71
Driving your vehicle
5
[A] :Vehicle
• When the vehicle is parked diago-
nally
The system may not operate proper-
ly when the vehicle is parked diago-
nally.
In certain instances, when the diago-
nally parked vehicle is pulled out of
the parking space, the system may
not detect the vehicle approaching
from the rear left/right of your vehi-
cle.In this case, the warning may not
operate properly.
Always pay attention to your sur-
rounding while driving.
• When the vehicle is on/near a
slope
The system may not operate proper-
ly when the vehicle is on/near a
slope.
In certain instances, the system may
not detect the vehicle approaching
from the rear left/right and the warn-
ing may not operate properly.
Always pay attention to your sur-
rounding while driving.
[A] : Structure, [B] : Wall
• Pulling into the parking space
where there is a structure
The system may not operate proper-
ly when pulling in the vehicle to the
parking space where there is a struc-
ture at the back or side of your vehi-
cle.
In certain instances, when backing
into the parking space, the system
may not detect the vehicle moving in
front of your vehicle. In this case, the
warning may not operate properly.
Always pay attention to the parking
space while driving.
OAD058162N OAD058152N OAD058161N
5-72
Driving your vehicle
• When the vehicle is parked rear-
ward
If the vehicle is parked rearward and
the sensor detects the another vehi-
cle in the rear area of the parking
space, the system warning may not
work properly. Always pay attention
to the parking space while driving.
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
i
OAD058163N
5-73
Driving your vehicle
5
The Forward Collision-Avoidance
Assist (FCA) system is designed to
help detect and monitor the vehicle
ahead in the roadway through cam-
era recognition to warn the driver
that a collision is imminent, and if
necessary, apply emergency brak-
ing.
The camera type FCA system
detects the vehicle ahead in the
roadway through camera.
System Setting and Activation
System setting
• The driver can activate the FCA by
placing the ignition switch to the
ON position and by selecting:
'User Settings → Driver Assistance
→ Forward Safety'
- If you select "Active Assist", the
FCA system activates. The FCA
produces warning messages and
warning alarms in accordance
with the collision risk levels. Also,
it controls the brakes in accor-
dance with the collision risk lev-
els.
FFOORRWWAARRDD CCOOLLLLIISSIIOONN AAVVOOIIDDAANNCCEE ((FFCCAA)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
Take the following precautions
when using the Forward
Collision- Avoidance Assist
(FCA) system:
• This system is only a supple-
mental system and it is not
intended to, nor does it
replace the need for extreme
care and attention of the driv-
er. The sensing range and
objects detectable by the sen-
sors are limited. Pay attention
to the road conditions at all
times.
• NEVER drive too fast in accor-
dance with the road condi-
tions or while cornering.
• Always drive cautiously to
prevent unexpected and sud-
den situations from occur-
ring. The Forward Collision-
Avoidance system may not
always stop the vehicle com-
pletely and is only intended to
help mitigate a collision that
is imminent.
WARNING
OTMA058186
5-74
Driving your vehicle
- If you select "Warning Only", the
FCA system activates and pro-
duces only warning alarms in
accordance with the collision risk
levels. You should control the
brake directly because the FCA
system do not control the brake.
- If you select "Off", the FCA sys-
tem deactivates,
The warning light illu-
minates on the LCD
display, when you can-
cel the FCA system.
The driver can monitor the FCA
ON/OFF status on the LCD display.
Also, the warning light illuminates
when the ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is turned off.If the warning
light remains ON when the FCA is
activated, have the system
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• The driver can select the initial
warning activation time on the LCD
display.
Go to the 'User Settings → Driver
Assistance → Warning Timing →
Normal/Later'.
The options for the initial Forward
Collision Warning includes the fol-
lowing:
- Normal :
When this condition is selected,
the initial Forward Collision
Warning is activated sensitively. If
you feel the warning activates too
early, set the Forward Collision
Warning to 'Later'.
Even though, 'Normal' is selected if
the front vehicle suddenly stops
the initial warning activation time
may not seem fast.
- Later :
When this condition is selected,
the initial Forward Collision
Warning is activated later than nor-
mal. This setting reduces the
amount of distance between the
vehicle ahead before the initial
warning occurs.
Select 'Later' when traffic is light
and when driving speed is slow.
Information
If you change the warning timing, the
warning time of other systems may
change. Always be aware before
changing the warning timing.
i
•
OTMA058089
5-75
Driving your vehicle
5
Prerequisite for activation
The FCA system is on and ready
when FCA is selected on the LCD
display and when the following pre-
requisites are satisfied:
- The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is on.
- Driving speed exceeds approxi-
mately 6mph (10 km/h) (The FCA
is only activated within a certain
speed range.).
- The system detects a vehicle in
front, which may collide with your
vehicle. (The FCA may not be acti-
vated or may sound a warning
alarm in accordance with the driv-
ing situation or vehicle condition.)
FCA Warning Message and
System Control
The FCA produces warning mes-
sages and warning alarms in accor-
dance with the collision risk levels,
such as abrupt stopping of the vehi-
cle in front, insufficient braking dis-
tance detection. Also, it controls the
brakes in accordance with the colli-
sion risk levels.
The driver can select the initial warn-
ing activation time in the User
Settings in the LCD display. The
options for the initial Forward Collision
Warning include Early or Later initial
warning time.
• Completely stop the vehicle
on a safe location before
operating the switch on the
steering wheel to activate/
deactivate the FCA system.
• The FCA automatically acti-
vates upon placing the igni-
tion switch to the ON position.
The driver can deactivate the
FCA by canceling the system
setting on the LCD display.
• The FCA automatically deacti-
vates upon canceling the ESC
(Electronic Stability Control).
When the ESC is canceled,
the FCA cannot be activated
on the LCD display. The FCA
warning light will illuminate
which is normal.
WARNING
5-76
Driving your vehicle
Collision Warning (First warning)
This warning message appears on
the LCD display with a warning
chime. Additionally, some vehicle
system intervention occurs by the
engine management system to help
decelerate the vehicle.
- Your vehicle speed may decelerate
moderately.
- The FCA system limitedly controls
the brakes to preemptively mitigate
impact in a collision.
- If you select "Warning Only", the
FCA system activates and pro-
duces only warning alarms in
accordance with the collision risk
levels.You should control the brake
directly because the FCA system
do not control the brake.
Emergency Braking
(Second warning)
This warning message appears on
the LCD display with a warning
chime.
Additionally, some vehicle system
intervention occurs by the engine
management system to help decel-
erate the vehicle.
- The FCA system limitedly controls
the brakes to preemptively mitigate
impact in a collision. The brake
control is maximized just before a
collision.
OAD058119N
OAD058120N
5-77
Driving your vehicle
5
- If you select "Warning Only", the
FCA system activates and pro-
duces only warning alarms in
accordance with the collision risk
levels.You should control the brake
directly because the FCA system
do not control the brake.
Brake operation
• In an urgent situation, the braking
system enters into the ready status
for prompt reaction against the dri-
ver's depressing the brake pedal.
• The FCA provides additional brak-
ing power for optimum braking per-
formance, when the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
• The braking control is automatical-
ly deactivated, when the driver
sharply depresses the accelerator
pedal, or when the driver abruptly
operates the steering wheel.
• The FCA braking control is auto-
matically canceled, when risk fac-
tors disappear.
• The driver should always use
extreme caution while operat-
ing the vehicle, whether or not
there is a warning message or
alarm from the FCA system.
• If any other warning sound
such as seat belt warning
chime is already generated,
the Forward Collision-
Avoidance Assist (FCA) sys-
tem warning may not sound.
CAUTION
The FCA system logic operates
within certain parameters, such
as the distance from the vehicle
ahead, the speed of the vehicle
ahead, and the driver's vehicle
speed. Certain conditions such
as inclement weather and road
conditions may affect the oper-
ation of the FCA system.
WARNING
The FCA braking control cannot
completely stop the vehicle nor
avoid all collisions. The driver
should hold the responsibility
to safely drive and control the
vehicle.
WARNING
Never deliberately drive danger-
ously to activate the system.
WARNING
5-78
Driving your vehicle
FCA Sensor
In order for the FCA system to oper-
ate properly, always make sure the
camera is clean and free of dirt,
snow, and debris.
Dirt, snow, or foreign substances on
the sensor cover or sensor may
adversely affect the sensing perform-
ance of the sensor.
• NEVER install any accessories
or stickers on the front wind-
shield, nor tint the front wind-
shield.
• NEVER locate any reflective
objects (i.e. white paper, mirror)
over the dashboard. Any light
reflection may cause a malfunc-
tion of the system.
• Pay extreme caution to keep the
camera out of water.
• NEVER disassemble the camera
assembly, nor apply any impact
on the camera assembly.
• If the sensor is forcibly moved
out of proper alignment,the FCA
system may not operate correct-
ly. In this case, a warning mes-
sage may not be displayed. Have
the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Playing the vehicle audio sys-
tem at high volume may offset
the system warning sounds.
Information
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer when:
• The windshield glass is replaced.
i
NOTICE
OAD058023
5-79
Driving your vehicle
5
Warning message and warning
light
Forward Collision Avoidance Assist
(FCA) system disabled.
Camera obscured
When the front camera is blocked
with dirt, snow, or debris, the FCA
system operation may stop tem-
porarily. If this occurs, a warning
message will appear on the LCD dis-
play. Remove any dirt, snow, or
debris and clean the front camera
before operating the FCA system.
However, the FCA may not properly
operate in an area (e.g. open ter-
rain), where any substances are not
detected or the camera is blocked
with dirt, snow or debris after turning
ON the engine.
Also, even though a warning mes-
sage does not appear on the LCD
display, the FCA may not properly
operate.
System Malfunction
Check Forward Collision Avoidance
Assist system
• When the FCA is not working prop-
erly, the FCA warning light ( )
will illuminate and the warning
message will appear for a few sec-
onds. After the message disap-
pears, the master warning light
( ) will illuminate. In this case,
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• The FCA warning message may
appear along with the illumination
of the ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) warning light.
OAD058172L
OAD058171L/OIK057091L
■ Type A ■ Type B
5-80
Driving your vehicle
• The FCA is only a supplemen-
tal system for the driver’s con-
venience. The driver should
hold the responsibility to con-
trol the vehicle operation. Do
not solely depend on the FCA
system. Rather, maintain a
safe braking distance, and, if
necessary, depress the brake
pedal to reduce the driving
speed.
• In certain instances and
under certain driving condi-
tions, the FCA system may
activate prematurely. This ini-
tial warning message appears
on the LCD display with a
warning chime.
Also, in certain instances the
front camera recognition sys-
tem may not detect the vehi-
cle ahead. The FCA system
may not activate and the
warning message will not be
displayed.
WARNING
• If there is a malfunction with
the FCA system, the Forward
Collision avoidance assist
system is not applied even
though the braking system is
operating normally.
• If the vehicle in front stops
suddenly, you may have less
control of the brake system.
Therefore, always keep a safe
distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you.
• The FCA system may activate
during braking and the vehi-
cle may stop suddenly shift-
ing loose objects toward the
passengers. Always keep
loose objects secured.
• The FCA system may not acti-
vate if the driver applies the
brake pedal to avoid a colli-
sion.
• The brake control may be
insufficient, possibly causing
a collision, if a vehicle in front
abruptly stops. Always pay
extreme caution.
• The FCA system may not acti-
vate according to the road
conditions, inclement weath-
er, driving conditions or traffic
conditions.
• Occupants may get injured, if
the vehicle abruptly stops by
the activated FCA system.Pay
extreme caution.
• The FCA system does not
detect all vehicles.
5-81
Driving your vehicle
5
Limitations of the System
The Forward Collision Avoidance
Assist (FCA) system is designed to
monitor the vehicle ahead on the
roadway through camera recognition
to warn the driver that a collision is
imminent, and if necessary, apply
emergency braking.
In certain situations, the camera may
not be able to detect the vehicle
ahead. In these cases, the FCA sys-
tem may not operate normally. The
driver must pay careful attention in
the following situations where the
FCA operation may be limited.
Detecting vehicles
The sensor may be limited when:
• The camera is blocked with a for-
eign object or debris
• Inclement weather such as heavy
rain or snow obscures the field of
view of the camera
• There is interference by electro-
magnetic waves
• The vehicle is on unpaved or
uneven rough surfaces, or road
with sudden gradient changes.
• The vehicle drives through a con-
struction area, on an unpaved
road, or above metal materials,
such as a railway
• The vehicle in front is too small to
be detected (for example a motor-
cycle or a bicycle, etc.)
• The camera's field of view is not
well illuminated (either too dark or
too much reflection or too much
backlight that obscures the field of
view)
• The camera does not recognize
the entire vehicle in front.
• The FCA system operates
only to detect vehicles in front
of the vehicle.
• The FCA system does not
operate when the vehicle is in
reverse.
• The FCA system is not
designed to detect other
objects on the road such as
animals.
• The FCA system does not
detect vehicles in the oppo-
site lane.
• The FCA system does not
detect cross traffic vehicles
that are approaching.
• The FCA system cannot
detect the driver approaching
the side view of a parked vehi-
cle (for example on a dead
end street).
In these cases, you must main-
tain a safe braking distance,
and if necessary, depress the
brake pedal to reduce the driv-
ing speed in order to maintain a
safe distance.
WARNING
5-82
Driving your vehicle
• The vehicle in front is an oversize
vehicle or trailer that is too big to
be detected by the camera recog-
nition system (for example a tractor
trailer, etc.)
• The vehicle in front does not have
rear lights or the rear lights are not
turned ON or the rear lights are
located unusually.
• The outside brightness changes
suddenly, for example when enter-
ing or exiting a tunnel
• The vehicle is moving underground
level or inside a building
• The vehicle drives inside a build-
ing, such as a basement parking
lot
• The adverse road conditions cause
excessive vehicle vibrations while
driving
• You are on a roundabout and the
vehicle in front circles
• The camera lens is contaminated
due to tinted, filmed or coated
windshield, damaged glass, or
stuck of foreign matter (sticker,
bug, etc.) on the glass
• The camera is damaged.
• The brightness outside is too low
such as when the headlamps are
not on at night or the vehicle is
going through a tunnel.
• Light coming from a street light or
an oncoming vehicle is reflected on
a wet road surface such as a pud-
dle in the road
• The field of view in front is
obstructed by sun glare
• The shadow is on the road by a
median strip, trees, etc.
• The vehicle drives through a toll-
gate.
• The windshield glass is fogged up;
a clear view of the road is obstruct-
ed
• The camera sensor recognition is
limited
• The rear part of the vehicle in front
is not normally visible (for example,
the vehicle is spinning or the vehi-
cle is overturned)
• The sensor recognition changes
suddenly when passing over a
speed bump
• The vehicle in front is driving errat-
ically
• The vehicle in front is moving verti-
cally to the driving direction
• The vehicle in front is stopped ver-
tically
• The vehicle in front is driving
towards your vehicle or reversing
5-83
Driving your vehicle
5
- Driving on a curve
The performance of the FCA system
may be limited when driving on a
curved road.
In certain instances on a curved
road, the FCA system may activate
prematurely.
Also, in certain instances the front
camera recognition system may not
detect the vehicle traveling on a
curved road.
In these cases, the driver must main-
tain a safe braking distance, and if
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
The FCA system may recognize a
vehicle in the next lane when driving
on a curved road.
In this case, the system may unnec-
essarily alarm the driver and apply
the brake.
Always pay attention to road and
driving conditions, while driving. If
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
Also, when necessary depress the
accelerator pedal to prevent the sys-
tem from unnecessarily decelerating
your vehicle.
- Driving on a slope
The performance of the FCA decreas-
es while driving upward or downward
on a slope, not recognizing the vehi-
cle in front in the same lane. It may
unnecessarily produce the warning
message and the warning alarm, or it
may not produce the warning mes-
sage and the warning alarm at all.
When the FCA suddenly recognizes
the vehicle in front while passing
over a slope, you may experience
sharp deceleration.
Always keep your eyes forward while
driving upward or downward on a
slope, and, if necessary, depress the
brake pedal to reduce your driving
speed in order to maintain distance.
OAD058182N OAD058183N OAD058124L
5-84
Driving your vehicle
- Changing lanes
When a vehicle changes lanes in
front of you, the FCA system may not
immediately detect the vehicle, espe-
cially if the vehicle changes lanes
abruptly.In this case, you must main-
tain a safe braking distance, and if
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
When driving in stop-and-go traffic,
and a stopped vehicle in front of you
merges out of the lane, the FCA sys-
tem may not immediately detect the
new vehicle that is now in front of
you. In this case, you must maintain
a safe braking distance, and if nec-
essary, depress the brake pedal to
reduce your driving speed in order to
maintain a safe distance.
- Detecting the vehicle in front of you
If the vehicle in front of you has cargo
that extends rearward from the cab,
or when the vehicle in front of you
has higher ground clearance, addi-
tional special attention is required.
The FCA system may not be able to
detect the cargo extending from the
vehicle. In these instances, you must
maintain a safe braking distance
from the rearmost object, and if nec-
essary, depress the brake pedal to
reduce your driving speed in order to
maintain distance.
OAD058184N OAD058168L OAD058125L
5-85
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
In some instances, the FCA system
may be canceled when subjected to
electromagnetic interference.
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
i
i
• Do not use the Forward
Collision Avoidance Assist
(FCA) system when towing a
vehicle. Application of the
FCA system while towing may
adversely affect the safety of
your vehicle or the towing
vehicle.
• Use extreme caution when the
vehicle in front of you has
cargo that extends rearward
from the cab, or when the
vehicle in front of you has
higher ground clearance.
• The FCA system is designed
to detect and monitor the
vehicle ahead in the roadway
through camera recognition.It
is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicycles, motor-
cycles, or smaller wheeled
objects such as luggage
bags, shopping carts, or
strollers.
• Never try to test the operation
of the FCA system. Doing so
may cause severe injury or
death.
WARNING
5-86
Driving your vehicle
The Forward Collision-Avoidance
Assist (FCA) system is designed to
help detect and monitor the vehicle
ahead or help detect a pedestrian in
the roadway through radar signals
and camera recognition to warn the
driver that a collision is imminent,
and if necessary, apply emergency
braking.
System Setting and Activation
System setting
• The driver can activate the FCA by
placing the ignition switch to the
ON position and by selecting:
'User Settings → Driver Assistance
→ Forward Safety'
- If you select "Active Assist", the
FCA system activates. The FCA
produces warning messages
and warning alarms in accor-
dance with the collision risk lev-
els. Also, it controls the brakes in
accordance with the collision risk
levels.
Take the following precautions
when using the Forward Collision-
Avoidance Assist (FCA) system:
• This system is only a supple-
mental system and it is not
intended to,nor does it replace
the need for extreme care and
attention of the driver. The
sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are
limited. Pay attention to the
road conditions at all times.
• NEVER drive too fast in accor-
dance with the road condi-
tions or while cornering.
• Always drive cautiously to
prevent unexpected and sud-
den situations from occur-
ring. The Forward Collision-
Avoidance system may not
always stop the vehicle com-
pletely and is only intended to
help mitigate a collision that
is imminent.
WARNING
OTMA058186
FFOORRWWAARRDD CCOOLLLLIISSIIOONN AAVVOOIIDDAANNCCEE ((FFCCAA)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((WWIITTHH HHYYUUNNDDAAII SSMMAARRTT SSEENNSSEE))
((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
5-87
Driving your vehicle
5
- If you select "Warning Only", the
FCA system activates and pro-
duces only warning alarms in
accordance with the collision risk
levels. You should control the
brake directly because the FCA
system do not control the brake.
- If you select "Off", the FCA sys-
tem deactivates,
The warning light illu-
minates on the LCD
display, when you can-
cel the FCA system.
The driver can monitor the FCA
ON/OFF status on the LCD display.
Also, the warning light illuminates
when the ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is turned off.If the warning
light remains ON when the FCA is
activated, have the system
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• The driver can select the initial warn-
ing activation time on the LCD dis-
play.
Go to the 'User Settings → Driver
Assistance → Warning Timing →
Normal/Later'.
The options for the initial Forward
Collision Warning includes the fol-
lowing:
- Normal :
When this condition is selected,
the initial Forward Collision
Warning is activated sensitively. If
you feel the warning activates too
early, set the Forward Collision
Warning to 'Later'.
Even though, 'Normal' is selected if
the front vehicle suddenly stops
the initial warning activation time
may not seem fast.
•
OTMA058089
5-88
Driving your vehicle
- Later :
When this condition is selected,
the initial Forward Collision
Warning is activated later than nor-
mal. This setting reduces the
amount of distance between the
vehicle or pedestrian ahead before
the initial warning occurs.
Select 'Later' when traffic is light
and when driving speed is slow.
Information
If you change the warning timing, the
warning time of other systems may
change. Always be aware before
changing the warning timing.
Prerequisite for activation
The FCA system is on and ready
when FCA is selected on the LCD
display and when the following pre-
requisites are satisfied:
- The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is on.
- Driving speed exceeds approxi-
mately 6 mph (10 km/h) (The FCA
is only activated within a certain
speed range.).
- The system detects a pedestrian
or a vehicle in front, which may col-
lide with your vehicle. (The FCA
may not be activated or may sound
a warning alarm in accordance
with the driving situation or vehicle
condition.)
- If you select "Warning only", the
FCA system activates and pro-
duces only warning alarms in
accordance with the collision risk
levels. (The FCA system may not
operate properly depending on the
frontal situation, the direction of
pedestrian or cyclist (if equipped)
and speed.)
i
• Completely stop the vehicle
on a safe location before
operating the switch on the
steering wheel to activate
/deactivate the FCA system.
• The FCA automatically acti-
vates upon placing the igni-
tion switch to the ON position.
The driver can deactivate the
FCA by canceling the system
setting on the LCD display.
• The FCA automatically deacti-
vates upon canceling the ESC
(Electronic Stability Control).
When the ESC is canceled,
the FCA cannot be activated
on the LCD display. The FCA
warning light will illuminate
which is normal.
WARNING
5-89
Driving your vehicle
5
FCA Warning Message and
System Control
The FCA produces warning mes-
sages and warning alarms in accor-
dance with the collision risk levels,
such as abrupt stopping of the vehi-
cle in front, insufficient braking dis-
tance, or pedestrian detection. Also,
it controls the brakes in accordance
with the collision risk levels.
The driver can select the initial warn-
ing activation time in the User
Settings in the LCD display. The
options for the initial Forward Collision
Warning include Early or Later initial
warning time.
Collision Warning (First warning)
This warning message appears on
the LCD display with a warning
chime. Additionally, some vehicle
system intervention occurs by the
engine management system to help
decelerate the vehicle.
- Your vehicle speed may decelerate
moderately.
- The FCA system limitedly controls
the brakes to preemptively mitigate
impact in a collision.
- If you select "Warning Only", the
FCA system activates and pro-
duces only warning alarms in
accordance with the collision risk
levels.You should control the brake
directly because the FCA system
do not control the brake.
Emergency Braking
(Second warning)
This warning message appears on
the LCD display with a warning
chime.
Additionally, some vehicle system
intervention occurs by the engine
management system to help decel-
erate the vehicle.
- The FCA system limitedly controls
the brakes to preemptively mitigate
impact in a collision. The brake
control is maximized just before a
collision.
OAD058119N
OAD058120N
5-90
Driving your vehicle
- If you select "Warning Only", the
FCA system activates and pro-
duces only warning alarms in
accordance with the collision risk
levels.You should control the brake
directly because the FCA system
do not control the brake.
Brake operation
• In an urgent situation, the braking
system enters into the ready status
for prompt reaction against the dri-
ver’s depressing the brake pedal.
• The FCA provides additional brak-
ing power for optimum braking per-
formance, when the driver depress-
es the brake pedal.
• The braking control is automatical-
ly deactivated, when the driver
sharply depresses the accelerator
pedal, or when the driver abruptly
operates the steering wheel.
• The FCA braking control is auto-
matically canceled, when risk fac-
tors disappear.
• The driver should always use
extreme caution while operat-
ing the vehicle, whether or not
there is a warning message or
alarm from the FCA system.
• If any other warning sound
such as seat belt warning
chime is already generated,
the Forward Collision-
Avoidance Assist (FCA) sys-
tem warning may not sound.
CAUTION
The FCA system logic operates
within certain parameters, such
as the distance from the vehicle
or pedestrian ahead, the speed
of the vehicle ahead, and the
driver's vehicle speed. Certain
conditions such as inclement
weather and road conditions
may affect the operation of the
FCA system.
WARNING
The FCA braking control cannot
completely stop the vehicle nor
avoid all collisions. The driver
should hold the responsibility
to safely drive and control the
vehicle.
WARNING
Never deliberately drive danger-
ously to activate the system.
WARNING
5-91
Driving your vehicle
5
FCA Sensor
(Front Radar/Front Camera)
In order for the FCA system to oper-
ate properly, always make sure the
sensor cover or sensor is clean and
free of dirt, snow, and debris.
Dirt, snow, or foreign substances on
the sensor cover or sensor may
adversely affect the sensing perform-
ance of the sensor.
• Do not apply license plate frame
or foreign objects such as a
bumper sticker or a bumper
guard near the sensor. Doing so
may adversely affect the sens-
ing performance of the radar.
• Always keep the sensor and
cover clean and free of dirt and
debris.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash the
vehicle. Do not spray pressur-
ized water directly on the sensor
or sensor cover.
• Be careful not to apply unneces-
sary force on the sensor or sen-
sor cover. If the sensor is
forcibly moved out of proper
alignment, the FCA system may
not operate correctly. In this
case, a warning message may
not be displayed. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the front bumper becomes
damaged in the area around the
sensor, the FCA system may not
operate properly. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Use only genuine HYUNDAI
parts to repair or replace a dam-
aged sensor or sensor cover. Do
not apply paint to the sensor
cover.
NOTICE
OAD058123
OAD058023
■ Front camera
■ Front radar
5-92
Driving your vehicle
• NEVER install any accessories
or stickers on the front wind-
shield, nor tint the front wind-
shield.
• NEVER locate any reflective
objects (i.e. white paper, mirror)
over the dashboard. Any light
reflection may cause a malfunc-
tion of the system.
• Pay extreme caution to keep the
camera out of water.
• NEVER disassemble the camera
assembly, nor apply any impact
on the camera assembly.
• Playing the vehicle audio sys-
tem at high volume may offset
the system warning sounds.
Information
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer when:
• The windshield glass is replaced.
• The radar sensor or cover gets dam-
aged or replaced.
Warning message and warning
light
Forward Collision Avoidance Assist
(FCA) system disabled.
Radar blocked
When the sensor cover is blocked
with dirt, snow, or debris, the FCA
system operation may stop tem-
porarily. If this occurs, a warning
message will appear on the LCD dis-
play. Remove any dirt, snow, or
debris and clean the radar sensor
cover before operating the FCA sys-
tem.
However, the FCA may not properly
operate in an area (e.g. open ter-
rain), where any substances are not
detected or the camera is blocked
with dirt, snow or debris after turning
ON the engine.
Also, even though a warning mes-
sage does not appear on the LCD
display, the FCA may not properly
operate.
The system will operate normally
when such dirt, snow or debris is
removed.
i
NOTICE
OIK057090L
5-93
Driving your vehicle
5
System Malfunction
Check Forward Collision Avoidance
Assist system
• When the FCA is not working prop-
erly, the FCA warning light ( )
will illuminate and the warning
message will appear for a few sec-
onds. After the message disap-
pears, the master warning light
( ) will illuminate. In this case,
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• The FCA warning message may
appear along with the illumination
of the ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) warning light.
• The FCA is only a supplemen-
tal system for the driver’s con-
venience. The driver should
hold the responsibility to con-
trol the vehicle operation. Do
not solely depend on the FCA
system. Rather, maintain a
safe braking distance, and, if
necessary, depress the brake
pedal to reduce the driving
speed.
• In certain instances and
under certain driving condi-
tions, the FCA system may
activate prematurely. This ini-
tial warning message appears
on the LCD display with a
warning chime.
Also, in certain instances the
front radar sensor or camera
recognition system may not
detect the vehicle or pedestri-
an ahead. The FCA system
may not activate and the
warning message will not be
displayed.
WARNING
• If there is a malfunction with
the FCA system, the Forward
Collision avoidance assist
system is not applied even
though the braking system is
operating normally.
• If the vehicle in front stops
suddenly, you may have less
control of the brake system.
Therefore, always keep a safe
distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you.
• The FCA system may activate
during braking and the vehi-
cle may stop suddenly shift-
ing loose objects toward the
passengers. Always keep
loose objects secured.
• The FCA system may not acti-
vate if the driver applies the
brake pedal to avoid a colli-
sion.
• The brake control may be
insufficient, possibly causing
a collision, if a vehicle in front
abruptly stops. Always pay
extreme caution.
OAD058171L/OIK057091L
■ Type A ■ Type B
5-94
Driving your vehicle
In these cases, you must main-
tain a safe braking distance,
and if necessary, depress the
brake pedal to reduce the driv-
ing speed in order to maintain a
safe distance.
• The FCA system may not acti-
vate according to the road
conditions, inclement weath-
er, driving conditions or traffic
conditions.
• Occupants may get injured, if
the vehicle abruptly stops by
the activated FCA system.Pay
extreme caution.
• The FCA system does not
detect all vehicles.
• The FCA system operates
only to detect vehicles or
pedestrians in front of the
vehicle.
• The FCA system does not
operate when the vehicle is in
reverse.
• The FCA system is not
designed to detect other
objects on the road such as
animals.
• The FCA system does not
detect vehicles in the oppo-
site lane.
• The FCA system does not
detect cross traffic vehicles
that are approaching.
• The FCA system cannot
detect the driver approaching
the side view of a parked vehi-
cle (for example on a dead
end street).
WARNING
5-95
Driving your vehicle
5
Limitations of the System
The Forward Collision Avoidance
Assist (FCA) system is designed to
monitor the vehicle ahead or a
pedestrian on the roadway through
radar signals and camera recogni-
tion to warn the driver that a collision
is imminent, and if necessary, apply
emergency braking.
In certain situations, the radar sen-
sor or the camera may not be able to
detect the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead. In these cases, the FCA sys-
tem may not operate normally. The
driver must pay careful attention in
the following situations where the
FCA operation may be limited.
Detecting vehicles
The sensor may be limited when:
• The radar sensor or camera is
blocked with a foreign object or
debris
• Inclement weather such as heavy
rain or snow obscures the field of
view of the radar sensor or camera
• There is interference by electro-
magnetic waves
• The vehicle is on unpaved or
uneven rough surfaces, or road
with sudden gradient changes.
• The vehicle drives through a con-
struction area, on an unpaved
road, or above metal materials,
such as a railway
• The vehicle in front is too small to
be detected (for example a motor-
cycle or a bicycle, etc.)
• The camera’s field of view is not
well illuminated (either too dark or
too much reflection or too much
backlight that obscures the field of
view)
• The camera does not recognize
the entire vehicle in front.
• The vehicle in front is an oversize
vehicle or trailer that is too big to
be detected by the camera recog-
nition system (for example a tractor
trailer, etc.)
• The vehicle in front does not have
rear lights or the rear lights are not
turned ON or the rear lights are
located unusually.
• The outside brightness changes
suddenly, for example when enter-
ing or exiting a tunnel
• The vehicle drives inside a build-
ing, such as a basement parking
lot
• The adverse road conditions cause
excessive vehicle vibrations while
driving
• You are on a roundabout and the
vehicle in front circles
• The camera lens is contaminated
due to tinted, filmed or coated
windshield, damaged glass, or
stuck of foreign matter (sticker,
bug, etc.) on the glass
• The camera is damaged.
• The brightness outside is too low
such as when the headlamps are
not on at night or the vehicle is
going through a tunnel.
• Light coming from a street light or
an oncoming vehicle is reflected on
a wet road surface such as a pud-
dle in the road
• The field of view in front is
obstructed by sun glare
• The shadow is on the road by a
median strip, trees, etc.
• The vehicle drives through a toll-
gate.
5-96
Driving your vehicle
• The windshield glass is fogged up;
a clear view of the road is obstruct-
ed
• The radar/camera sensor recogni-
tion is limited
• The rear part of the vehicle in front
is not normally visible (for example,
the vehicle is spinning or the vehi-
cle is overturned)
• There is severe irregular reflection
from the radar sensor
• The sensor recognition changes
suddenly when passing over a
speed bump
• The vehicle in front is driving errat-
ically
• The vehicle in front is moving verti-
cally to the driving direction
• The vehicle in front is stopped ver-
tically
• The vehicle in front is driving
towards your vehicle or reversing
- Driving on a curve
The performance of the FCA system
may be limited when driving on a
curved road.
This may cause the alarm or braking
to activate or not activate improperly.
Also, in certain instances the front
radar sensor or camera recognition
system may not detect the vehicle
traveling on a curved road.
In these cases, the driver must main-
tain a safe braking distance, and if
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
The FCA system may recognize a
vehicle in the next lane when driving
on a curved road.
In this case, the system may unnec-
essarily alarm the driver and apply
the brake.
Always pay attention to road and
driving conditions, while driving. If
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
Also, when necessary depress the
accelerator pedal to prevent the sys-
tem from unnecessarily decelerating
your vehicle.
Check the road conditions for safe
operation of the FCA system.
OAD058166LOAD058165L
5-97
Driving your vehicle
5
- Driving on a slope
The performance of the FCA decreas-
es while driving upward or downward
on a slope, not recognizing the vehi-
cle in front in the same lane. It may
unnecessarily produce the warning
message and the warning alarm, or it
may not produce the warning mes-
sage and the warning alarm at all.
When the FCA suddenly recognizes
the vehicle in front while passing
over a slope, you may experience
sharp deceleration.
Always keep your eyes forward while
driving upward or downward on a
slope, and, if necessary, depress the
brake pedal to reduce your driving
speed in order to maintain distance.
- Changing lanes
When a vehicle changes lanes in
front of you, the FCA system may not
immediately detect the vehicle, espe-
cially if the vehicle changes lanes
abruptly.In this case, you must main-
tain a safe braking distance, and if
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
When driving in stop-and-go traffic,
and a stopped vehicle in front of you
merges out of the lane, the FCA sys-
tem may not immediately detect the
new vehicle that is now in front of
you. In this case, you must maintain
a safe braking distance, and if nec-
essary, depress the brake pedal to
reduce your driving speed in order to
maintain a safe distance.
OAD058124N OAD058167L OAD058168L
5-98
Driving your vehicle
- Detecting the vehicle in front of you
If the vehicle in front of you has cargo
that extends rearward from the cab,
or when the vehicle in front of you
has higher ground clearance, addi-
tional special attention is required.
The FCA system may not be able to
detect the cargo extending from the
vehicle. In these instances, you must
maintain a safe braking distance
from the rearmost object, and if nec-
essary, depress the brake pedal to
reduce your driving speed in order to
maintain distance.
Detecting pedestrians
The sensor may be limited when:
• The pedestrian is not fully detected
by the camera recognition system,
for example, if the pedestrian is
leaning over or is not fully walking
upright
• The pedestrian is moving very
quickly or appears abruptly in the
camera detection area
• The pedestrian is wearing clothing
that easily blends into the back-
ground, making it difficult to be
detected by the camera recogni-
tion system
• If the bicycle material is not reflect-
ed well on the radar
• When the pedestrian or cyclist
suddenly interrupts in front of the
vehicle
• When there is any other electro-
magnetic interference
• The outside lighting is too bright
(e.g.when driving in bright sunlight
or in sun glare) or too dark (e.g.
when driving on a dark rural road
at night)
• It is difficult to detect and distin-
guish the pedestrian from other
objects in the surroundings, for
example, when there is a group of
pedestrians or a large crowd
• There is an item similar to a per-
son's body structure
• The pedestrian is small
• The pedestrian has impaired
mobility
• The sensor recognition is limited
• The radar sensor or camera is
blocked with a foreign object or
debris
• The camera lens is contaminated
due to tinted, filmed or coated
windshield, damaged glass, or
stuck of foreign matter (sticker,
bug, etc.) on the glass
• The brightness outside is too low
such as when the headlamps are
not on at night or the vehicle is
going through a tunnel
• Inclement weather such as heavy
rain or snow obscures the field of
view of the radar sensor or camera
OAD058195
5-99
Driving your vehicle
5
• When light coming from a street
light or an oncoming vehicle is
reflected on a wet road surface
such as a puddle in the road
• The field of view in front is
obstructed by sun glare
• The windshield glass is fogged up;
a clear view of the road is obstruct-
ed
• The adverse road conditions cause
excessive vehicle vibrations while
driving
• The sensor recognition changes
suddenly when passing over a
speed bump
• You are on a roundabout
Information
In some instances, the FCA system
may be canceled when subjected to
electromagnetic interference.
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
i
i
• Do not use the Forward
Collision Avoidance Assist
(FCA) system when towing a
vehicle. Application of the
FCA system while towing may
adversely affect the safety of
your vehicle or the towing
vehicle.
• Use extreme caution when the
vehicle in front of you has
cargo that extends rearward
from the cab, or when the
vehicle in front of you has
higher ground clearance.
• The FCA system is designed
to detect and monitor the
vehicle ahead or detect a
pedestrian in the roadway
through radar signals and
camera recognition. It is not
designed to detect bicycles,
motorcycles, or smaller
wheeled objects such as lug-
gage bags, shopping carts, or
strollers.
• Never try to test the operation
of the FCA system. Doing so
may cause severe injury or
death.
• If the front bumper, front
glass, radar or camera have
been replaced or repaired,
have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er.
WARNING
5-100
Driving your vehicle
The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) sys-
tem helps detect lane markers on the
road with a front view camera at the
front windshield, and assists the dri-
ver's steering to help keep the vehi-
cle between lanes.
When the system detects the vehicle
straying from its lane, it alerts the
driver with a visual and audible warn-
ing, while applying a counter-steer-
ing torque, to try to prevent the vehi-
cle from moving out of its lane.
LLAANNEE KKEEEEPPIINNGG AASSSSIISSTT ((LLKKAA)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OAD058023
The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)
system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices, but a
convenience function only. It is
the responsibility of the driver
to always be aware of the sur-
rounding and steer the vehicle.
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when using the Lane Keeping
Assist (LKA) system:
• Do not steer the steering
wheel suddenly when the
steering wheel is being assist-
ed by the system.
• LKA system helps to prevent
the driver from moving out of
the lane unintentionally by
assisting the driver's steering.
However, the driver should not
solely rely on the system but
always pay attention on the
steering wheel to stay in the
lane.
WARNING
• The operation of the LKA sys-
tem can be canceled or not
work properly according to
road condition and surround-
ings. Always be cautious
when driving.
• Do not disassemble the LKA
system camera temporarily to
tint the window or attach any
types of coatings and acces-
sories. If you disassemble the
camera and assemble it again,
take your vehicle to an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked for
calibration.
• When you replace the wind-
shield glass, LKA system
camera or related parts of the
steering wheel, take your
vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the
system checked for calibra-
tion.
5-101
Driving your vehicle
5
LKA System Operation
To activate/deactivate the LKA sys-
tem:
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, press the LKA system
switch located on the instrument
panel on the left hand side of the
steering wheel. The indicator in the
cluster display will initially illuminate
white.This indicates the LKA system
is in the READY but NOT ENABLED
state.
If you press the LKA button again,
the indicator on the switch and clus-
ter display will go off.
• Always have your hands on the
steering wheel while the LKA
system is activated. Also, when
Active LKA is selected from the
User Settings mode and if you
continue to drive with your
hands off the steering wheel
after the "Keep hands on steer-
ing wheel" warning message
appears, the system will stop
controlling the steering wheel.
However, if the driver has their
hands on the steering wheel
again, the system will start con-
trolling the steering wheel.
• The steering wheel is not con-
tinuously controlled so if the
vehicle speed is at a higher
speed when leaving a lane the
vehicle may not be able to be
controlled by the system. The
driver must always follow the
speed limit when using the
system.
• If you attach objects to the
steering wheel, the system
may not assist steering or the
hands off alarm may not work
properly.When you tow a trail-
er, make sure that you turn off
the LKA system.
• The system helps detect lane
markers and controls the
steering wheel by a camera,
therefore, if the lane markers
are hard to detect, the system
may not work properly.
Please refer to "Limitations of
the system".
• Do not remove or damage the
related parts of LKA system.
• You may not hear a warning
sound of LKA system because
of excessive audio sound.
• If any other warning sound
such as seat belt warning
chime is already generated,
the Lane Keeping Assist
(LKA) system warning may
not sound.
• Do not place objects on the
dashboard that reflects light
such as mirrors, white paper,
etc.The system may malfunc-
tion if the sunlight is reflected.
OAD058126N
5-102
Driving your vehicle
Note that the vehicle
speed must be at least
approximately 40 mph
(64 km/h) to ENABLE the
LKA system. The indicator in the
cluster display will illuminate green.
The color of indicator will change
depending on the condition of LKA
system.
- White : Sensor does not detect
lane markers or vehicle
speed is under 40 mph (64
km/h).
- Green : Sensor detects lane mark-
ers and the system is able
to control vehicle steering.
Information
If the indicator (white) is activated
from the previous ignition cycle, the
system will turn ON without any addi-
tional control. If you press the LKA
switch again, the indicator on the clus-
ter goes off.
LKA system activation
• To see the LKA system screen on
the LCD display in the cluster,
select Assist mode ( ).For more
details, refer to "LCD Display
Modes" in chapter 3.
i
OAD058127N
The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)
system is a system to help pre-
vent the driver from leaving the
lane. However,the driver should
not solely rely on the system
but always check the road con-
ditions when driving.
WARNING
5-103
Driving your vehicle
5
• If vehicle speed is over 40 mph (64
km/h) and the system detects lane
markers, the color changes from
gray to white.
• Both lane markers must be detect-
ed for the system to fully activate.
• If your vehicle departs from the
projected lane in front of you, the
LKA system operates as follows:
1.A visual warning appears on the
cluster LCD display. Either the left
lane marker or the right lane mark-
er in the cluster LCD display will
blink depending on which direction
the vehicle is veering.Also, a warn-
ing sound will be heard.
2.The LKA system will control the
vehicle's steering to prevent the
vehicle from crossing the lane
maker in below conditions.
- Vehicle speed is over 40 mph (64
km/h)
- The system detects both lane
markers
- When driving, the vehicle is
located between both lanes nor-
mally.
- The steering wheel is not turned
suddenly.
When lanes are detected and all the
conditions to activate the LKA sys-
tem are satisfied, a LKA system indi-
cator light will change from white to
green. This indicates that the LKA
system is in the ENABLED state and
the steering wheel will be able to be
controlled.
■ Lane marker undetected
■ Lane marker detected
OAD058127N/OAD058128N
■ Left lane marker ■ Right lane marker
OAD058129N/OAD058130N
5-104
Driving your vehicle
Warning Light and Message
Keep hands on steering wheel
If the driver takes their hands off the
steering wheel for several seconds
while the LKA system is activated,
the system will warn the driver.
Information
If the steering wheel is held very light-
ly, the message may still appear
because the LKA system may not rec-
ognize that the driver has their hands
on the wheel.
Driver's grasp not detected.
LKA system will be disabled
temporarily
If the driver still does not have their
hands on the steering wheel after the
message "Keep hands on steering
wheel", the system will not control
the steering wheel and warn the driv-
er only when the driver crosses the
lane markers.
However, if the driver has their hands
on the steering wheel again, the sys-
tem will start controlling the steering
wheel.
This warning message is available
when Active LKA is selected from the
User Settings mode.
i
The warning message may
appear late according to road
conditions. Therefore, always
have your hands on the steering
wheel while driving.
WARNING
OIK057120N
OAD058131N
5-105
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
• Even though the steering is assisted
by the system, the driver can still
steer to control the steering wheel.
• The steering wheel may feel heavier
when the steering wheel is assisted
by the system than when it is not.
Check Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)
system
If there is a problem with the system
a message will appear for a few sec-
onds. If the problem continues the
LKA system failure indicator will illu-
minate.
LKA system failure indicator
The LKA system failure
indicator (yellow) will illu-
minate if the LKA system
is not working properly.
Have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
When there is a problem with the
system do one of the following:
• Turn the system on after turning
the engine off and on again.
• Check if the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• Check if the system is affected by
the weather. (ex: fog, heavy rain,
etc.)
• Check if there is foreign matter on
the camera lens.
If the problem is not solved, have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
• The driver is responsible for
accurate steering.
• Turn off the system in below
situations.
- In bad weather
- In bad road condition
- When the steering wheel
needs to be controlled by the
driver frequently.
- When towing a vehicle or
trailer
WARNING
OIK057121N/OIK057122N
■ Type A ■ Type B
5-106
Driving your vehicle
The LKA system will not be in the
ENABLED state and/or the steering
wheel will not be assisted when:
• The turn signal is turned on before
changing a lane. If you change
lanes without the turn signal on,
the steering wheel might be con-
trolled.
• The vehicle is not driven in the mid-
dle of the lane when the system is
turned on or right after changing a
lane.
• ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
or VSM (Vehicle Stability
Management) is activated.
• The vehicle is driven on a sharp
curve.
• Vehicle speed is below 40 mph (64
km/h) and over 110 mph (177
km/h).
• The vehicle makes sharp lane
changes.
• The vehicle brakes suddenly.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• There are more than two lane
markers on the road. (e.g. con-
struction area)
• Only one side of the lane marker is
detected.
• Radius of a curve is too small.
• The vehicle is driven on a steep
incline.
• The steering wheel is turned sud-
denly.
• Driving on a steep slope or hill.
Limitations of the System
The LKA system may operate pre-
maturely even if the vehicle does not
depart from the intended lane, OR,
the LKA system may not warn you if
the vehicle leaves the intended lane
under the following circumstances:
When the lane and road condi-
tions are poor
• It is difficult to distinguish the lane
marker from the road because the
lane marker is covered with dust or
sand.
• It is difficult to distinguish the color
of the lane marker from the road.
• There are markings on the road
surface that look like a lane marker
that is inadvertently being detected
by the camera.
• The lane marker is indistinct or
damaged.
• The lane marker is merged or
divided. (e.g. tollgate)
• The lane number increases or
decreases or the lane marker are
crossing complicatedly.
5-107
Driving your vehicle
5
• There are more than two lane
markers on the road in front of you.
• The lane marker is very thick or
thin.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• The lane marker ahead is not visi-
ble due to rain, snow, water on the
road, damaged or stained road
surface, or other factors.
• The shadow is on the lane marker
by a median strip, trees, guardrail,
noise barriers, etc.
• The lane markers are complicated
or a structure substitutes for the
lines such as a construction area.
• There are crosswalk signs or other
symbols on the road.
• The lane marker in a tunnel is
stained with oil, etc.
• The lane suddenly disappears
such as at the intersection.
When external condition is inter-
vened
• The brightness outside changes
suddenly such as when entering or
exiting a tunnel, or when passing
under a bridge.
• The brightness outside is too low
such as when the headlamps are
not on at night or the vehicle is
going through a tunnel.
• There is a boundary structure in
the roadway such as a concrete
barrier, guardrail and reflector post
that is inadvertently being detected
by the camera.
• When light coming from a street
light or an oncoming vehicle is
reflected on a wet road surface
such as a puddle in the road.
• The field of view in front is
obstructed by sun glare.
• There is not enough distance
between you and the vehicle in
front to be able to detect the lane
marker or the vehicle ahead is driv-
ing on the lane marker.
• Driving on a steep grade, over a
hill, or when driving on a curved
road.
• The adverse road conditions cause
excessive vehicle vibrations while
driving.
• The surrounding of the inside rear
view mirror temperature is high
due to direct sunlight, etc.
5-108
Driving your vehicle
When front visibility is poor
• The windshield or the camera lens
is blocked with dirt or debris.
• The windshield glass is fogged up;
a clear view of the road is obstruct-
ed.
• Placing objects on the dashboard,
etc.
• The sensor cannot detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or snow.
LKA System Function Change
The driver can change LKA to Lane
Departure Warning from the LCD
display. Go to the 'User Settings →
Driver Assistance → Lane Safety →
Active LKA/Lane Keeping Assist
/Lane Departure Warning/Off'.
Active LKA
The Active LKA mode provides more
frequent steering wheel control in
comparison with the Standard LKA
mode.Active LKA can reduce the dri-
ver's fatigue to assist the steering for
maintaining the vehicle in the middle
of the lane.
Standard LKA
This mode guides the driver to help
keep the vehicle within the lanes. It
rarely controls the steering wheel,
when the vehicle drives well inside
the lanes. However, it starts to con-
trol the steering wheel, when the
vehicle is about to deviate out of the
lane.
Lane Departure Warning
LDW system alerts the driver with a
visual warning and a warning alarm
when the system detects the vehicle
departing the lane. The steering
wheel will not be controlled.
Off
If you select "Off", the LKA system is
deactivated.
The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)
system is a system to help pre-
vent the driver from leaving the
lane. However,the driver should
not solely rely on the system
but always take the necessary
actions for safe driving prac-
tices.
WARNING
5-109
Driving your vehicle
5
The Driver Attention Warning (DAW)
system is designed as a safety fea-
ture to help reduce drowsy or inat-
tentive driving. The DAW displays a
bar graph that is intended to repre-
sent the driver's attention and fatigue
level while driving.
System Setting and Activation
System setting
• To turn ON the Driver Attention
Warning (DAW) system, turn on
the engine, and then select 'User
Settings → Driver Assistance →
Driver Attention Warning → High
sensitivity/Normal sensitivity/Off'
• The driver can select the mode of
the Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system.
- High sensitivity : The Driver
Attention Warning system helps
alert the driver of his/her fatigue
level or inattentive driving prac-
tices faster than Normal mode.
- Normal sensitivity : The Driver
Attention Warning system helps
alert the driver of his/her fatigue
level or inattentive driving prac-
tices.
- Off : The Driver Attention Warning
system is deactivated.
• The set-up of the Driver Attention
Warning system will be main-
tained, as selected, when the
engine is re-started.
Driver's attention level
DDRRIIVVEERR AATTTTEENNTTIIOONN WWAARRNNIINNGG ((DDAAWW)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OIK057129N
■ System off
OIK057130N
■ Attentive driving
5-110
Driving your vehicle
• The driver can monitor their driving
conditions on the LCD display.
The DAW screen will appear when
you select the Assist mode tab ( )
on the LCD display if the system is
activated.For more details,refer to
"LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.
• The driver's attention level is dis-
played on the scale of 1 to 5. The
lower the number is, the more inat-
tentive the driver is.
• The number decreases when the
driver does not take a break for a
certain period of time.
• The number increases when the
driver attentively drives for a cer-
tain period of time.
• When the driver turns on the sys-
tem while driving, it displays 'Last
Break time' and level.
Take a break
• The "Consider taking a break"
message appears on the LCD dis-
play and a warning sounds in order
to suggest the driver to take a
break, when the driver’s attention
level is below 1.
• The Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system does not suggest
the driver to take a break, when the
total driving time is shorter than 10
minutes.
Resetting the System
• The last break time is set to 00:00
and the driver's attention level is
set to 5 (very attentive) when the
driver resets the Driver Attention
Warning (DAW) system.
• The Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system resets in the follow-
ing situations.
- The engine is turned OFF.
- The driver unfastens the seat
belt and then opens the driver's
door.
- The vehicle is stopped for more
than 10 minutes.
• The Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system operates again,
when the driver restarts driving.
OIK057132L
OIK057131N
■ Inattentive driving
While other beeps such as the
seat belt warning sound are in
operation and override the DAW
alarming system, DAW beeps
may not occur.
CAUTION
5-111
Driving your vehicle
5
System Standby
The Driver Attention Warning (DAW)
system enters the ready status and
displays the 'Standby' screen in the
following situations.
- The camera does not detect the
lanes.
- Driving speed remains under 40
mph (64 km/h) or over 110 mph
(177 km/h).
System Malfunction
Check Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system
When the warning message
appears, the system is not working
properly. In this case, have the vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• The Driver Attention Warning
system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices, but a
convenience function only. It
is the responsibility of the
driver to always drive cau-
tiously to prevent unexpected
and sudden situations from
occurring. Pay attention to the
road conditions at all times.
• The system may suggest a
break according to the dri-
ver's driving pattern or habits
even if the driver doesn't feel
fatigue.
• The driver, who feels fatigued,
should take a break, even
though there is no break sug-
gestion by the Driver Attention
Warning system.
WARNING
OIK057133N OIK057134N
5-112
Driving your vehicle
The Driver Attention Warning sys-
tem utilizes the camera sensor on
the front windshield for its opera-
tion.To keep the camera sensor in
the best condition, you should
observe the followings:
• Do not disassemble the camera
temporarily to tint the window or
to attach any types of coatings
and accessories. If you disas-
semble a camera and assemble
it again, take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked for cal-
ibration.
• NEVER install any accessories
or stickers on the front wind-
shield, nor tint the front wind-
shield.
• NEVER locate any reflective
objects (i.e. white paper, mirror)
over the dashboard. Any light
reflection may cause a malfunc-
tion of the Driver Attention Alert
(DAW) system.
• Pay extreme caution to keep the
camera sensor out of water.
NOTICE
The Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system may not properly
operate with limited alerting in
the following situations:
• The lane detection perform-
ance is limited. (For more
details, refer to "Lane Keeping
Assist (LKA) system" in this
chapter.)
• The vehicle is violently driven
or is abruptly turned for obsta-
cle avoidance (e.g. construc-
tion area, other vehicles, fallen
objects, bumpy road).
• Forward drivability of the vehi-
cle is severely undermined
(possibly due to wide variation
in tire pressures, uneven tire
wear-out, toe-in/toe-out align-
ment).
• The vehicle drives on a curvy
road.
• The vehicle drives on a bumpy
road.
• The vehicle drives through a
windy area.
• The vehicle is controlled by the
following driving assist sys-
tems:
- Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)
System
- Forward Collision-Avoidance
Assist (FCA) System
- Blind-Spot Collision Warning
(BCW)
- Smart Cruise Control (SCC)
System
CAUTION
Playing the vehicle audio sys-
tem at high volume may offset
the Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system warning sounds.
CAUTION
5-113
Driving your vehicle
5
Cruise Control Operation
1. Cruise indicator
2. SET indicator (Type A) /
Set speed (Type B)
The Cruise Control system allows
you to drive at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h) without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
During cruise-speed driving of a
manual transmission vehicle, do
not shift into neutral without
depressing the clutch pedal, since
the engine will be overrevved. If
this happens, depress the clutch
pedal or press the cruise control
ON/OFF button.
NOTICE
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
• Do not use when:
- Driving in heavy traffic or
when traffic conditions make
it difficult to drive at a con-
stant speed
- Driving on rainy, icy, or
snow-covered roads
- Driving on hilly or windy
roads
- Driving in windy areas
- Driving with limited view
(possibly due to bad weather
such as fog, snow, rain and
sandstorm)
Take the following precautions:
• Always set the vehicle speed
under the speed limit.
• If the Cruise Control is left on,
(cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster is illumi-
nated) the Cruise Control can
be activated unintentionally.
Keep the Cruise Control sys-
tem off (cruise indicator light
OFF) when the Cruise Control
is not in use, to avoid inadver-
tently setting a speed.
• Use the Cruise Control sys-
tem only when traveling on
open highways in good
weather.
• Do not use the Cruise Control
when it may be unsafe to keep
the vehicle at a constant
speed.
WARNING
OAD048594N/OIK057157N
■ Type A ■ Type B
5-114
Driving your vehicle
Information
• During normal cruise control opera-
tion, when the SET switch is activat-
ed or reactivated after applying the
brakes, the cruise control will ener-
gize after approximately 3 seconds.
This delay is normal.
• Before activating the cruise control
function, the system will check to
verify that the brake switch is oper-
ating normally. Depress the brake
pedal at least once after turning ON
the ignition or starting the engine.
To set Cruise Control speed
1. Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The cruise indicator will illumi-
nate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Information
- Manual trans-
mission
For manual transmission vehicles, you
should depress the brake pedal at
least once to set the cruise control
after starting the engine.
3. Push the toggle switch down
(SET-), and release it. The SET
indicator or set speed on the LCD
display will illuminate.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
Information
On a steep slope, the vehicle may
slightly slow down or speed up, while
driving uphill or downhill.
i
i
i
OAD058135N
OAD058134N
5-115
Driving your vehicle
5
To increase Cruise Control
speed
• Push the toggle switch up (RES+)
and hold it to set the desired
speed. The speed will increase by
5 mph (10 km/h).
• Push the toggle switch up (RES+)
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will increase 1.0
mph (1.0 km/h) each time the tog-
gle switch is operated in this man-
ner.
• Depress the accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle attains the
desired speed, push the toggle
switch down (SET-).
To decrease Cruise Control
speed
• Push the toggle switch down
(SET-) and hold it to set the
desired speed. The speed will
decrease by 5 mph (10 km/h).
• Push the toggle switch down (SET-)
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will decrease 1.0
mph (1.0 km/h) each time the toggle
switch is operated in this manner.
• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired
speed, push the toggle switch
down (SET-).
To temporarily accelerate with
the Cruise Control ON
Depress the accelerator pedal.When
you take your foot off the accelerator,
the vehicle will return to the previ-
ously set speed.
If you push the toggle switch down
(SET-) at the increased speed, the
Cruise Control will maintain the
increased speed.
OAD058135NOAD058136N
5-116
Driving your vehicle
Cruise Control will be canceled
when:
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Depressing the clutch pedal.
(for manual transmission vehicle)
• Pressing the CANCEL button
located on the steering wheel.
• Pressing the CRUISE button. Both
the cruise indicator and the SET
indicator or set speed on the LCD
display will turn OFF.
• Moving the shift lever into N
(Neutral).(for automatic transmis-
sion/dual clutch transmission vehi-
cle)
• Decreasing the vehicle speed to
less than approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h).
• The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is operating.
Information
Each of the above actions will cancel
Cruise Control operation (the set
speed on the LCD display in the
instrument cluster will go off), but only
pressing the CRUISE button will turn
the system off. If you wish to resume
Cruise Control operation, push the
toggle switch up (RES+) located on
your steering wheel. You will return to
your previously preset speed, unless
the system was turned off using the
CRUISE button.
To resume preset Cruising
speed
Push the toggle switch up (RES+). If
the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (30
km/h), the vehicle will resume the
preset speed.
i
OAD058137N OAD058136N
5-117
Driving your vehicle
5
To turn Cruise Control off
• Press the CRUISE button (the
cruise indicator light will go off).
• Turn the vehicle OFF.
OAD058134N
5-118
Driving your vehicle
1. Cruise indicator
2. Set speed
3. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
To see the SCC screen on the LCD
display in the cluster, select Assist
mode ( ). For more details, refer to
"LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.
The Smart Cruise Control system
allows you to program the vehicle to
maintain constant speed and mini-
mum distance between the vehicle
ahead.
The Smart Cruise Control system
will automatically adjust your vehicle
speed to maintain your programmed
speed and following distance without
requiring you to depress the acceler-
ator or brake pedals.
SSMMAARRTT CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OAD058138N
For your safety, please read the
owner's manual before using the
Smart Cruise Control system.
WARNING
The Smart Cruise Control sys-
tem is not a substitute for safe
driving practices, but a conven-
ience function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the speed and
distance to the vehicle ahead.
WARNING
Take the following precautions :
• Always set the vehicle speed
under the speed limit.
• If the Smart Cruise Control is
left on, (cruise indicator light
in the instrument cluster is
illuminated) the Smart Cruise
Control can be activated unin-
tentionally. Keep the Smart
Cruise Control system off
(cruise indicator light OFF)
when the Smart Cruise
Control is not in use, to avoid
inadvertently setting a speed.
• Use the Smart Cruise Control
system only when traveling
on open highways in good
weather.
• Do not use the Smart Cruise
Control when it may not be
safe to keep the vehicle at a
constant speed.
• Do not use when:
- Driving in heavy traffic or
when traffic conditions make
it difficult to drive at a con-
stant speed
WARNING
5-119
Driving your vehicle
5
Smart Cruise Control Switch
CRUISE: Turns cruise control sys-
tem on or off.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con-
trol speed.
: Sets vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance.
CANCEL: Cancels cruise control
operation.
- Driving on rainy, icy, or
snow-covered roads
- Driving on a steep downhill
or uphill
- Driving in windy areas
- Driving in parking lots
- Driving near crash barriers
- Driving on a sharp curve
- Driving with limited view
(possibly due to bad weath-
er, such as fog, snow, rain or
sandstorm)
- The vehicle's sensing ability
decreases due to vehicle
modification, resulting in a
level difference of the vehi-
cle's front and rear
• Unexpected situations may
lead to possible accidents.
Pay attention continuously to
road conditions and driving
even when the smart cruise
control system is being oper-
ated.
• The SCC is only a supplemen-
tal system for the driver’s con-
venience. The driver should
hold the responsibility to con-
trol the vehicle operation. Do
not solely depend on the SCC
system.
OAD058139N
5-120
Driving your vehicle
Smart Cruise Control Speed
To set Smart Cruise Control
speed
1. Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The cruise indicator will illumi-
nate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
The Smart Cruise Control speed
can be set between 5-110 mph
(10-180 km/h).
However, 20 mph (30 km/h) is set
when the vehicle speed is 5-20
mph (10-30 km/h).
3. Push the toggle switch down
(SET-). The Set Speed and
Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance on the
LCD display will illuminate.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
The desired speed will automati-
cally be maintained.
If there is a vehicle in front of you, the
speed may decrease to maintain the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
Information
• Vehicle speed may decrease on an
upward slope and increase on a
downward slope.
• When vehicle speed is under 5 mph
(10 km/h), the Smart Cruise Control
is canceled. The driver must adjust
the vehicle speed by depressing the
accelerator or brake pedal accord-
ing to the road condition ahead and
driving condition.
i
OAD058135N
OAD058134N
5-121
Driving your vehicle
5
To increase Smart Cruise
Control set speed
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the toggle switch up (RES+),
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will increase by
1 mph (1 km/h) each time you
move the toggle switch up in this
manner.
• Push the toggle switch up (RES+),
and hold it.Your vehicle set speed
will increase by 5 mph (10 km/h).
Release the toggle switch at the
speed you want.
To decrease the Smart Cruise
Control set speed
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the toggle switch down
(SET-), and release it immediately.
The cruising speed will decrease
by 1 mph (1 km/h) each time you
move the toggle switch down in
this manner.
• Push the toggle switch down
(SET-), and hold it.Your vehicle set
speed will decrease by 5 mph (10
km/h). Release the toggle switch
at the speed you want.
• You can set the speed to 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Check the driving condition
before using the toggle switch.
Driving speed sharply increas-
es, when you push up and hold
the toggle switch.
CAUTION
OAD058135NOAD058136N
5-122
Driving your vehicle
To temporarily accelerate with
the Smart Cruise Control on
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the Smart Cruise Control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with Smart Cruise Control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If you push the toggle switch down
(SET-) at increased speed, the cruis-
ing speed will be set again pedal.
Smart Cruise Control set speed
will be temporarily canceled
when:
Canceled manually
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Pushing the CANCEL button locat-
ed on the steering wheel.
The Smart Cruise Control turns off
temporarily when the Set Speed and
Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance indicator
on the LCD display turns off.
The cruise indicator is illuminated
continuously.
Canceled automatically
• The driver's door is opened.
• The vehicle is shifted to N (Neutral),
R (Reverse) or P (Park).
• The vehicle speed is over 120 mph
(190 km/h).
• The vehicle stops on a steep incline.
• The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), TCS (Traction Control
System) or ABS is operating.
• The ESC is turned off.
• The sensor or the cover is dirty or
blocked with foreign matter.
• The vehicle is stopped for a certain
period of time.
• The vehicle stops and goes repeat-
edly for a long period of time.
• The accelerator pedal is continu-
ously depressed for a long period
of time.
• The engine performance is abnor-
mal.
• Engine rpm is in the red zone.
OAD058137N
Be careful when accelerating
temporarily, because the speed
is not controlled automatically
at this time even if there is a
vehicle in front of you.
CAUTION
5-123
Driving your vehicle
5
• The driver starts driving by pushing
the toggle switch up (RES+)/down
(SET-) or depressing the accelera-
tor pedal, after the vehicle is
stopped by the Smart Cruise
Control system with no other vehi-
cle ahead.
• The driver starts driving by pushing
the toggle switch up (RES+)/down
(SET-) or depressing the accelera-
tor pedal, after stopping the vehicle
with a vehicle stopped far away in
front.
• The Forward Collision-Avoidance
Assist (FCA) is activated.
Each of these actions will cancel the
Smart Cruise Control operation. The
Set Speed and Vehicle-to-Vehicle
Distance on the LCD display will go
off.
In a condition the Smart Cruise
Control is cancelled automatically,
the Smart Cruise Control will not
resume even though the RES+ or
SET- toggle switch is pushed.
Information
If the Smart Cruise Control is can-
celed by other than the reasons men-
tioned, have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Smart Cruise Control canceled
If the system is cancelled, the warn-
ing chime will sound and a message
will appear for a few seconds.
You must adjust the vehicle speed by
depressing the accelerator or brake
pedal according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition.
Always check the road conditions.
Do not rely on the warning chime.
To resume Smart Cruise Control
set speed
If any method other than the cruise
toggle switch was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the cruising speed will
automatically resume when you
push the toggle switch up (RES+) or
down (SET-).
If you push the toggle switch up
(RES+), the speed will resume to the
recently set speed. However, if the
vehicle speed is between 5 mph (10
km/h) and 20 mph (30 km/h), it will
resume when there is a vehicle in
front of your vehicle.
i
OIK057096N
Always check the road condi-
tions when you push the toggle
switch up (RES+) to resume
speed.
CAUTION
5-124
Driving your vehicle
To turn Cruise Control off
• Push the CRUISE button (the
cruise indicator light will go off).
If you wish not to use the cruise
control system, always turn the
system off by pushing the CRUISE
button.
Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-
to-Vehicle Distance
To set Vehicle-to-Vehicle
Distance
When the Smart Cruise Control sys-
tem is ON, you can set and maintain
the distance from the vehicle ahead
of you without pressing the accelera-
tor or brake pedal.
Each time the button is pressed, the
vehicle to vehicle distance changes
as follows:
For example, if you drive at 56 mph
(90 km/h), the distance is maintained
as follows:
Distance 4 - approximately 172 feet
Distance 3 - approximately 130 feet
Distance 2 - approximately 106 feet
Distance 1 - approximately 82 feet
Information
The distance is set to the last set dis-
tance when the system is used for the
first time after starting the engine.
i
OAD058140N
OAD058134N
Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2
Distance 1
5-125
Driving your vehicle
5
When the lane ahead is clear:
The vehicle speed will maintain the
set speed.
When there is a vehicle ahead
of you in your lane:
• Your vehicle speed will slow down
or speed up to maintain the select-
ed distance.
• If the vehicle ahead speeds up,
your vehicle will travel at a steady
cruising speed after accelerating to
the set speed.
When using the Smart Cruise
Control system:
• The warning chime sounds
and the Vehicle-to Vehicle
Distance indicator blinks if
the vehicle is unable to main-
tain the selected distance
from the vehicle ahead.
• If the warning chime sounds,
depress the brake pedal to
actively adjust the vehicle
speed, and the distance to the
vehicle ahead.
WARNING
OAD058141N
Distance 4 Distance 3
Distance 1
Distance 2
OAD058141N/OAD058138N/OAD058142N/OAD058143N
OAD058144N
5-126
Driving your vehicle
Sensor to Detect Distance to
the Vehicle Ahead
The Smart Cruise Control uses a
sensor to detect distance to the vehi-
cle ahead.
If the sensor is covered with dirt or
other foreign matter, the vehicle to
vehicle distance control may not
operate correctly.
Always keep the sensor clean.
If the vehicle ahead (vehicle
speed: less than 20 mph (30
km/h)) disappears to the next
lane, the warning chime will
sound and a message "Watch
for surrounding vehicles" will
appear. Adjust your vehicle
speed for vehicles or objects
that can suddenly appear in
front of you by depressing the
brake pedal.
Always pay attention to the road
condition ahead.
CAUTION
OAD058145N
• Even if the warning chime is
not activated, always pay
attention to the driving condi-
tions to prevent dangerous
situations from occurring.
• Playing the vehicle audio sys-
tem at high volume may offset
the system warning sounds.
OAD058123
5-127
Driving your vehicle
5
Warning message
Smart Cruise Control disabled.
Radar blocked
When the sensor lens cover is
blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the
Smart Cruise Control system opera-
tion may stop temporarily. If this
occurs, a warning message will
appear on the LCD display. Remove
any dirt, snow, or debris and clean
the radar sensor lens cover before
operating the Smart Cruise Control
system. The Smart Cruise Control
system may not properly activate, if
the radar is totally contaminated, or if
any substance is not detected after
turning on the engine (e.g. in an
open terrain).
Information
For the SCC operation is temporarily
stopped if the radar is blocked, but
you wish to use conventional cruise
control mode (speed only control func-
tion), you must convert to the cruise
control mode (refer to "To convert to
Cruise Control mode" in the following
page).
i
• Do not apply license plate
frame or foreign objects such
as a bumper sticker or a
bumper guard near the radar
sensor. Doing so may
adversely affect the sensing
performance of the radar.
• Always keep the radar sensor
and lens cover clean and free
of dirt and debris.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash
the vehicle.Do not spray pres-
surized water directly on the
sensor or sensor cover.
CAUTION
• Be careful not to apply unnec-
essary force on the radar sen-
sor or sensor cover.If the sen-
sor is forcibly moved out of
proper alignment, the Smart
Cruise Control system may
not operate correctly. In this
case, a warning message may
not be displayed. Have the
vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the front bumper becomes
damaged in the area around
the radar sensor, the Smart
Cruise Control System may
not operate properly. Have the
vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Use only genuine HYUNDAI
parts to repair or replace a
damaged sensor or sensor
cover. Do not apply paint to
the sensor cover.
OIK057108L
5-128
Driving your vehicle
Check Smart Cruise Control System
The message will appear when the
vehicle to vehicle distance control
system is not functioning normally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-
tem checked.
To Adjust the Sensitivity of
Smart Cruise Control
The sensitivity of vehicle speed
when following the front vehicle to
maintain the set distance can be
adjusted. Go to the 'User Settings →
Driver Assistance → SCC Reaction
→ Fast/Normal/Slow' on the LCD
display. You may select one of the
three stages you prefer.
• Fast:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is faster than normal speed.
• Normal:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is normal.
• Slow:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is slower than normal speed.
Information
The last selected speed sensitivity of
the smart cruise control is remained in
the system.
i
OIK057097N
OIK057109L/OIK057110L
■ Type A ■ Type B
5-129
Driving your vehicle
5
To Convert to Cruise Control
Mode
The driver may choose to switch to
use the conventional Cruise Control
mode (speed only control function)
by following these steps:
1. Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The cruise ( ) indi-
cator will illuminate.
2. Push and hold the Vehicle-to-
Vehicle Distance button for more
than 2 seconds.
3. Choose between "Smart Cruise
Control" and "Cruise Control".
When the system is canceled using
the CRUISE button or the CRUISE
button is used after the engine is
turned on, the Smart Cruise Control
mode will turn on.
Limitations of the System
The Smart Cruise Control system
may have limits to its ability to detect
distance to the vehicle ahead due to
road and traffic conditions.
On curves
• The Smart Cruise Control system
may not detect a moving vehicle in
your lane, and then your vehicle
could accelerate to the set speed.
Also, the vehicle speed will
decrease when the vehicle ahead
is recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on curves and apply the brakes or
accelerator pedal if necessary.
When using the conventional
Cruise Control mode, you must
manually adjust the distance to
other vehicles by depressing
the brake pedal. The system
does not automatically adjust
the distance to vehicles in front
of you.
WARNING
OAD058165L
5-130
Driving your vehicle
Your vehicle speed can be reduced
due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane.
Apply the accelerator pedal and
select the appropriate set speed.
Check to be sure that the road con-
ditions permit safe operation of the
Smart Cruise Control.
On inclines
• During uphill or downhill driving,
the Smart Cruise Control system
may not detect a moving vehicle in
your lane, and cause your vehicle
to accelerate to the set speed.
Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly
decrease when the vehicle ahead
is recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on inclines and apply the brake or
accelerator pedal if necessary.
Lane changing
• A vehicle which moves into your
lane from an adjacent lane cannot
be recognized by the sensor until it
is in the sensor's detection range.
• The radar may not detect immedi-
ately when a vehicle cuts in sud-
denly. Always pay attention to the
traffic, road and driving conditions.
• If a slower vehicle moves into your
lane, your speed may decrease to
maintain the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
• If a faster vehicle which moves into
your lane, your vehicle will acceler-
ate to the set speed.
OAD058124N
OAD058166L
OAD058167L
5-131
Driving your vehicle
5
Detecting vehicles
Some vehicles in your lane cannot
be recognized by the sensor:
- Narrow vehicles such as motorcy-
cles or bicycles
- Vehicles offset to one side
- Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-
decelerating vehicles
- Stopped vehicles
- Vehicles with small rear profile
such as trailers with no loads
A vehicle ahead cannot be recog-
nized correctly by the sensor if any of
following occurs:
- When the vehicle is pointing
upwards due to overloading in the
luggage compartment
- While the steering wheel is operat-
ing
- When driving to one side of the
lane
- When driving on narrow lanes or
on curves
Apply the brake or accelerator pedal
if necessary.
• Your vehicle may accelerate when
a vehicle ahead of you disappears.
• When you are warned that the
vehicle ahead of you is not detect-
ed, drive with caution.
OAD058174N
OAD058173N
5-132
Driving your vehicle
• When driving in stop-and-go traffic,
and a stopped vehicle in front of
you merges out of the lane, the
system may not immediately
detect the new vehicle that is now
in front of you. In this case, you
must maintain a safe braking dis-
tance, and if necessary, depress
the brake pedal to reduce your
driving speed in order to maintain a
safe distance.
• Always look out for pedestrians
when your vehicle is maintaining a
distance with the vehicle ahead.
• Always be cautious for vehicles
with higher height or vehicles car-
rying loads that sticks out from the
back of the vehicle.
OAE056110OAD058168L OAD058125N
When using the Smart Cruise
Control take the following pre-
cautions:
• If an emergency stop is nec-
essary, you must apply the
brakes.The vehicle cannot be
stopped at every emergency
situation by using the Smart
Cruise Control system.
WARNING
5-133
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
The Smart Cruise Control system
may not operate temporarily due to:
• Electrical interference
• Modifying the suspension
• Differences of tire abrasion or tire
pressure
• Installing different type of tires
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the device.
Information
Radio frequency radiation exposure
information:
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed
and operated with minimum distance
of 8 in. (20 cm) between the radiator
(antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-locat-
ed or operating in conjunction with
any other antenna or transmitter.
i
i
i
• Keep a safe distance accord-
ing to road conditions and
vehicle speed. If the vehicle to
vehicle distance is too close
during a high-speed driving, a
serious collision may result.
• Always maintain sufficient
braking distance and deceler-
ate your vehicle by applying
the brakes if necessary.
• The Smart Cruise Control sys-
tem cannot recognize a
stopped vehicle, pedestrians or
an oncoming vehicle. Always
look ahead cautiously to pre-
vent unexpected and sudden
situations from occurring.
• Vehicles moving in front of
you with a frequent lane
change may cause a delay in
the system's reaction or may
cause the system to react to a
vehicle actually in an adjacent
lane. Always drive cautiously
to prevent unexpected and
sudden situations from occur-
ring.
• Always be aware of the select-
ed speed and vehicle to vehi-
cle distance. The driver
should not solely rely on the
system but always pay atten-
tion to driving conditions and
control your vehicle speed.
• The Smart Cruise Control sys-
tem may not recognize com-
plex driving situations so
always pay attention to driv-
ing conditions and control
your vehicle speed.
5-134
Driving your vehicle
Hazardous Driving Conditions
When hazardous driving elements
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud and sand, take the
below suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and keep a longer
braking distance.
• Avoid abrupt braking or steering.
• When your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud, or sand, use second gear.
Accelerate slowly to avoid unnec-
essary wheel spin.
• Put sand, rock salt, tire chains or
other non-slip materials under the
wheels to provide additional trac-
tion while the vehicle becomes
stuck in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the Vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and a for-
ward gear.
Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and
do not race the engine.
To prevent transmission wear, wait
until the wheels stop spinning before
shifting gears. Release the accelera-
tor pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal while
the transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking
motion that may free the vehicle.
Information
The ESC system must be turned OFF
before rocking the vehicle.
i
SSPPEECCIIAALL DDRRIIVVIINNGG CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNSS
Downshifting with an automatic
transmission/dual clutch trans-
mission while driving on slip-
pery surfaces can cause an
accident.The sudden change in
tire speed could cause the tires
to skid. Be careful when down-
shifting on slippery surfaces.
WARNING
If the vehicle is stuck and
excessive wheel spin occurs,
the temperature in the tires can
increase very quickly. If the tires
become damaged, a tire blow
out or tire explosion can occur.
This condition is dangerous -
you and others may be injured.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle.
If you attempt to free the vehi-
cle, the vehicle can overheat
quickly, possibly causing an
engine compartment fire or
other damage.Try to avoid spin-
ning the wheels as much as
possible to prevent overheating
of either the tires or the engine.
DO NOT allow the vehicle to
spin the wheels above 35 mph
(56 km/h).
WARNING
5-135
Driving your vehicle
5
If you are still stuck after rocking
the vehicle a few times, have the
vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle
to avoid engine overheating, pos-
sible damage to the transmission,
and tire damage. See "Towing" in
chapter 6.
Smooth Cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration.
Driving at Night
Night driving presents more hazards
than driving in the daylight. Here are
some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's head-
lamps.
• Keep your headlamps clean and
properly aimed. Dirty or improperly
aimed headlamps will make it
much more difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lamps of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the Rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous. Here are a few things to
consider when driving in the rain or
on slick pavement:
• Slow down and allow extra follow-
ing distance. A heavy rainfall
makes it harder to see and increas-
es the distance needed to stop
your vehicle.
• Turn OFF your Cruise Control.
• Replace your windshield wiper
blades when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the
windshield.
• Tires should be properly main-
tained with at least 2/32nds of an
inch of tread depth. If your tires do
not have enough tread, making a
quick stop on wet pavement can
cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. See "Tire Tread" in
chapter 7.
• Turn on your headlamps to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
NOTICE
5-136
Driving your vehicle
• If you believe your brakes may be
wet, apply them lightly while driv-
ing until normal braking operation
returns.
Hydroplaning
If the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough, your vehicle may
have little or no contact with the road
surface and actually ride on the
water. The best advice is SLOW
DOWN when the road is wet.
The risk of hydroplaning increas-
es as the depth of tire tread
decreases, refer to "Tire Tread" in
chapter 7.
Driving in Flooded Areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
reduced.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
Highway Driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation, as specified.
Under-inflation may overheat or
damage the tires.
Do not install worn-out or damaged
tires, which may reduce traction or
adversely affect vehicle handling.
This could lead to sudden tire failure
that may cause loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.
Information
Never over-inflate your tires above the
maximum inflation pressure, as speci-
fied on your tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
Driving at higher speeds on the high-
way consumes more fuel and is less
efficient than driving at a slower,
more moderate speed. Maintain a
moderate speed in order to conserve
fuel when driving on the highway.
Be sure to check both the engine
coolant level and the engine oil
before driving.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
overheat the engine.
i
5-137
Driving your vehicle
5
WWIINNTTEERR DDRRIIVVIINNGG
The severe weather conditions of
winter quickly wear out tires and
cause other problems. To minimize
winter driving problems, you should
take the following suggestions:
Snow or Icy Conditions
You need to keep sufficient distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you.
Apply the brakes gently. Speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake
applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause the vehicle to skid.
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
or to install tire chains on your tires.
Always carry emergency equipment.
Some of the items you may want to
carry include tire chains, tow straps
or chains, a flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables,
a window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure to use radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
The traction provided by snow tires
on dry roads may not be as high as
your vehicle's original equipment
tires. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Information
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munici-
pal regulations for possible restric-
tions against their use.
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner than other types of tires, they
may be damaged by mounting some
types of tire chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is
recommended instead of tire chains.
Do not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; if
unavoidable use a wire type chain. If
tire chains must be used, use gen-
uine HYUNDAI parts and install the
tire chain after reviewing the instruc-
tions provided with the tire chains.
Damage to your vehicle caused by
improper tire chain use is not cov-
ered by your vehicle manufacturer’s
warranty.
i
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle’s
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your
vehicle may be adversely affect-
ed.
WARNING
OAD058077N
5-138
Driving your vehicle
Information
• Install tire chains on the front tires.
It should be noted that installing tire
chains on the tires will provide a
greater driving force, but will not
prevent side skids.
• Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and
municipal regulations for possible
restrictions against their use.
Chain installation
When installing tire chains, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions and
mount them as tightly possible. Drive
slowly (less than 20 mph (30 km/h))
with chains installed. If you hear the
chains contacting the body or chas-
sis, stop and tighten them.If they still
make contact, slow down until the
noise stops. Remove the tire chains
as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning Flasher and place a
triangular emergency warning device
behind the vehicle (if available).
Always place the vehicle in P (Park),
apply the parking brake and turn off
the engine before installing snow
chains.
i
The use of tire chains may
adversely affect vehicle han-
dling:
• Drive less than 20 mph
(30 km/h) or the chain manu-
facturer's recommended
speed limit, whichever is
lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid
bumps, holes, sharp turns,
and other road hazards, which
may cause the vehicle to
bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked
wheel braking.
WARNING
If your vehicle has 225/40R18
size tires, do not use tire chain;
they can damage your vehicle
(wheel, suspension and body).
CAUTION
5-139
Driving your vehicle
5
- When using tire chains:
• Wrong size chains or improperly
installed chains can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, sus-
pension, body and wheels.
• Use SAE "S" class or wire
chains.
• If you hear noise caused by
chains contacting the body,
retighten the chain to prevent
contact with the vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage,
retighten the chains after driving
0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).
• Do not use tire chains on vehi-
cles equipped with aluminum
wheels. If unavoidable, use a
wire type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 0.59
inch (15 mm) wide to prevent
damage to the chain’s connec-
tion.
Winter Precautions
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-
ing system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing.Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in chapter 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
chapter 8 for recommendations. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in chapter 7. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
service station.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in chapter 7 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.
NOTICE
5-140
Driving your vehicle
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instruc-
tions on the container.Window wash-
er anti-freeze is available from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
most auto parts outlets. Do not use
engine coolant or other types of anti-
freeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
Do not let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position.This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of
snow or ice around or near the rear
brakes or if the brakes are wet. If
there is a risk the parking brake may
freeze, apply it only temporarily while
you put the gear selector lever in P
and block the rear wheels so the car
cannot roll.Then release the parking
brake.
Do not let ice and snow accu-
mulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering.When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
car to be sure the movement of the
front wheels and the steering com-
ponents is not obstructed.
Don't place foreign objects or
materials in the engine com-
partment
Placement of foreign object or mate-
rials which prevent cooling of the
engine, in the engine compartment,
may cause a failure or combustion.
The manufacturer is not responsible
for the damage caused by such
placement.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice.If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heat-
ed key with care to avoid injury.
5-141
Driving your vehicle
5
Two labels on your driver's door sill
show how much weight your vehicle
was designed to carry: the Tire and
Loading Information Label and the
Certification Label.
Before loading your vehicle, familiar-
ize yourself with the following terms
for determining your vehicle’s weight
ratings, from the vehicle's specifica-
tions and the Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or option-
al equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo Weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the Certification Label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
gers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the Certification Label
located on the driver’s door sill.
VVEEHHIICCLLEE LLOOAADD LLIIMMIITT
5-142
Driving your vehicle
Tire Loading Information Label
■ Type A
■ Type D
■ Type B
■ Type E
■ Type C
■ Type F
OAD055111N/OAD055110N/OAD055109N
OAD058111N/OAD058110N/OAD058109N
The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.
5-143
Driving your vehicle
5
Vehicle capacity weight
849 lbs. (385 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.
Steps for determining correct
load limit
1. Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity.For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
er, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
Do not overload the vehicle as
there is a limit to the total
weight, or load limit, including
occupants and cargo, the vehi-
cle can carry. Overloading can
shorten the life of the vehicle. If
the GVWR or the GAWR is
exceeded, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change
the handling of your vehicle.
These could cause you to lose
control and result in an acci-
dent.
WARNING
5-144
Driving your vehicle
Example 1
Maximum Load
(1400 lbs.)
(635 kg)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs. × 2 = 300 lbs.)
(68 kg × 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
(1100 lbs.)
(499 kg)
Example 2
Maximum Load
(1400 lbs.)
(635 kg)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs. × 5 = 750 lbs.)
(68 kg × 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
(650 lbs.)
(295 kg)
Example 3
Maximum Load
(1400 lbs.)
(635 kg)
Passenger Weight
(172 lbs. × 5 = 860 lbs.)
(78 kg × 5 = 390 kg)
Cargo Weight
(540 lbs.)
(245 kg)
+
≥≥
≥≥
≥≥
+
+
5-145
Driving your vehicle
5
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver’s door sill at the center pil-
lar and shows the maximum allow-
able weight of the fully loaded vehi-
cle. This is called the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
The total weight of the vehicle,
including all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out
the actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Be
sure to spread out your load equally
on both sides of the centerline.
Overloading your vehicle may
cause damage. Repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do
not overload your vehicle.
NOTICE
If you carry items inside your
vehicle (e.g., suitcases, tools,
packages, or anything else),
they are moving as fast as the
vehicle. If you have to stop or
turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, the items will keep going
and can cause an injury if they
strike the driver or a passenger.
• Put items in the cargo area of
your vehicle.Try to spread the
weight evenly.
• Do not stack items, like suit-
cases, inside the vehicle
above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured
child restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure it.
WARNING
OBH059070
Overloading
• Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle
and vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
affect your vehicle's handling
and braking ability, and cause
an accident.
• Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your
vehicle's tires and possible
tire failure, increased stop-
ping distances and poor vehi-
cle handling-all of which may
result in a crash.
WARNING
TTRRAAIILLEERR TTOOWWIINNGG
We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.
Driving your vehicle
5-146
What to do in an emergency
6
Hazard Warning Flasher .......................................6-2
In Case of an Emergency While Driving.............6-3
If the Engine Stalls While Driving .................................6-3
If the Engine Stalls at a Crossroad or Crossing........6-3
If you Have a Flat Tire While Driving ..........................6-3
If the Engine Will not Start ..................................6-4
If the Engine Doesn't Turn Over or
Turns Over Slowly .............................................................6-4
If the Engine Turns Over Normally but
Doesn't Start ......................................................................6-4
Jump Starting..........................................................6-4
If the Engine Overheats........................................6-7
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).........6-9
Check Tire Pressure .........................................................6-9
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...............................6-10
Low Tire Pressure Telltale ............................................6-11
Low Tire Pressure LCD Display with
Position Indicator ............................................................6-11
TPMS Malfunction Indicator ........................................6-12
Changing a Tire with TPMS..........................................6-13
If You Have a Flat Tire........................................6-15
With Spare Tire................................................................6-15
With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) - Type A......................6-22
With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) - Type B......................6-29
Towing ...................................................................6-36
Towing Service.................................................................6-36
Dinghy Towing .................................................................6-37
Removable Towing Hook ...............................................6-38
Emergency Towing..........................................................6-38
6-2
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exer-
cise extreme caution when
approaching, overtaking, or passing
your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
To turn the hazard warning flasher
on or off, press the hazard warning
flasher button. The button is located
in the center fascia panel. Both the
left and right turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG FFLLAASSHHEERR
What to do in an emergency
OAD048401N
6-3
What to do in an emergency
If the Engine Stalls While
Driving
• Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place.
• Turn on your hazard warning flash-
er.
• Try to start the engine again.If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or
seek other qualified assistance.
If the Engine Stalls at a
Crossroad or Crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, if safe to do so, move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position
and then push the vehicle to a safe
location.
If You Have a Flat Tire While
Driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing:
• Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immedi-
ately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
When the vehicle has slowed to
such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on firm, level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
• When the vehicle is stopped, press
the hazard warning flasher button,
move the shift lever into P(Park),
and apply the parking brake, and
place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
• Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
• When changing a flat tire, follow
the instructions provided later in
this chapter.
IINN CCAASSEE OOFF AANN EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY WWHHIILLEE DDRRIIVVIINNGG
6
6-4
If the Engine Doesn't Turn
Over or Turns Over Slowly
• Be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park). The engine
starts only when the shift lever is in
N (Neutral) or P (Park).
• Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
• Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is drained.
Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. This could cause damage to
your vehicle. See instructions for
"Jump Starting" provided in this
chapter.
If the Engine Turns Over
Normally but Doesn't Start
Check the fuel level and add fuel if
necessary.
If the engine still does not start, have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Follow the jump
starting procedure in this section to
avoid serious injury or damage to
your vehicle. If in doubt about how to
properly jump start your vehicle, we
strongly recommend that you have a
service technician or towing service
do it for you.
IIFF TTHHEE EENNGGIINNEE WWIILLLL NNOOTT SSTTAARRTT
What to do in an emergency
Push or pull starting the vehicle
may cause the catalytic con-
verter to overload which can
lead to damage to the emission
control system.
CAUTION
JJUUMMPP SSTTAARRTTIINNGG
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH to you or bystanders,
always follow these precautions
when working near or handling
the battery:
Always read and follow
instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Wear eye protection
designed to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
Keep all flames, sparks,
or smoking materials
away from the battery.
WARNING
6-5
What to do in an emergency
6
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose of the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulations.
To prevent damage to your vehi-
cle:
• Only use a 12-volt power supply
(battery or jumper system) to
jump start your vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle by push-starting.
Jump starting procedure
1. Position the vehicles close enough
that the jumper cables will reach,
but do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in
the engine compartment at all
times, even when the vehicles are
turned off.
3. Turn off all electrical devices such
as radios, lights, air conditioning,
etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park)
and set the parking brakes. Turn
both vehicles OFF.
NOTICE
i
Hydrogen is always
present in battery cells,
is highly combustible,
and may explode if ignit-
ed.
Keep batteries out of
reach of children.
Batteries contain sulfu-
ric acid which is highly
corrosive. Do not allow
acid to contact your
eyes, skin or clothing.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get imme-
diate medical attention. If acid
gets on your skin, thoroughly
wash the area. If you feel pain or
a burning sensation, get med-
ical attention immediately.
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle if your battery is
frozen.
• NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicle's
battery cables are connected
to the battery.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
NEVER touch these compo-
nents with the engine running
or when the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
Pb
6-6
What to do in an emergency
4. Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illus-
tration. First connect one jumper
cable to the red, positive (+)
jumper terminal of your vehicle
(1).
5. Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the red, positive
(+) battery/jumper terminal of the
assisting vehicle (2).
6. Connect the second jumper cable
to the black, negative (-) battery/
chassis ground of the assisting
vehicle (3).
7. Connect the other end of the sec-
ond jumper cable to the black,
negative (-) chassis ground of
your vehicle (4).
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the cor-
rect battery or jumper terminals or
the correct ground. Do not lean
over the battery when making
connections.
8. Start the engine of the assisting
vehicle and let it run at approxi-
mately 2,000 rpm for a few min-
utes.Then start your vehicle.
If your vehicle will not start after a
few attempts, it probably requires
servicing. In this event please seek
qualified assistance. If the cause of
your battery discharging is not
apparent, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Disconnect the jumper cables in the
exact reverse order you connected
them:
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from
the black, negative (-) chassis
ground of your vehicle (4).
2. Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the black, neg-
ative (-) battery/chassis ground of
the assisting vehicle (3).
3. Disconnect the second jumper
cable from the red, positive (+)
battery/jumper terminal of the
assisting vehicle (2).
4. Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the red, positive
(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle
(1).
1VQA4001
6-7
What to do in an emergency
6
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine may be over-
heating. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (Park)
and set the parking brake.If the air
conditioning is ON, turn it OFF.
3. If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is com-
ing out from the hood, stop the
engine.Do not open the hood until
the coolant has stopped running
or the steaming has stopped. If
there is no visible loss of engine
coolant and no steam, leave the
engine running and check to be
sure the engine cooling fan is
operating.If the fan is not running,
turn the engine off.
4. Check for coolant leaking from the
radiator, hoses or under the vehi-
cle. (If the air conditioning had
been in use, it is normal for cold
water to be draining from it when
you stop.)
5. If engine coolant is leaking out,
stop the engine immediately and
call the nearest authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
IIFF TTHHEE EENNGGIINNEE OOVVEERRHHEEAATTSS
While the engine is
running, keep hands,
clothing and tools
away from the mov-
ing parts such as the
cooling fan and drive
belt to prevent seri-
ous injury.
WARNING
Your vehicle is
equipped with a pres-
surized coolant
reserve tank. NEVER
remove the coolant
reserve tank cap or the radiator
drain plug while the engine and
radiator are HOT. Hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure, causing serious
injury.
Turn the engine off and wait
until the engine cools down.
Use extreme care when remov-
ing the coolant reserve tank
cap. Wrap a towel or thick rag
around it, and turn it counter-
clockwise slowly to release
some of the pressure from the
system. Step back while the
pressure is released.
When you are sure all the pres-
sure has been released, contin-
ue turning the cap counter-
clockwise to remove it.
WARNING
6-8
6. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to nor-
mal. Then, if coolant has been
lost, carefully add coolant to the
reservoir to bring the fluid level in
the reservoir up to the halfway
mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheat-
ing. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er for assistance.
What to do in an emergency
Serious loss of coolant indi-
cates a leak in the cooling sys-
tem and should be checked as
soon as possible by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
6-9
What to do in an emergency
(1) Low Tire Pressure / TPMS
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(2) Low Tire Pressure /
Tire Pressure Monitor /
TPMS Malfunction Display
(shown on the cluster LCD dis-
play)
Check Tire Pressure
• You can check the tire pressure in
the Assist Mode on the cluster.
Refer to the "LCD Display Mode"
section in chapter 3.
• A "Drive to display" message will
appear for the first few minutes of
driving after initial engine start up.
If the tire pressure is not displayed
after a few minutes of driving,
check the tire pressures.
• The displayed tire pressure values
may differ from those measured
with a tire pressure gauge.
• You can change the tire pressure
unit in the User Settings Mode on
the cluster.
- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to the "User
Settings Mode" section in
chapter 3).
TTIIRREE PPRREESSSSUURREE MMOONNIITTOORRIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM ((TTPPMMSS))
6
■ Supervision cluster
OAD048536L
OAD068001N
OAD048567L
■ Supervision cluster
6-10
What to do in an emergency
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label.
If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver's responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly one minute and then remain con-
tinuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehi-
cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pres-
sure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
tions may occur for a variety of rea-
sons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
Over-inflation or under-inflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure that
may cause loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.
WARNING
6-11
What to do in an emergency
6
If any of the below happens, have
the system checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
1. The Low Tire Pressure TPMS
Malfunction Indicator does not
illuminate for 3 seconds when
the ignition switch is placed to
the ON position or engine is
running.
2. The TPMS Malfunction Indicator
remains illuminated after blink-
ing for approximately 1 minute.
3. The Low Tire Pressure LCD dis-
play remains illuminated.
Low Tire Pressure
Telltale
Low Tire Pressure LCD
Display with Position Indicator
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated and the warning message is
displayed on the cluster LCD display,
one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated. The LCD posi-
tion indicator will indicate which tire
is significantly under-inflated by illu-
minating the corresponding position
light.
If any of your tire pressures are indi-
cated as being low, immediately
reduce your speed, avoid hard cor-
nering, and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
label located on the driver's side cen-
ter pillar outer panel.
If you cannot reach a service station
or if the tire cannot hold the newly
added air, replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire.
The Low Tire Pressure LCD position
indicator will remain on and the
TPMS Malfunction Indicator may
blink for one minute and then remain
illuminated until you have the low
pressure tire repaired and replaced
on the vehicle.
The spare tire is not equipped with
a tire pressure sensor.
NOTICE
NOTICE
■ Supervision cluster
OAD048567L
6-12
What to do in an emergency
TPMS Malfunction
Indicator
The TPMS Malfunction Indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible.
If there is a malfunction with the
TPMS, the individual tire pres-
sures in the cluster LCD display
will not be available. Have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
NOTICE
In winter or cold weather, the
Low Tire Pressure Telltale may
be illuminated if the tire pres-
sure was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunc-
tioning because the decreased
temperature leads to a propor-
tional lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
CAUTION
Low pressure damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
WARNING
6-13
What to do in an emergency
6
The TPMS Malfunction Indicator
may illuminate after blinking for
one minute if the vehicle is near
electric power supply cables or
radio transmitters such as police
stations, government and public
offices, broadcasting stations,
military installations, airports,
transmitting towers, etc.
Additionally, the TPMS
Malfunction Indicator may illumi-
nate if snow chains are used or
electronic devices such as com-
puters, chargers, remote starters,
navigation, etc. This may interfere
with normal operation of the
TPMS.
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure and LCD position indicator
will come on. Have the flat tire
repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible or
replace the flat tire with the spare
tire.
The spare tire does not come with a
tire pressure monitoring sensor.
When the low pressure tire or the flat
tire is replaced with the spare tire,
the Low Tire Pressure LCD position
indicator will remain on.
Also, the TPMS Malfunction Indicator
will illuminate after blinking for one
minute if the vehicle is driven at
speed above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) for
approximately 20 minutes.
Once the original tire equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring sensor is
reinflated to the recommended pres-
sure and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the Low Tire Pressure LCD position
indicator and TPMS Malfunction
Indicator will go off within a few min-
utes of driving.
If the indicators do not disappear
after a few minutes, please visit an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem (except for
the spare tire). You must use TPMS
specific wheels. It is recommended
that you always have your tires serv-
iced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
NOTICE
It is recommended that you do
not use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by
HYUNDAI dealer to repair
and/or inflate a low pressure
tire. Tire sealant not approved
by HYUNDAI dealer may dam-
age the tire pressure sensor.
CAUTION
6-14
What to do in an emergency
You may not be able identify a tire
with low pressure by simply looking
at it. Always use a good quality tire
pressure gage to measure the tire's
inflation pressure. Please note that a
tire that is hot (from being driven) will
have a higher pressure measure-
ment than a tire that is cold.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
i
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually with light
force, and slowly move to a
safe position off the road.
WARNING
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modify-
ing, or disabling the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
WARNING
6-15
What to do in an emergency
With Spare Tire (if equipped)
Jack and tools
➀ Jack handle
② Jack
③ Wheel lug nut wrench
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug
nut wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment under the luggage box
cover.
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
Turn the winged hold down bolt
counterclockwise to remove the
spare tire.
Store the spare tire in the same com-
partment by turning the winged hold
down bolt clockwise.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from "rattling", store them in their
proper location.
IIFF YYOOUU HHAAVVEE AA FFLLAATT TTIIRREE
6
Changing a tire can be danger-
ous. Follow the instructions in
this section when changing a
tire to reduce the risk of serious
injury or death.
WARNING
OAD065027
OAD065026
Be careful as you use the jack
handle to stay clear of the flat
end. The flat end has sharp
edges that could cause cuts.
CAUTION
6-16
What to do in an emergency
If it is hard to loosen the tire hold-
down wing bolt by hand, you can
loosen it easily using the jack handle.
1. Put the jack handle (1) inside of
the tire hold-down wing bolt.
2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise with the jack
handle.
Changing tires
Follow these steps to change your
vehicle's tire:
1. Park on a level, firm surface.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
or into R (Reverse) if equipped
with a manual transmission, apply
the parking brake, and place the
ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF
position.
3. Press the hazard warning flasher
button.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
A vehicle can slip or roll off of a
jack causing serious injury or
death to you or those nearby.
Take the following safety pre-
cautions:
• Never place any portion of
your body under a vehicle that
is supported by a jack.
• NEVER attempt to change a
tire in the lane of traffic.
ALWAYS move the vehicle
completely off the road on
level, firm ground away from
traffic before trying to change
a tire. If you cannot find a level,
firm place off the road, call a
towing service for assistance.
• Be sure to use the jack pro-
vided with the vehicle.
• ALWAYS place the jack on the
designated jacking positions
on the vehicle and NEVER on
the bumpers or any other part
of the vehicle for jacking sup-
port.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Keep children away from the
road and the vehicle.
WARNING
OAD067033
6-17
What to do in an emergency
6
5. Block both the front and rear of the
tire diagonally opposite of the tire
you are changing.
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each in the
order shown above, but do not
remove any lug nuts until the tire
has been raised off of the ground.
7. Place the jack at the designated
jacking position under the frame
closest to the tire you are chang-
ing. The jacking positions are
plates welded to the frame with
two notches. Never jack any other
position or part of the vehicle.
Doing so may damage the side
seal molding or other parts of the
vehicle.
OAD068006
BB
BB
ll
ll
oo
oo
cc
cc
kk
kk
OAD068007N
OAD068008N
■ Front ■ Rear
6-18
What to do in an emergency
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire clears the
ground. Make sure the vehicle is
stable on the jack.
9. Loosen the lug nuts with the wheel
lug nut wrench and remove them
with your fingers. Remove the
wheel from the studs and lay it flat
on the ground out of the way.
Remove any dirt or debris from
the studs, mounting surfaces, and
wheel.
10. Install the spare tire onto the
studs of the hub.
11.Tighten the lug nuts with your fin-
gers onto the studs with the
smaller end of the lug nuts clos-
est to the wheel.
12. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the jack handle coun-
terclockwise.
13. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Double-check each lug
nut until they are tight. After
changing tires, have an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer tighten the
lug nuts to their proper torque as
soon as possible. The wheel lug
nut should be tightened to
79~94 lbf·ft (11~13 kgf·m).
OAD068029N OLF064013
6-19
What to do in an emergency
6
If you have a tire gauge, check the
tire pressure (see "Tires and
Wheels" in chapter 8 for tire pressure
instructions.). If the pressure is lower
or higher than recommended, drive
slowly to the nearest service station
and adjust it to the recommended
pressure. Always reinstall the valve
cap after checking or adjusting tire
pressure. If the cap is not replaced,
air may leak from the tire. If you lose
a valve cap, buy another and install it
as soon as possible. After changing
tires, secure the flat tire and return
the jack and tools to their proper stor-
age locations.
Check the tire pressure as soon
as possible after installing a spare
tire. Adjust it to the recommended
pressure.
If any of the equipment such as the
jack, lug nuts, studs, or other equip-
ment is damaged or in poor condi-
tion, do not attempt to change the
tire and call for assistance.
Use of compact spare tires
Compact spare tires are designed for
emergency use only. Drive carefully
on the compact spare tire and
always follow the safety precautions.
NOTICE
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the studs and lug nuts. Make
certain during tire changing
that the same nuts that were
removed are reinstalled. If you
have to replace your lug nuts
make sure they have metric
threads to avoid damaging the
studs and ensure the wheel is
properly secured to the hub.
Consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
To prevent compact spare tire
failure and loss of control pos-
sibly resulting in an accident:
• Use the compact spare tire
only in an emergency.
• NEVER operate your vehicle
over 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Do not exceed the vehicle's
maximum load rating or the
load carrying capacity shown
on the sidewall of the com-
pact spare tire.
• Do not use the compact spare
tire continuously. Repair or
replace the original tire as
soon as possible to avoid fail-
ure of the compact spare tire.
WARNING
6-20
What to do in an emergency
When driving with the compact spare
tire mounted to your vehicle:
• Check the tire pressure after
installing the compact spare tire.
The compact spare tire should be
inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
When the original tire and wheel
are repaired and reinstalled on the
vehicle,the lug nut torque must be
set correctly. The correct lug nut
tightening torque is 79~94 lbf·ft
(11~13 kgf·m).
NOTICE
To prevent damaging the com-
pact spare tire and your vehicle:
• Drive slowly enough for the
road conditions to avoid all
hazards, such as a potholes
or debris.
• Avoid driving over obstacles.
The compact spare tire diame-
ter is smaller than the diame-
ter of a conventional tire and
reduces the ground clearance
approximately 1 inch (25 mm).
• Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare tire. Because
of the smaller size, a tire chain
will not fit properly.
• Do not use the compact spare
tire on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow
tires, wheel covers or trim
rings be used with the com-
pact spare wheel.
CAUTION
6-21
What to do in an emergency
6
Jack label
The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
■ Example
OHYK065011
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3.When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4.When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6.The designated locations under
the frame
7.When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transmission or move
the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion on vehicles with automatic
transmission/dual clutch transmis-
sion.
9.The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
6-22
What to do in an emergency
With Tire Mobility Kit
(TMK, if equipped) - Type A
For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary
fix to the tire and we recommend that
the system be inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Introduction
With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The system of compressor and seal-
ing compound effectively and com-
fortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tire caused by nails
or similar objects and reinflates the
tire.
After you ensured that the tire is
properly sealed you can drive cau-
tiously on the tire (distance up to 200
km (120 miles)) at a max. speed of
80 km/h (50 mph) in order to reach a
service station or tire dealer to have
the tire replaced.
It is possible that some tires, espe-
cially with larger punctures or dam-
age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may
adversely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use.
OAD067009
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
walls.This can result in an acci-
dent due to tire failure.
WARNING
Have your tire repaired as soon
as possible. The tire may loose
air pressure at any time after
inflating with the Tire Mobility
Kit.
WARNING
When two or more tires are flat,
do not use the tire mobility kit
because the supported one
sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is
only used for one flat tire.
CAUTION
6-23
What to do in an emergency
6
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tire
repair method and is to be used for
one tire only. This instruction shows
you step by step how to temporarily
seal the puncture simply and reliably.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
Notes on the safe use of the
Tire Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
Tire Mobility Kit away from moving
traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your park-
ing brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car tires.
Only punctured areas located with-
in the tread region of the tire can be
sealed using the tire mobility kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-
cles or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are dam-
aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit
for your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tire damage larger
than approximately 6 mm (0.24 in).
If the tire cannot be made roadwor-
thy with the Tire Mobility Kit, we
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a tire
is severely damaged by driving run
flat or with insufficient air pressure.
• Do not remove any foreign objects
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor run-
ning for more than 10 min.at a time
or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below
-30°C (-22°F).
• In case of skin contact with the
sealant, wash the area thoroughly
with plenty of water. If the irritation
persists, seek medical attention.
• In case of eye contact with the
sealant, flush your eyes for at least
15 minutes.If the irritation persists,
seek medical attention.
Do not use the TMK if a tire is
severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air
pressure.
Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the
tire can be sealed using the
TMK.
WARNING
6-24
What to do in an emergency
• In case of swallowing the sealant,
rinse the mouth and drink plenty of
water.However, never give anything
to an unconscious person and seek
medical attention immediately.
• Long time exposure to the sealant
may cause damage to bodily tissue
such as kidney, etc.
ODE067044
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit
1. Speed-restriction label
2.Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
4.Connectors and cable for the
power outlet direct connection
5. Holder for the sealant bottle
6. Compressor
7. ON/OFF switch
8. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
9. Button for reducing the tire infla-
tion pressure
6-25
What to do in an emergency
6
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
Strictly follow the specified
sequence, otherwise the sealant
may escape under high pressure.
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1. Shake the sealant bottle (2).
2. Connect the filling hose (3) to the
sealant bottle (2) in a (A) direction
and connect the sealant bottle to
the compressor (6) in a B direc-
tion.
3. Ensure that the compressor is
switched OFF.
Expired sealant
Do not use the Tire sealant after
the sealant has expired (i.e.
pasted the expiration date on
the sealant container). This can
increase the risk of tire failure.
WARNING
Sealant
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
WARNING
Detach the speed restriction
label (1) from the sealant bottle
(2), and place it in a highly visi-
ble place inside the vehicle
such as on the steering wheel
to remind the driver not to drive
too fast.
CAUTION
OIGH067042
OAD068011N
6-26
What to do in an emergency
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the detective wheel and
screw the filling hose (3) of the
sealant bottle onto the valve.
Securely install the sealant filling
hose to the valve. If not, sealant
may flow backward, possibly clog-
ging the filling hose.
5. Plug the compressor power cord
(4) into the vehicle power outlet.
Only use the front passenger side
power outlet when connecting the
power cord.
6. With the ignition switch in the ON
position, switch on the compres-
sor and let it run for approximately
5~7 minutes to fill the sealant up
to proper pressure. (refer to the
Tire and Wheels, chapter 8). The
inflation pressure of the tire after
filling is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later.
Be careful not to overinflate the
tire and stay away from the tire
when filling it.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OAD068014N
OAD068040N
6-27
What to do in an emergency
6
7. Switch off the compressor.
8. Detach the hoses from the sealant
bottle connector and from the tire
valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-
age location in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant
9. Immediately drive approximately
7~10 km (4~6 miles or, about
10min) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph). If possible, do not fall
below a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise, reduce your speed and drive
with caution until you can safely pull
off of the side of the road.
Call for road side service or towing.
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,
the tire pressure sensors and wheel
may be damaged by sealant, remove
the sealant stained with tire pressure
sensors and wheel and inspect in
authorized dealer.
Tire pressure
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tire pressure is
below 200 kPa (29 psi). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tire failure.
CAUTION
OLMF064106
6-28
What to do in an emergency
Checking the tire inflation pres-
sure
1. After driving approximately 7~10
km (4~6 miles or about 10 min),
stop at a safety location.
2. Connect the filling hose (3) direct-
ly into the compressor
3. Connect the other end of the filling
hose (3) directly into the valve.
4. Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
5. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the recomended tire inflation.
With the ignition swithched on,
proceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pres-
sure : Switch on the compres-
sor.To check the current inflation
pressure setting, briefly switch
off the compressor.
- To reduce the inflation pres-
sure: Press the button (9) on the
compressor.
Do not let the compressor run for
more than 10 minutes, otherwise
the device will overheat and may
be damaged.
Information
The pressure gauge may show higher
than actual reading when the com-
pressor is running. To get an accurate
tire reading, the compressor needs to
be turned off.
i
NOTICE
If the inflation pressure is not
maintained, drive the vehicle a
second time, refer to
Distributing the sealant. Then
repeat steps 1 to 4.
Use of the TMK may be ineffec-
tual for tire damage larger than
approximately 4 mm (0.16 in).
We recommend that you con-
tact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer if the tire cannot be made
roadworthy with the Tire
Mobility Kit.
CAUTION
OAEPH067042
OAD067014
6-29
What to do in an emergency
6
Information
When reinstalling the repaired or
replaced tire and wheel on the vehicle,
tighten the wheel lug nut to 11~13
kgf·m (79~94 lbf·ft).
With Tire Mobility Kit
(TMK, if equipped) - Type B
For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary
fix to the tire and the tire should be
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
i
The tire inflation pressure must
be at least 220 kPa (32 psi). If it
is not, do not continue driving.
Call for road side service or
towing.
WARNING
Tire pressure sensor
The sealant on the tire pressure
sensor and wheel should be
removed when you replace the
tire with a new one and inspect
the tire pressure sensors at an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION
OAD068009N
One sealant bottle for one tire
When two or more tires are flat,
do not use the tire mobility kit
because the supported one
sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is
only used for one flat tire.
CAUTION
Tire wall
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
walls.This can result in an acci-
dent due to tire failure.
WARNING
6-30
Introduction
With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The compressor and sealing com-
pound system effectively and com-
fortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tire caused by nails
or similar objects and reinflates the
tire.
After you ensure that the tire is prop-
erly sealed you can drive cautiously
on the tire (distance up to 120 miles
(200 km)) at a max.speed of (50mph
(80 km/h)) in order to reach a service
station or tire dealer for the tire
replacement.
It is possible that some tires, espe-
cially with larger punctures or dam-
age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may
adversely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use.
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tire
repair method and is to be used for
one tire only.
This instruction shows you step by
step how to temporarily seal the
puncture simply and reliably.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
What to do in an emergency
Temporary fix
Have your tire repaired as soon
as possible. The tire may lose
air pressure at any time after
inflating with the Tire Mobility
Kit.
WARNING
6-31
What to do in an emergency
Notes on the safe use of the
Tire Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
Tire Mobility Kit away from moving
traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your park-
ing brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car
tires.Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the tire
can be sealed using the tire mobil-
ity kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-
cles or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are dam-
aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit
for your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tire damage larger
than approximately 0.24 inch (6
mm).
Please contact the nearest author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer if the tire
cannot be made roadworthy with
the Tire Mobility Kit.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit, if a
flat tire or an under-inflated tire is
further severely damaged by being
continuously driven.
• Do not remove any foreign objects
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor run-
ning for more than 10 minutes at a
time or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below
-22°F (-30°C).
• In case of skin contact with the
sealant, wash the area thoroughly
with plenty of water. If the irritation
persists, seek medical attention.
• In case of eye contact with the
sealant, flush your eyes for at least
15 minutes.If the irritation persists,
seek medical attention.
• In case of swallowing the sealant,
rinse the mouth and drink plenty of
water. However, never give any-
thing to an unconscious person
and seek medical attention imme-
diately.
• Long time exposure to the sealant
may cause damage to bodily tissue
such as kidney, etc.
6
6-32
0. Speed restriction label
1.Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
3. Connectors and cable for power
outlet direct connection
4. Holder for the sealant bottle
5. Compressor
6. ON/OFF switch
7. Pressure gage for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
8. Screw cap for reducing tire infla-
tion pressure
9. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
Strictly follow the specified
sequence, otherwise the sealant
may escape under high pressure.
What to do in an emergency
OAM060015L
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit
Do not use the tire sealant after
the sealant has expired (i.e.
pasted the expiration date on
the sealant container). This can
increase the risk of tire failure.
WARNING
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
WARNING
6-33
What to do in an emergency
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1. Detach the speed restriction label
(0) from the sealant bottle (1), and
place it in a highly visible place
inside the vehicle such as on the
steering wheel to remind the driv-
er not to drive too fast.
2. Screw the connection hose (9)
onto the connector of the sealant
bottle.
3. Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the flat tire and screw the
filling hose (2) of the sealant bottle
onto the valve.
4. Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing (4) of the compressor so
that the bottle is upright.
5. Ensure that the compressor is
switched off.
6
OIG066022
OAD066014
Securely install the sealant fill-
ing hose to the valve. If not,
sealant may flow backward,
possibly clogging the filling
hose.
CAUTION
OAD065022
6-34
6. Plug the compressor power cord
(3) into the vehicle power outlet.
7. With the ignition switch in the ON
position, switch on the compres-
sor and let it run for approximately
5~7 minutes to fill the sealant up
to proper pressure. (refer to the
Tire and Wheels, chapter 8). The
inflation pressure of the tire after
filling is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later.
Be careful not to overinflate the
tire and stay away from the tire
when filling it.
8. Switch off the compressor.
9. Detach the hoses from the sealant
bottle connector and from the tire
valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-
age location in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant
10. Immediately drive approximately
4~6 miles (7~10 km or about 10
minutes) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). If possible, do not fall
below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise, reduce your speed and drive
with caution until you can safely pull
off of the side of the road.
Call for road side service or towing.
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,
the tire pressure sensors and wheel
may be damaged by sealant, have it
inspected at an authorized dealer.
What to do in an emergency
OAD048595
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tire pressure is
below 29 psi (200 kpa). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tire failure.
CAUTION
Do not leave your vehicle run-
ning in a poorly ventilated area
for extended periods of time.
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation can occur.
WARNING
6-35
What to do in an emergency
Checking the tire inflation pres-
sure
1. After driving approximately
4~6 miles (7~10 km or about
10 minutes), stop at a safe loca-
tion.
2. Connect hose (9) of the compres-
sor directly to the tire valve.
3. Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the recommended tire inflation.
With the ignition switched on, pro-
ceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pres-
sure:
Switch on the compressor. To
check the current inflation pres-
sure setting, briefly switch off the
compressor.
- To reduce the inflation pres-
sure:
Loosen the screw cap (8) on the
compressor hose.
Information
The pressure gage may show higher
than actual reading when the com-
pressor is running. To get an accurate
tire pressure, the compressor needs to
be turned off.
Information
When reinstalling the repaired or
replaced tire and wheel on the vehicle,
tighten the wheel lug nut to 79~94
lbf·ft (11~13 kgf·m).
i
i
6
OAD065014
When you use the Tire Mobility
Kit including sealant not
approved by HYUNDAI, the tire
pressure sensors may be dam-
aged by sealant.The sealant on
the tire pressure sensor and
wheel should be removed when
you replace the tire with a new
one and inspect the tire pres-
sure sensors at an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
6-36
What to do in an emergency
Towing Service
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies
or flatbed is recommended.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the front wheels
off the ground. If any of the loaded
wheels or suspension components
are damaged or the vehicle is being
towed with the front wheels on the
ground, use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
TTOOWWIINNGG
OAD068015N
Dolly
Dolly
• Do not tow the vehicle with
the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use a wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
CAUTION
OAD068016N
OAD068017N
6-37
What to do in an emergency
6
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies:
1. Place the ignition switch in the
ACC position.
2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Dinghy Towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be
dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the
ground) behind a motor home. To
avoid serious damage to your vehi-
cle, do not tow your vehicle with four
wheels on the ground.
If your vehicle is equipped with
a rollover sensor, place the igni-
tion switch in the LOCK/OFF or
ACC position when the vehicle
is being towed.The side impact
and curtain air bag may deploy
if the sensor detects the situa-
tion as a rollover.
WARNING
Failure to place the shift lever in
N (Neutral) when being towed
with the front wheels on the
ground can cause internal dam-
age to the transmission.
CAUTION
OAD068043N
6-38
What to do in an emergency
Removable Towing Hook
1. Open the trunk, and remove the
towing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
front bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
Emergency Towing
If towing is necessary, we recom-
mend you have it done by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer or a commer-
cial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook at the front of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle with a cable or chain. A
driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes.
OAD068041N
OAD068018
■ Front
OAD068019N
6-39
What to do in an emergency
6
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
Always follow these emergency tow-
ing precautions:
• Place the ignition switch in the
ACC position so the steering
wheel is not locked. (if equipped)
• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Depress the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced braking perform-
ance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steer-
ing system will be disabled.
• Use a vehicle heavier than your
own to tow your vehicle.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or dam-
aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
and even force.
• Use a towing cable or chain less
than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a
white or red cloth (about 12 inch
(30 cm) wide) in the middle of the
cable or chain for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so the towing cable
or chain remains tight during tow-
ing.
• Before towing, check the automat-
ic transmission/dual clutch trans-
mission for fluid leaks under your
vehicle. If the automatic transmis-
sion/dual clutch transmission fluid
is leaking, flatbed equipment or a
towing dolly must be used.
OAD068042N
6-40
What to do in an emergency
To avoid damage to your vehicle
and vehicle components when
towing:
• Always pull straight ahead
when using the towing hooks.
Do not pull from the side or at
a vertical angle.
• Do not use the towing hooks to
pull a vehicle out of mud, sand
or other conditions from which
the vehicle cannot be driven
out under its own power.
• Limit the vehicle speed to
10 mph (15 km/h) and drive
less than 1 mile (1.5 km) when
towing to avoid serious dam-
age to the automatic transmis-
sion/dual clutch transmission.
CAUTION
7
Maintenance
7
Maintenance
Engine Compartment .............................................7-3
Maintenance Services ...........................................7-4
Owner's Responsibility.....................................................7-4
Owner Maintenance Precautions..................................7-4
Owner Maintenance ..............................................7-5
Owner Maintenance Schedule.......................................7-6
Scheduled Maintenance Services........................7-7
Normal Maintenance Schedule (2.0 MPI)....................7-8
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions
(2.0 MPI) ............................................................................7-11
Normal Maintenance Schedule (1.6 T-GDI)..............7-13
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions
(1.6 T-GDI) ........................................................................7-16
Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance
Items ......................................................................7-18
Engine Oil..............................................................7-21
Checking the Engine Oil Level .....................................7-21
Checking the Engine Oil and Filter.............................7-22
Engine Coolant .....................................................7-23
Checking the Engine Coolant Level............................7-23
Changing Engine Coolant ..............................................7-26
Brake/Clutch Fluid...............................................7-27
Checking the Brake/Clutch Fluid Level .....................7-27
Washer Fluid.........................................................7-28
Checking the Washer Fluid Level................................7-28
Parking Brake.......................................................7-28
Checking the Parking Brake.........................................7-28
Air Cleaner ............................................................7-29
Filter Replacement..........................................................7-29
Climate Control Air Filter....................................7-31
Filter Inspection...............................................................7-31
Wiper Blades.........................................................7-33
Blade Inspection ..............................................................7-33
Blade Replacement .........................................................7-33
Battery...................................................................7-35
For Best Battery Service ..............................................7-36
Battery Recharging ........................................................7-36
Reset Features.................................................................7-37
Tires and Wheels .................................................7-38
Tire Care............................................................................7-38
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures...........7-39
Check Tire Inflation Pressure ......................................7-40
Tire Rotation.....................................................................7-41
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............................7-42
Tire Replacement ............................................................7-42
Wheel Replacement........................................................7-43
Tire Traction .....................................................................7-43
7
7
Tire Maintenance............................................................7-44
Tire Sidewall Labeling ....................................................7-44
Tire Terminology and Definitions................................7-48
All Season Tires...............................................................7-51
Summer Tires ...................................................................7-51
Snow Tires ........................................................................7-51
Radial-Ply Tires...............................................................7-51
Low Aspect Ratio Tires..................................................7-52
Fuses......................................................................7-53
Instrument Panel Fuse Replacement..........................7-54
Engine Compartment Panel Fuse Replacement.......7-56
Fuse/Relay Panel Description......................................7-58
Light Bulbs ............................................................7-64
Headlamp, Parking Lamp, Turn Signal Lamp and
Side Marker......................................................................7-64
Side Repeater Lamp Replacement..............................7-68
Rear Combination Light Bulb Replacement ..............7-69
High Mounted Stop Light Replacement ....................7-72
License Plate Light Bulb Replacement ......................7-73
Interior Light Bulb Replacement .................................7-74
Appearance Care..................................................7-75
Exterior Care....................................................................7-75
Interior Care .....................................................................7-80
Emission Control System ....................................7-83
Crankcase Emission Control System ..........................7-83
Evaporative Emission Control System Including
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)............7-83
Exhaust Emission Control System ..............................7-84
California Perchlorate Notice.............................7-87
7-3
7
Maintenance
EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
OAD078151N/OAD078100L
■■
2.0 MPI
■■
1.6 T-GDI
1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Positive battery terminal
5. Negative battery terminal
6. Fuse box
7. Air cleaner
8. Engine coolant reservoir
9.Windshield washer fluid reservoir
The actual engine compartment in the
vehicle may differ from the illustration.
7-4
Maintenance
MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE SSEERRVVIICCEESS
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
We recommend you have your vehi-
cle maintained and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An
authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets
HYUNDAI’s high service quality
standards and receives technical
support from HYUNDAI in order to
provide you with a high level of serv-
ice satisfaction.
Owner's Responsibility
Maintenance service and record
retention are the owner's responsibil-
ity.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
dance with the scheduled mainte-
nance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle war-
ranties.
Detailed warranty information is pro-
vided in your Owner's Handbook &
Warranty Information booklet.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
Owner Maintenance
Precautions
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury. This
chapter provides instructions only for
the maintenance items that are easy
to perform. Several procedures can
be done only by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer with special tools.
Your vehicle should not be modified
in any way. Such modifications may
adversely affect the performance,
safety or durability of your vehicle
and may, in addition, violate condi-
tions of the limited warranties cover-
ing the vehicle.
Certain modifications may also be in
violation of regulations established
by the U.S. Department of
Transportation and other federal or
state agencies.
7-5
7
Maintenance
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details,
read the separate Owner's
Handbook & Warranty Information
booklet provided with the vehicle.
If you're unsure about any service
or maintenance procedure, have it
done by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed by the owner or an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequen-
cies indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehi-
cle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your deal-
er as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance vehicle
checks are generally not covered by
warranties and you may be charged
for labor, parts and lubricants used.
NOTICE
Performing maintenance work
on a vehicle can be dangerous.
If you lack sufficient knowledge
and experience or the proper
tools and equipment to do the
work, have it done by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
ALWAYS follow these precau-
tions for performing mainte-
nance work:
• Park your vehicle on level
ground, move the shift lever
into the P (Park, for automatic
transmission/Dual clutch
transmission vehicle) position
or neutral (for manual trans-
mission vehicle), apply the
parking brake, place the igni-
tion switch in the LOCK/OFF
position.
• Block the tires (front and
back) to prevent the vehicle
from moving.
Remove loose clothing or jew-
elry that can become entan-
gled in moving parts.
• If you must run the engine
during maintenance, do so
out doors or in an area with
plenty of ventilation.
• Keep flames, sparks, or smok-
ing materials away from the
battery and fuel-related parts.
WARNING
OOWWNNEERR MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE
7-6
Maintenance
Owner Maintenance Schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Check for low or under-inflated
tires.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice if there is any
increased steering effort or loose-
ness in the steering wheel, or
change in its straight-ahead posi-
tion.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or "pulls" to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or "hard-to-push" brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transmission
occurs, check the transmission
fluid level.
• Check the automatic transmission/
dual clutch transmission P (Park)
function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the brake lights,
turn signals and hazard warning
flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare for tires
that are worn, show uneven wear,
or are damaged.
• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot.This may result in
coolant being blown out of the
opening and cause serious
burns and other injuries.
WARNING
At least twice a year:
(i.e., every Spring and Fall)
• Check radiator, heater and air con-
ditioning hoses for leaks or dam-
age.
• Check windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened
with washer fluid.
• Check headlamp alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the seat belts for wear and
function.
At least once a year:
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and hood
hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weather
strips.
• Lubricate door checker.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transmission linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
Follow Normal Maintenance
Schedule if the vehicle is usually
operated where none of the following
conditions apply. If any of the follow-
ing conditions apply, you must follow
the Maintenance Under Severe
Usage Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extreme-
ly humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 90°F (32°C).
For additional information or assis-
tance see your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
7-7
7
Maintenance
SSCCHHEEDDUULLEEDD MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE
SSEERRVVIICCEESS
7-8
Maintenance
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
:The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.
Normal Maintenance Schedule (2.0 MPI)
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Miles×1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5
Km×1,000 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Engine oil and engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
Fuel additives *
1
Add fuel additives every 7,500 miles or 12 months
Rotate tires
Rotate tires every 7,500 miles
Climate control air filter R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
Air cleaner filter I I I R I I I R I I I R I I I
Spark plugs Replace every 97,500 miles
Drive belts *
2
At first, inspect at 60,000 miles or 72 months.
Thereafter, inspect every 15,000 miles or 24 months
Vacuum hose I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Engine coolant
At first, replace at 120,000 miles or 10 years :
Thereafter, replace every 30,000 miles or 24 months
Battery condition I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
7-9
7
Maintenance
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
Normal Maintenance Schedule (2.0 MPI) (CONT)
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Miles×1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5
Km×1,000 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Driveshaft and boots I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Suspension mounting bolts I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner refrigerant I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner compressor I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Exhaust pipe and muffler
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I I I I I
Automatic transmission fluid
(if equipped)
No check, No service required
Manual transmission fluid (if equipped) I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
7-10
Maintenance
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
3
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this mainte-
nance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of
power, hard starting problem, etc. replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
Normal Maintenance Schedule (2.0 MPI) (CONT)
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Miles×1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5
Km×1,000 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Vapor hose, fuel filler cap and fuel tank I I I I I I I
Fuel tank air filter *
3
I I I I I I I
Fuel filter *
3
I I I I I I I
Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I I
Parking brake I I I I I I I
Brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
7-11
7
Maintenance
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions (2.0 MPI)
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Engine oil and filter R Every 3,750 miles or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J, K
Air cleaner filter R More frequently C, E
Spark plugs R More frequently A, B, H, I, K
Automatic transmission fluid
(if equipped)
R Every 60,000 miles
A, C, E, F,
G, H, I
Manual transmission fluid
(if equipped)
R Every 75,000 miles
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
Front brake disc/pads, calipers I More frequently C, D, G, H
Rear brake shoes or disc/pads I More frequently C, D, G, F
7-12
Maintenance
Severe Driving Conditions
A-Repeatedly driving short distances of less than 5 miles
(8 km) in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km)
in freezing temperature
B-Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-
tances
C-Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-
spread roads
D-Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E-Driving in sandy areas
F-Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
G-Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H-Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I -Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towing
J -Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
K-Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Parking brake I More frequently C, D, G, H
Steering gear box, linkage & boots/
lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint
I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Drive shafts and boots I Every 3,750 miles or 6 months C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
R More frequently C, E
7-13
7
Maintenance
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
:The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.
*
3
: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer per-
form the operation.
Normal Maintenance Schedule (1.6 T-GDI)
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Miles×1,000 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90
Km×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
Engine oil and engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
Fuel additives *
1
Add fuel additives every 6,000 miles or 12 months
Rotate tires
Rotate tires every 6,000 miles
Climate control air filter R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
Air cleaner filter
I
I I
R
I I I
R
I I I
R
I I I
Spark plugs
Replace every 42,000 miles
Drive belts *
2
At first, inspect at 60,000 miles or 72 months.
Thereafter, inspect every 12,000 miles or 24 months
Valve clearance *
3
Inspect every 60,000 miles or 72 months
Vacuum hose I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Engine coolant
At first, replace at 120,000 miles or 10 years :
Thereafter, replace every 30,000 miles or 24 months
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
7-14
Maintenance
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
Normal Maintenance Schedule (1.6 T-GDI) (CONT)
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Miles×1,000 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90
Km×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
Intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Battery condition I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Driveshaft and boots I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Suspension mounting bolts I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner refrigerant I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner compressor I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
7-15
7
Maintenance
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
4
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this mainte-
nance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of
power, hard starting problem, etc. replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
Normal Maintenance Schedule (1.6 T-GDI) (CONT)
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Miles×1,000 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90
Km×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
Exhaust pipe and muffler I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped) I I I
Manual transmission fluid (if equipped) I I I
Vapor hose, fuel filler cap and fuel tank I I I I I I I
Fuel tank air filter *
4
I I I I I I I
Fuel filter *
4
I I I I I I I
Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I I
Parking brake I I I I I I I
Brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
7-16
Maintenance
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions
(1.6 T-GDI)
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Engine oil and filter R Every 3,000 miles or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J, K
Air cleaner filter R More frequently C, E
Spark plugs R More frequently A, B, H, I, K
Dual clutch transmission fluid
(if equipped)
R Every 72,000 miles
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
Manual transmission fluid
(if equipped)
R Every 72,000 miles
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
Front brake disc/pads, calipers I More frequently C, D, G, H
Rear brake shoes or disc/pads I More frequently C, D, G, F
7-17
7
Maintenance
Severe Driving Conditions
A-Repeatedly driving short distances of less than 5 miles
(8 km) in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km)
in freezing temperature
B-Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-
tances
C-Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-
spread roads
D-Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E-Driving in sandy areas
F-Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
G-Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H-Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I -Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towing
J -Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
K-Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Parking brake I More frequently C, D, G, H
Steering gear box, linkage & boots/
lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint
I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Drive shafts and boots I Every 3,000 miles or 6 months C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
R More frequently C, E
7-18
Maintenance
EEXXPPLLAANNAATTIIOONN OOFF SSCCHHEEDDUULLEEDD MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE IITTEEMMSS
Engine Oil and Filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the car
is being driven in severe conditions,
more frequent oil and filter changes
are required.
Drive Belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Drive belts should be checked peri-
odically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.
Fuel Filter
A clogged-up fuel filter may limit the
vehicle driving speed, damage the
emission system, and cause the
hard starting. When a considerable
amount of foreign substances are
accumulated in the fuel tank, the fuel
filter should be replaced.
Upon installing a new fuel filter, oper-
ate the engine for several minutes,
and check the connections for any
leakages. Fuel filters should be
installed by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and
Connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and dam-
age. Have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace any damaged or leak-
ing parts immediately.
Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler
Cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those inter-
vals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure a new vapor
hose or fuel filler cap is correctly
replaced.
Vacuum Crankcase Ventilation
Hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-
dence of heat and/or mechanical
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterio-
ration. Particular attention should be
paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in con-
tact with any heat source, sharp
edges or moving component which
might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear.
Inspect all hose connections, such
as clamps and couplings, to make
sure they are secure, and that no
leaks are present. Hoses should be
replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.
Air Cleaner Filter
A genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter
is recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark Plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
Cooling System
Check cooling system components,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Engine Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
(if equipped)
Automatic transmission fluid should
not be checked under normal usage
conditions. But in severe conditions,
the fluid should be changed at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer in
accordance to the scheduled mainte-
nance at the beginning of this chap-
ter.
Automatic transmission fluid
color is basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the auto-
matic transmission fluid will begin
to look darker. This is a normal
condition and you should not
judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed color.
NOTICE
7-19
7
Maintenance
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transmission
malfunction and failure. Use
only the specified automatic
transmission fluid (refer to
"Recommended Lubricants and
Capacities" in chapter 8).
CAUTION
7-20
Maintenance
Dual Clutch Transmission
Fluid (if equipped)
Inspect the dual clutch transmission
fluid according to the maintenance
schedule.
Manual Transmission Fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the manual transmission
fluid according to the maintenance
schedule.
Brake Hoses and Lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
ed or damaged parts immediately.
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Check brake/clutch fluid level in the
brake/clutch fluid reservoir. The level
should be between the MIN and the
MAX marks on the side of the reser-
voir. Use only hydraulic brake/clutch
fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
specification.
Parking Brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake pedal
and cables.
Brake Discs, Pads, Calipers
and Rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-
rioration, or damage. Start the
engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-
nections or replace parts as neces-
sary.
Suspension Mounting Bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Steering Gear Box, Linkage &
Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint
With the vehicle stopped and the
engine off, check for excessive free-
play in the steering wheel. Check the
linkage for bends or damage. Check
the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Drive Shafts and Boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and dam-
age.
7-21
7
Maintenance
EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL
Checking the Engine Oil Level
1. Follow all of the oil manufacturer’s
precautions.
2. Be sure the vehicle is on the level
ground in P (Park) with the park-
ing brake set.If possible, block the
wheels.
3. Turn the engine on and allow the
engine to reach normal operating
temperature.
4. Turn the engine off and wait about
five minutes for the oil to return to
the oil pan.
5. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
6. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
7. If it is near or at L, add enough oil
to bring the level to F.
To prevent damage to your
engine:
• Do not overfill with engine oil.
Add oil in small quantities and
recheck level to ensure engine
is not overfilled.
• Do not spill engine oil when
adding or changing engine oil.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine
components. Wipe off spilled oil
immediately.
NOTICE
OAD076121
■ 1.6 T-GDI
OAD075062L
■ 2.0 MPI
7-22
Maintenance
Use only the specified engine oil
(refer to "Recommended
Lubricants and Capacities" in
chapter 8).
Checking the Engine Oil and
Filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
according to the Maintenance
Schedule at the beginning of this
chapter.
NOTICE
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Engine oil contains chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects
and reproductive harm. Used
engine oil may cause irritation
or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for pro-
longed periods of time. Always
protect your skin by washing
your hands thoroughly with
soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used
oil.
WARNING
OAD076122
■ 1.6 T-GDI
OAD075063L
■ 2.0 MPI
7-23
7
Maintenance
EENNGGIINNEE CCOOOOLLAANNTT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season
and before traveling to a colder cli-
mate.
Checking the Engine Coolant
Level
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between the F and the L marks on
the side of the coolant reservoir
when the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) water to bring
the level to the F mark, but do not
overfill. If frequent additions are
required, we recommend that you
see an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
for a cooling system inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only dis-
tilled (deionized) water for your
vehicle and never mix hard water in
the coolant filled at the factory.
• An improper coolant mixture can
result in severe malfunction or
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol
with phosphate based coolant to
prevent corrosion and freezing.
• Do not use alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
OAD078125
■ 1.6 T-GDI
OAD075008
■ 2.0 MPI
7-24
Maintenance
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
For mixing percentage, refer to the
following table:
Information
If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50%
water and 50% antifreeze mix is the
easiest to mix together as it will be the
same quantity of each. It is suitable to
use for most temperature ranges of
- 31°F and higher.
i
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
5°F (-15°C) 35 65
-13°F (-25°C) 40 60
-31°F (-35°C) 50 50
-49°F (-45°C) 60 40
Make sure the coolant cap is
properly closed after refilling
coolant. Otherwise the engine
could be overheated while driv-
ing.
1. Check if the coolant cap label
is straight In front.
WARNING
OTL075062
■ Engine room front view
2. Make sure that the tiny pro-
trusions inside the coolant
cap is securely interlocked.
OPDE076071
The electric motor for the cooling fan
is controlled by engine coolant tem-
perature, refrigerant pressure and
vehicle speed.As the engine coolant
temperature decreases, the electric
motor will automatically shut off.This
is a normal condition. If your vehicle
is equipped with GDI, the electric
motor for the cooling fan may begin
to operate at any time and continue
to operate until you disconnect the
negative battery cable.
7-25
7
Maintenance
The electric motor for
the cooling fan may
continue to operate
or start up when the
engine is not running
and can cause serious injury.
Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from the rotating fan
blades of the cooling fan.
WARNING
OAD076125
■ 1.6 T-GDI
OAD075009
■ 2.0 MPI
Never remove the
engine coolant reser-
voir tank/radiator cap
or the drain plug
while the engine and
radiator are hot. Hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure, causing serious
injury.
Turn the engine off and wait
until the engine cools down.
Use extreme care when remov-
ing the engine coolant reservoir
tank/radiator cap. Wrap a thick
towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to the
first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the
cap, using a thick towel, and
continue turning counterclock-
wise to remove it.
WARNING
Changing Engine Coolant
Have coolant changed by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
To prevent damage to engine
parts, put a thick towel around the
radiator cap before refilling the
coolant to prevent the coolant
from overflowing into engine
parts, such as the generator.
NOTICE
7-26
Maintenance
Do not use engine coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
Engine coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may
cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
Engine coolant may also cause
damage to paint and body trim.
WARNING
BBRRAAKKEE//CCLLUUTTCCHH FFLLUUIIDD
Checking the Brake/Clutch
Fluid Level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically.The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake/clutch fluid, clean
the area around the reservoir cap
thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch
fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add the specified
brake/clutch fluid to the MAX level.
The level will fall with accumulated
mileage. This is a normal condition
associated with the wear of the
brake/clutch linings. If the fluid level
is excessively low, have the brake/
clutch system checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not allow brake/clutch fluid
to contact the vehicle's body
paint, as paint damage will
result.
• Brake/clutch fluid, which has
been exposed to open air for an
extended time should NEVER be
used as its quality cannot be
guaranteed. It should be dis-
posed of properly.
• Do not use the wrong kind of
brake/clutch fluid. A few drops
of mineral based oil, such as
engine oil, in your brake/clutch
system can damage brake/
clutch system parts.
Information
Use only the specified brake/clutch
fluid (refer to "Recommended
Lubricants and Capacities" in chap-
ter 8).
i
NOTICE
7-27
7
Maintenance
If the brake system requires fre-
quent additions of fluid this
could indicate a leak in the
brake system. Have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Do not allow brake/clutch fluid
to come in contact with your
eyes.If brake/clutch fluid comes
in contact with your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get imme-
diate medical attention.
WARNING
OAD078140
7-28
Maintenance
WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD
Checking the Washer Fluid
Level
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
Checking the Parking Brake
Check the stroke of the parking
brake by counting the number of
"clicks" heard while fully applying it
from the released position. Also, the
parking brake alone should securely
hold the vehicle on a fairly steep
grade. If the stroke is more or less
than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 6 clicks at a force of 44
lbs (20 kg, 196 N)
To prevent serious injury or
death, take the following safety
precautions when using washer
fluid:
• Do not use engine coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
Engine coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an acci-
dent or damage to paint and
body trim.
• Do not allow sparks or flame
to contact the washer fluid or
the washer fluid reservoir.
Washer fluid may contain
alcohol and can be flamma-
ble.
• Do not drink washer fluid and
avoid contact with skin.
Washer fluid is harmful to
humans and animals.
• Keep washer fluid away from
children and animals.
WARNING
OAD075011
PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE
OAD055008
7-29
7
Maintenance
AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR
Filter Replacement
The air cleaner filter can be cleaned
for inspection using compressed air.
Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it,
as water will damage the filter.
If soiled, the air cleaner filter must be
replaced.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the
cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
OAD075015
OAD075016
OAD076013L
■ 1.6 T-GDI
OAD075014
■ 2.0 MPI
7-30
Maintenance
4. Insert the air cleaner cover in the
hinge and engage the clamp after
closing the cover.
5. Check that the cover is firmly
installed.
Information
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-
ment more often than the usual rec-
ommended intervals (refer to
"Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions" in this chapter).
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
filter removed.This will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use HYUNDAI genuine parts,
use of non-genuine parts could
damage the air flow sensor.
NOTICE
i
OJS078047
7-31
7
Maintenance
CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL AAIIRR FFIILLTTEERR
Filter Inspection
The climate control air filter should
be replaced according to the
Maintenance Schedule.If the vehicle
is operated in severely air-polluted
cities or on dusty rough roads for a
long period, it should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier.
When you replace the climate control
air filter, replace it performing the fol-
lowing procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.
1. With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides to
allow the glove box to hang freely
on the hinges.
2. Remove the support rod (1).
OAD078017N
OAD078018N
7-32
Maintenance
3. Press and hold the lock (1) on
both sides of the cover.
4. Pull out (2) the cover.
5. Replace the climate control air fil-
ter.
6. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
Install a new climate control air fil-
ter in the correct direction with the
arrow symbol (
↓↓
) facing down-
wards, to prevent noise and
reduce effectiveness.
NOTICE
OHG075041OAD075019
7-33
7
Maintenance
WWIIPPEERR BBLLAADDEESS
Blade Inspection
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wiper func-
tionality. Common sources of con-
tamination are insects, tree sap, and
hot wax treatments used by some
commercial car washes.If the blades
are not wiping properly, clean both
the window and the blades with a
clean cloth dampened with washer
fluid.
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, arms or other compo-
nents, do not:
• Use gasoline, kerosene, paint
thinner, or other solvents on or
near them.
• Attempt to move the wipers
manually.
• Use non-specified wiper blades.
Information
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi-
cult to clean.
Blade Replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manu-
ally.
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper mal-
function and failure.
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
NOTICE
OLMB073019
1. Raise the wiper arm and slightly
rotate the wiper blade assembly to
expose the plastic locking clip.
2. Press the clip (1) and slide the
blade assembly downward (2).
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
5. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
7-34
Maintenance
OLMB073020
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components,
have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace the wiper blade.
CAUTION
OLMB073021
OLMB073022
7-35
7
Maintenance
BBAATTTTEERRYY
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH to you or bystanders,
always follow these precautions
when working near or handling
the battery:
Always read and follow
instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Wear eye protection
designed to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
Keep all flames, sparks,
or smoking materials
away from the battery.
Hydrogen is always
present in battery cells,
is highly combustible,
and may explode if ignit-
ed.
Keep batteries out of
reach of children.
WARNING
Batteries contain sulfu-
ric acid which is highly
corrosive. Do not allow
acid to contact your
eyes, skin or clothing.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get imme-
diate medical attention. If acid
gets on your skin, thoroughly
wash the area. If you feel pain or
a burning sensation, get med-
ical attention immediately.
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle if your battery is
frozen.
• NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicle’s
battery cables are connected
to the battery.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
NEVER touch these compo-
nents with the engine running
or when the Engine Start/Stop
button is in the ON position.
• Leaked battery electrolyte due
to repeated driving on sharp
curves (e.g. on circuits) may
cause safety problem. Avoid
repeated driving on sharp
curves.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth
defects and reproductive harm.
Batteries also contain other
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer.
Wash hands after handling.
WARNING
7-36
Maintenance
• When you do not use the vehicle
for a long time in a low tempera-
ture area, disconnect the battery
and keep it indoors.
• Always charge the battery fully
to prevent battery case damage
in low temperature areas.
For Best Battery Service
• Keep the battery securely mount-
ed.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled acid from the bat-
tery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
Battery Recharging
NOTICE
Always follow these instruc-
tions when recharging your
vehicle's battery to avoid the
risk of SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH from explosions or acid
burns:
• Before performing mainte-
nance or recharging the bat-
tery, turn off all accessories
and place the ignition switch
to the LOCK/OFF position.
• Keep all flames, sparks, or
smoking materials away from
the battery.
• Always work outdoors or in an
area with plenty of ventilation.
• Wear eye protection when
checking the battery during
charging.
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in
a well ventilated area.
WARNING
OAD078144
7-37
7
Maintenance
By jump starting
After a jump start from a good bat-
tery, drive the vehicle for 20-30 min-
utes before it is shutoff. The vehicle
may not restart if you shut it off
before the battery had a chance to
adequately recharge. See "Jump
Starting" in chapter 6 for more infor-
mation on jump starting procedures.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health.
Dispose the battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
Reset Features
The following items may need to be
reset after the battery has been dis-
charged or the battery has been dis-
connected.
• Power Windows
• Trip Computer
• Climate Control System
• Clock
• Audio System
• Sunroof
i
• Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce
the charging rate if the battery
cells begin boiling violently.
• The negative battery cable
must be removed first and
installed last when the battery
is disconnected. Disconnect
the battery charger in the fol-
lowing order:
(1) Turn off the battery charg-
er main switch.
(2) Unhook the negative
clamp from the negative
battery terminal.
(3) Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery
terminal.
•
Always use a genuine
HYUNDAI approved battery
when you replace the battery.
7-38
Maintenance
TTIIRREESS AANNDD WWHHEEEELLSS
Tire Care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are
damaged. Worn tires can
cause loss of braking effec-
tiveness, steering control, or
traction.
• ALWAYS replace tires with the
same size as each tire that
was originally supplied with
this vehicle. Using tires and
wheels other than the recom-
mended sizes could cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics, poor vehicle control, or
negatively affect your vehi-
cle's Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) resulting in a serious
accident.
Tire failure may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident. To reduce risk of
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH,
take the following precautions:
• Inspect your tires monthly for
proper inflation as well as
wear and damage.
• The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can
be found in this manual and
on the tire label located on the
driver's side center pillar.
Always use a tire pressure
gauge to measure tire pres-
sure. Tires with too much or
too little pressure wear
unevenly causing poor han-
dling.
• Check the pressure of the
spare every time you check
the pressure of the other tires
on your vehicle.
WARNING
7-39
7
Maintenance
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver's side center
pillar.
Recommended Cold Tire
Inflation Pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. "Cold tires" means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
one mile (1.6 km).
Warm tires normally exceed recom-
mended cold tire pressures by 4 to 6
psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air
from warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-inflat-
ed. For recommended inflation pres-
sure, refer to "Tire and Wheels" in
chapter 8.
Recommended pressures must
be maintained for the best ride,
vehicle handling, and minimum
tire wear.
Over-inflation or under-inflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure that
could result in loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
Severe under-inflation can lead
to severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident. This
risk is much higher on hot days
and when driving for long peri-
ods at high speeds.
WARNING
OAD085011N
7-40
Maintenance
Check Tire Inflation Pressure
Check your tires, including the spare
tire, once a month or more.
How to check
Use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to check tire pressure. You
can not tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflat-
ed when they are under-inflated.
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem.Press the tire gauge firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement.If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire label located on
the driver's side center pillar or in this
manual. No further adjustment is
necessary. If the pressure is low, add
air until you reach the recommended
pressure. Make sure to put the valve
caps back on the valve stems.
Without the valve cap, dirt or mois-
ture could get into the valve core and
cause air leakage. If a valve cap is
missing, install a new one as soon as
possible.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. Without the valve
cap, dirt or moisture could get into
the valve core and cause air leakage.
If a valve cap is missing, install a new
one as soon as possible.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
• Under-inflation results in
excessive wear,poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation is also
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Over-inflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread,
and a greater possibility of
damage from road hazards.
CAUTION
7-41
7
Maintenance
Tire Rotation
To equalize tread wear, HYUNDAI
recommends that the tires be rotated
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage.Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible.After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness (proper torque is
79~94 lbf·ft [11~13 kgf·m]).
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Information
Tires that are asymmetrical or direc-
tional can only be installed on the
wheel in one direction. The outside
and inside of an asymmetrical tire is
not easily distinguishable. Pay careful
attention to the markings on the side-
walls of the tires, noting the "outside"
marking and also the rotating direc-
tion before installing them on the
vehicle.
i
ODH073802
■ Without a spare tire
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.
WARNING
7-42
Maintenance
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Improper wheel weights can dam-
age your vehicle's aluminum
wheels. Use only approved wheel
weights.
Tire Replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread.This shows there is
less than 2/32 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire.Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the tread surface to
become level with the tread wear
indicators before replacing the tire.
NOTICE
OLMB073027
Tread wear indicator
To reduce the risk of DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY:
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are
damaged. Worn tires can
cause loss of braking effec-
tiveness, steering control, and
traction.
• Always replace tires with the
same size as each tire that
was originally supplied with
this vehicle. Using tires and
wheels other than the recom-
mended sizes could cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics, poor vehicle control, or
negatively affect your vehi-
cle's Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) resulting in a serious
accident.
• Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, HYUNDAI recommends
that tires be replaced after six
(6) years of normal service.
WARNING
7-43
7
Maintenance
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
Wheel Replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
Tire Traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when the tread depth is at
least 2/32 inch (1.6 mm). To reduce
the possibility of losing control, slow
down whenever there is rain, snow or
ice on the road.
• When replacing tires (or
wheels), it is recommended to
replace the two front or two
rear tires (or wheels) as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle's
handling.
• Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading con-
ditions can accelerate the
aging process. Failure to fol-
low this warning may cause
sudden tire failure, which
could lead to a loss of vehicle
control resulting in an acci-
dent.
The original tire should be
repaired or replaced as soon as
possible to avoid failure of the
spare and loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.The
compact spare tire is for emer-
gency use only. Do not operate
your vehicle over 50 mph (80
km/h) when using the compact
spare tire.
WARNING
7-44
Maintenance
Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
2.Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
205/55R16 91H
205 - Tire width in millimeters.
55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
91 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
OLMB073028
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
7-45
7
Maintenance
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one.The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.5J X 16
6.5 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire.This symbol corresponds to that
tire’s designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN :Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over six years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1418 represents
that the tire was produced in the 14th
week of 2018.
Speed
Rating
Symbol
Maximum Speed
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (300 km/h)
7-46
Maintenance
4.Tire ply composition and
material
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible infla-
tion pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire.Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREAD WEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
7-47
7
Maintenance
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
Temperature - A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grade C
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, over-inflation,
or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination,
can cause heat build-up and
possible sudden tire failure.
This may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
WARNING
7-48
Maintenance
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure
The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight
This means the combined weight of
optional accessories. Some exam-
ples of optional accessories are
automatic transmission, power
seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio
The relationship of a tire's height to
its width.
Belt
A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the
tread.Cords may be made from steel
or other reinforcing materials.
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires
wrapped by steel cords that hold the
tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire
A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of the
tread.
Cold Tire Pressure
The amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire
has built up heat from driving.
Curb Weight
This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional
equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings
A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in com-
pliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes
the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which
can also identify the tire manufactur-
er, production plant, brand and date
of production.
GVWR
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT
Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Front Axle.
GAWR RR
Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Rear axle.
Intended Outboard Sidewall
The side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
7-49
7
Maintenance
Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure.
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer
as primarily intended for use on light-
weight trucks or multipurpose pas-
senger vehicles.
Load ratings
The maximum load that a tire is rated
to carry for a given inflation pressure.
Load Index
An assigned number ranging from 1
to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum air pressure to which
a cold tire may be inflated.The max-
imum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating
The load rating for a tire at the maxi-
mum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight
The number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).
Occupant Distribution
Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall
An asymmetrical tire has a particular
side that faces outward when mount-
ed on a vehicle. The outward facing
sidewall bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) tire
A tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and multipur-
pose vehicles.
Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber,
chemicals, fabric and steel or other
materials, that, when mounted on an
automotive wheel provides the trac-
tion and contains the gas or fluid that
sustains the load.
Pneumatic options weight
The combined weight of installed
regular production options weighing
over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace,
not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, includ-
ing heavy duty breaks, ride levelers,
roof rack, heavy duty battery, and
special trim.
7-50
Maintenance
Recommended Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Rim
A metal support for a tire and upon
which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the
tread and the bead.
Speed Rating
An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Traction
The friction between the tire and the
road surface.The amount of grip pro-
vided.
Tread
The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators
Narrow bands, sometimes called
"wear bars", that show across the
tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch of
tread remains.
UTQGS
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards is a tire information sys-
tem that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight
The number of designated seating
positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68
kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage
load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire
Load on an individual tire due to curb
and accessory weight plus maximum
occupant and cargo weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and dividing by 2.
Vehicle Placard
A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the original equip-
ment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure.
7-51
7
Maintenance
All Season Tires
HYUNDAI specifies all season tires
on some models to provide good
performance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall.Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer Tires
HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on
some models to provide superior
performance on dry roads. Summer
tire performance is substantially
reduced in snow and ice. Summer
tires do not have the tire traction rat-
ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
side wall. If you plan to operate your
vehicle in snowy or icy conditions,
HYUNDAI recommends the use of
snow tires or all season tires on all
four wheels.
Snow Tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.Snow
tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)
more air pressure than the pressure
recommended for the standard tires
on the tire label on the driver’s side of
the center pillar, or up to the maxi-
mum pressure shown on the tire
sidewall, whichever is less. Do not
drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h)
when your vehicle is equipped with
snow tires.
Radial-Ply Tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radi-
al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size, and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combina-
tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling.The best rule to fol-
low is: Identical pairs of radial-ply
tires should always be used as a set
for the front tires and a set for the
rear tires.
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval in this chapter to
achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
7-52
Maintenance
Low Aspect Ratio Tires
Low aspect ratio tires, the aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because low aspect ratio tires are
optimized for handling and braking,
their sidewall is a little stiffer than a
standard tire. Also low aspect ratio
tires tend to be wider and conse-
quently have a greater contact patch
with the road surface. In some
instances they may generate more
road noise compared with standard
tires.
Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances.This may cause unusu-
al handling characteristics that
may cause loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.
WARNING
Because the sidewall of a low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
a standard tire, the rim of the
wheel and the tire itself is more
easily susceptible to damage.
Use caution when driving and
follow the guidelines below to
help minimize damage to the
wheel and tire:
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not dam-
aged.
- If the tire is subjected to a
severe impact, have the tire
and wheel inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
- Inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 1,800 miles
(3,000km).
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize tire
damage with your own eyes.
But if there is the slightest
hint of tire damage, have the
tire checked or replaced
because the tire damage may
cause air leakage from the
tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driv-
ing on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
CAUTION
7-53
7
Maintenance
FFUUSSEESS
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver's side panel
bolster, the other in the engine com-
partment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will be melted or broken.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver's side
fuse panel. Before replacing a blown
fuse, turn the engine and all switches
off, and then disconnect the negative
battery cable. Always replace a
blown fuse with one of the same rat-
ing.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem.Avoid
using the system involved and imme-
diately consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
Four kinds of fuses are used : blade
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type/Multi fuse/Battery fuse
terminal for higher amperage ratings.
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the sys-
tem.
NOTICE
i
NEVER replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly
cause a fire.
• Do not install a wire or alu-
minum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a tem-
porary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
possibly a fire.
WARNING
■ Blade type
Normal
■ Cartridge type
Blown
Normal
Blown
■ Multi fuse
Normal
Blown
■ Battery fuse terminal
Normal
Blown
OLF074075
7-54
Maintenance
Instrument Panel Fuse
Replacement
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Turn all other switches OFF.
3. Open the fuse panel cover.
4. Refer to the label on the inside of
the fuse panel cover to locate the
suspected fuse location.
5. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
in the engine compartment fuse
panel.
6. Check the removed fuse; replace
it if it is blown. Spare fuses are
provided in the instrument panel
fuse panels (or in the engine com-
partment fuse panel).
7. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
In an emergency, if you do not have
a spare fuse, use a fuse of the same
rating from a circuit you may not
need for operating the vehicle.
If the headlamps or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the engine compartment. If a fuse
is blown, it must be replaced with the
same rating.
OAD078022
OAD078021N
7-55
Maintenance
Fuse switch
Always, place the fuse switch to the
ON position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as the
audio system and digital clock must
be reset and the smart key may not
work properly.
Information
If the fuse switch is OFF, the above
message will appear.
• Always place the fuse switch in
the ON position while driving the
vehicle.
• Do not move the fuse switch
repeatedly. The fuse switch may
be damaged.
NOTICE
i
OAD078023N
OAD048144N/OIK057135L
■ Conventional cluster ■ Supervision cluster
7
7-56
Maintenance
Engine Compartment Panel
Fuse Replacement
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Turn all other switches OFF.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tap and pulling up.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace
it if it is blown.To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling it up.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
After checking the fuse box in
the engine compartment
securely close the fuse box
cover inside the engine com-
partment, until it clicks.
If the fuse box is not closed
properly, water may leak in side,
possibly causing a malfunction
with the electrical system.
CAUTION
OAD078025
OAD078148
OAD078149
■ Blade type fuse
■ Cartridge type fuse
7-57
Maintenance
Information
If the main fuse is blown, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling it up.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
Information
If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
ii
OAD078026
7
7-58
Maintenance
Fuse/Relay Panel Description
Instrument panel fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you
can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle; the information is accurate at
the time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to
the fuse box label.
i
OAD078029N
OAD078104N
7-59
7
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
HEATED MIRROR 10A Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module
WIPER 2 10A PCM, BCM
P/WINDOW RH 25A Power Window RH Relay
P/WINDOW LH 25A Power Window LH Relay, Driver Safety Power Window Module
CLUSTER 10A CLUSTER
DR LOCK 20A Door Lock/Unlock Relay, E/R Junction Block (Two Turn Unlock Relay)
MEMORY 1 10A
Driver/Passenger Door Module, Driver IMS Module, A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster,
Electro Chromic Mirror, Data Link Connector, Blind Spot Detection Radar LH/RH, Digital Clock
S/HEATER RR 15A Rear Seat Warmer Control Module
TRUNK 10A Trunk Relay
INTERIOR LAMP 10A
Room Lamp, Front Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Overhead Console Lamp, Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning
Switch, Trunk Room Lamp
A/BAG IND 7.5A Instrument Cluster, A/C Control Module
MULTI MEDIA 15A CD Player, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit
MEMORY 2 7.5A Not Used
AMP 25A AMP
P/SEAT DRV 30A Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver IMS Module
MDPS 7.5A MDPS Unit
MODULE 1 7.5A
Key Interlock, Driver/Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle, Driver/Passenger Door Module, BCM,
Driver/Passenger Outside Mirror Switch/Motor
SUNROOF 20A Sunroof Motor
SPARE 1 10A -
S/HEATER FRT 20A Front Seat Warmer Control Module
MODULE 7 7.5A Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer Control Module, Sunroof Motor, BCM
PDM 3 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module
BRAKE SWITCH 7.5A Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Control Module
7-60
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
PDM 2 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module
START 7.5A
W/O Smart Key :Transmission Range Switch, Ignition Lock Switch
With Smart Key :Transmission Range Switch, PCM
A/C 7.5A Ionizer, A/C Control Module, E/R Junction Block (A/Con Relay, Blower Relay), Gasoline PTC Relay
AIR BAG 15A SRS Control Module, Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor
MODULE 3 10A Stop Lamp Switch, BCM, Sport Mode Switch, Driver/Passenger Door Module
IG1 25A PCB Block (Fuse : ABS3, ECU5, TCU2)
PDM 1 15A Smart Key Control Module
HEATED STEERING 15A BCM
MODULE 6 7.5A BCM, Smart Key Control Module
MODULE 5 10A
Crash Pad Switch, Electro Chromic Mirror, A/T Shift Lever Indicator, A/V & Navigation Head Unit,
Audio, A/C Control Module, Console Switch LH/RH, Head Lamp Leveling Device LH/RH,
Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer Control Module, Driver IMS Module
FCA 10A FCA Module
A/CON 2 10A E/R Junction Block (Blower Relay), Blower Motor, Blower Resistor, A/C Control Module
WIPER 1 25A Wiper Motor, PCB Block (Front Wiper (Low) Relay)
WASHER 15A Multifunction Switch
MODULE 4 10A Lane keeping Assist System, Parking Assist Buzzer, BCM
SPARE 2 10A -
MODULE 2 10A
E/R Junction Block (Power Outlet Relay), USB Charging Connector, Smart Key Control Module,
BCM, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, CD Player, Power Outside Mirror Switch, AMP,
Driver Door Module, Digital Clock, Console Switch
7-61
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you
can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/ relay name and capacity.
Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle; the information is accurate at
the time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to
the fuse panel label.
i
OAD078027
OAD078132N
7-62
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
MULTI
FUSE-1
MAIN 180A Fuse : ABS1, ABS2, POWER OUTLET
MDPS 80A MDPS Unit
MULTI
FUSE-2
B+5 60A PCB Block (Fuse : ECU3, ECU4, HORN, A/C COMP, ENGINE CONTROL RELAY)
B+2 60A Smart Junction Block (Fuse : S/HEATER FRT, ARISU)
B+3 60A Smart Junction Block (Fuse : ARISU, IPS)
B+4 50A
Smart Junction Block (Fuse : S/HEATER RR, P/WINDOW LH, P/WINDOW RH, TRUNK,
SUNROOF, AMP, P/SEAT DRV)
COOLING FAN 1 60A Not Used
REAR HEATED 50A Rear Heated Relay
BLOWER 40A Blower Relay
IG1 40A Ignition Switch, E/R Junction Block (PDM #2, #3 (ACC/IG1) Relay)
IG2 40A Ignition Switch, E/R Junction Block (PDM #4 (IG2) Relay, START Relay)
FUSE
B/UP LAMP 10A
Electro Chromic Mirror, Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH, Smart Junction Block (IPS
Control Module)
POWER OUTLET 3 20A Cigarette Lighter
POWER OUTLET 2 20A Front Power Outlet
H/LAMP HI 10A BI-FUNC H/LP RLY (coil)
TCU 1 15A Not Used
VACUUM PUMP 1 20A Not Used
A/CON 10A A/Con Relay
COOLING FAN 2 40A Cooling Fan 1/2 Relay
B+1 40A
Smart Junction Block (Leak Current Autocut Device, Fuse : BRAKE SWITCH, MODULE 1,
DR LOCK, PDM 1, PDM 2)
DCT1 40A Not Used
7-63
7
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
FUSE
DCT2 40A Not Used
S/FUEL PUPMP 15A Not Used
ABS 1 40A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
ABS 2 30A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
POWER OUTLET 1 40A Power Outlet Relay
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
ECU 5 10A PCM
VACUUM PUMP 15A Not Used
SPARE 20A -
ABS 3 10A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
TCU 2 15A Transmission Range Switch, E/R Junction Block (Fuse : B/UP LAMP)
ECU 4 15A PCM
ECU 3 15A PCM
FUEL PUMP 20A Fuel Pump Relay
SENAOR 2 10A
Canister Close Valve, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, E/R Junction
Block (Cooling Fan 1/2 Relay)
ECU2 10A Not Used
ECU1 20A PCM
INJECTOR 15A Injector #1/#2/#3/#4
SENSOR 1 15A Oxygen Sensor (UP/DOWN)
IGN COIL 20A Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4
SENSOR 3 10A Fuel Pump Relay
HORN 20A Horn Relay
7-64
Maintenance
LLIIGGHHTT BBUULLBBSS
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer to replace most vehicle light
bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle
light bulbs because other parts of the
vehicle must be removed before you
can get to the bulb.This is especially
true for removing the headlamp
assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlamp
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
Information
After heavy driving, rain or washing,
headlamp and trunk lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is caused
by the temperature difference
between the lamp inside and the out-
side temperature. This is similar to the
condensation on your windows inside
your vehicle during the rain and does-
n’t indicate a problem with your vehi-
cle. If the water leaks into the lamp
bulb circuitry, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Headlamp, Parking Lamp,Turn
Signal Lamp and Side Marker
Type A
(1) Headlamp (High & Low)
(2) Daytime running lamp
(DRL)&Parking lamp
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) Side marker
i
• Prior to replacing a lamp,
depress the foot brake, move
the shift lever into P (Park)
apply the parking brake, place
the igntion switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, and take
the key with you when leaving
the vehicle to avoid sudden
movement of the vehicle and
to prevent possible electric
shock.
• Be aware the bulbs may be
hot and may burn your fin-
gers.
WARNING
OAD078077MX
7-65
7
Maintenance
Headlamp (Halogen bulb)
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids.
• Never touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause the
bulb to overheat and burst when lit.
• A bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket-connector.
5. Unsnap the headlamp bulb retain-
ing wire by pressing the end and
pushing it upward.
6. Remove the bulb from the head-
lamp assembly.
7. Install a new headlamp bulb and
snap the headlamp bulb retaining
wire into position by aligning the
wire with the groove on the bulb.
OLMB073042L
• Handle halogen bulbs with
care. Halogen bulbs contain
pressurized gas that will pro-
duce flying pieces of glass
that could cause injuries if
broken.
• Wear eye protection when
changing a bulb. Allow the
bulb to cool down before han-
dling it.
WARNING
OAD078032N
■ High/Low beam
High/Low
7-66
Maintenance
8. Connect the headlamp bulb sock-
et-connector.
9. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
Information
The headlamp aiming should be
adjusted after an accident or after the
headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Parking lamp/Daytime running
lamp (LED type)
Your vehicle is equipped with LED
lamps. LED lamps do not have
replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp
does not operate, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Parking lamp/Daytime running
lamp (bulb type)
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counter clockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counter clockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
5. Install a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
7. Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
i
OAD078033N
Parking lamp/DRL
7-67
7
Maintenance
Turn signal
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Side marker (bulb type)
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Side marker (LED type)
Your vehicle is equipped with LED
lamps. LED lamps do not have
replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp
does not operate, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
OAD078134N
Turn signal
OAD078082N
Side marker
7-68
Maintenance
Type B
(1) Headlamp (Low)
(2) Headlamp (High)
(3) Daytime running lamp (DRL)
& Parking lamp
(4) Turn signal lamp
(5) Side marker
Headlamp/Side marker/Parking
lamp/Daytime running lamp (LED
type)
Your vehicle is equipped with LED
lamps. LED lamps do not have
replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp
does not operate, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Turn signal lamp
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Side Repeater Lamp
Replacement
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OAD078078MX
OAD075035
7-69
7
Maintenance
Rear Combination Light Bulb
Replacement
Type A
(1) Tail lamp
(2) Stop/Tail lamp
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) Side marker
(5) Back-up lamp
Type B
(1) Stop (LED)
(2) Tail lamp (LED)
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) Side marker (LED)
(5) Back-up lamp
Outside lamp
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the service cover by
pulling out the service cover.
OAD078036N
■ Type A
OAD078124N
■ Type B
OAD075049
7-70
Maintenance
3. Loosen the assembly retaining
nuts.
4. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the
vehicle.
Turn signal light (Type A/Type B)
5. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
8. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
OAD075051
OAD078050N
OAD078080N
■ Type A
OAD078081N
■ Type B
Turn signal
Stop/Tail
Turn signal
Side
marker
7-71
7
Maintenance
Stop/Tail light and Side marker
(Type A)
5. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.
7. Inset a new bulb by insetring it into
the socket.
8. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Stop/Tail light and Side marker
(Type B)
Your vehicle is equipped with LED
lamps. LED lamps do not have
replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp
does not operate, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Inside lamp
Tail light (Type A)
1. Open the trunk.
2. Loosen the retaining screw of the
trunk lid cover and then remove
the cover.
3. Disconnect the connector and
then remove the nuts by turning
the nuts counter clockwise.
4. Take the light assembly out.
OAD075055
OAD078052N
OAD078056N
7-72
Maintenance
5. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket.
8. Install the light assembly to the
trunk.
9. Reinstall the nuts and connector
and then the trunk lid cover by
pushing in the screw.
Stop/Tail light (Type B)
Your vehicle is equipped with LED
lamps. LED lamps do not have
replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp
does not operate, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Backup lamp (Type A/Type B)
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
High Mounted Stop Light
Replacement
1. Open the trunk.
OAD078069N
Tail
OAD078041N
OAD075042
7-73
7
Maintenance
2. Remove the socket by turning it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots.
3. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
5. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
License Plate Light Bulb
Replacement
1. Remove the cover by pressing it
as direction of the arrows.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order.
OAD078043N
7-74
Maintenance
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interi-
or lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interi-
or lamp housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic hous-
ings.
NOTICE
■ Map lamp
OAD075044
OAD075045
■ Luggage room lamp
■ Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
OAD078047N
OAD075046
■ Room lamp
Interior Light Bulb Replacement
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the "OFF"
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
WARNING
7-75
7
Maintenance
AAPPPPEEAARRAANNCCEE CCAARREE
Exterior Care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure wash-
ers, make sure to maintain suffi-
cient distance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors
or its surrounding area directly with
a high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not oper-
ate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers)or
connectors as they may be dam-
aged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.
• Do not use any high-pressure noz-
zles, which induce either one-direct
water stream or water swirling.
Protecting your vehicle’s finish
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
materials. Make sure the drain holes
in the lower edges of the doors and
rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits. A mild soap, safe for
use on painted surfaces, should be
used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-
ish.
• Do not use strong soap, chemi-
cal detergents or hot water, and
do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or when the body of the
vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through
the windows and wet the interi-
or.
• To prevent damage to the plastic
parts, do not clean with chemi-
cal solvents or strong deter-
gents.
NOTICE
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water before getting on the
road. If braking performance is
impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
WARNING
7-76
Maintenance
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical cir-
cuits located in the engine com-
partment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
Waxing
A good coat of wax provides a barri-
er between your paint and environ-
mental contamination.
Keeping a good coat of wax on your
vehicle will help protect it.
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
als with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
ing.
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plat-
ed or anodized aluminum parts.
This may result in damage to the
protective coating and cause
discoloration or paint deteriora-
tion.
Repairing your vehicle’s finish
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body
shop applies anti-corrosion mate-
rials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
NOTICE
NOTICE
NOTICE
OLMB073082
7-77
7
Maintenance
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, acceler-
ated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
body and wheel openings with luke-
warm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be
allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rust-
ing.
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated
with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use abrasive cleaner, pol-
ishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum
wheels.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, clean the
wheels after driving on salted
roads.
• Do not wash the wheels with
high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any cleaners con-
taining acid or alkaline deter-
gents.
NOTICE
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water.If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
WARNING
7-78
Maintenance
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, HYUNDAI produces cars
of the highest quality.However, this is
only part of the job. To achieve the
long-term corrosion resistance your
vehicle can deliver, the owner’s
cooperation and assistance is also
required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro-
sion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehi-
cle is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated cor-
rosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, partic-
ularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in con-
tact with the car surfaces by moisture
that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it is slow to dry and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also acceler-
ate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these rea-
sons, it is particularly important to
keep your vehicle clean and free of
mud or accumulations of other mate-
rials.This applies not only to the vis-
ible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the vehicle.
7-79
7
Maintenance
To help prevent corrosion
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your vehicle clean and free of
corrosive materials. Attention to the
underside of the vehicle is particular-
ly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your vehicle at least
once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, pay particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accel-
erate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don’t park your car in a damp, poor-
ly ventilated garage. This creates a
favorable environment for corrosion.
This is particularly true if you wash
your vehicle in the garage or drive it
into the garage when it is still wet or
covered with snow, ice or mud. Even
a heated garage can contribute to
corrosion unless it is well ventilated
so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the atten-
tion of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings are highly corrosive
and may damage painted surfaces in
just a few hours. Always remove bird
droppings as soon as possible.
7-80
Maintenance
Interior Care
Interior general precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as
perfume and cosmetic oil, from con-
tacting the interior parts because
they may cause damage or discol-
oration. If they do contact the interior
parts, wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions for the proper
way to clean vinyl.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
• When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alco-
hol content solutions. If you use
high alcohol content solutions
or acid/ alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped off.
Cleaning the upholstery and
interior trim
Vinyl (if equipped)
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric (if equipped)
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-
tion recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected.Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may
affect the fabric's appearance and
fire-resistant properties.
Leather (if equipped)
• Feature of Seat Leather
- Leather is made from the outer
skin of an animal, which goes
through a special process to be
available for use.Since it is a nat-
ural object, each part differs in
thickness or density.
Wrinkles may appear as a natural
result of stretching and shrinking
depending on the temperature
and humidity.
- The seat is made of stretchable
fabric to improve comfort.
- The parts contacting the body are
curved and the side supporting
area is high which provides driv-
ing comfort and stability.
- Wrinkles may appear naturally
from usage. It is not a fault of the
products.
NOTICE
NOTICE
7-81
7
Maintenance
• Caring for the leather seats
- Vacuum the seat periodically to
remove dust and sand on the
seat. It will prevent abrasion or
damage of the leather and main-
tain its quality.
- Wipe the natural leather seat
cover often with dry or soft cloth.
- Use of proper leather protective
may prevent abrasion of the
cover and helps maintain the
color. Be sure to read the instruc-
tions and consult a specialist
when using leather coating or
protective agent.
- Light colored (beige, cream
beige) leather is easily contami-
nated and the stain is noticeable.
Clean the seats frequently.
- Avoid wiping with wet cloth.It may
cause the surface to crack.
• Cleaning the leather seats
- Remove all contaminations
instantly. Refer to instructions
below for removal of each con-
taminant.
- Cosmetic products (sunscreen,
foundation, etc.)
Apply cleansing cream on a cloth
and wipe the contaminate spot.
Wipe off the cream with a wet
cloth and remove water with a dry
cloth.
- Beverages (coffee, soft drink,
etc.)
Apply a small amount of neutral
detergent and wipe until contami-
nations do not smear.
- Oil
Remove oil instantly with
absorbable cloth and wipe with
stain remover used only for natu-
ral leather.
- Chewing gum
Harden the gum with ice and
remove gradually.
• Wrinkles or abrasions which
appear naturally from usage
are not covered by warranty.
• Belts with metallic acces-
sories, zippers or keys inside
the back pocket may damage
the seat fabric.
• Make sure not to wet the seat.
It may change the nature of
natural leather.
• Jeans or clothes which could
bleach may contaminate the
surface of the seat covering
fabric.
CAUTION
7-82
Maintenance
Cleaning the seat belt webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
the seat belt.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
window defroster grid.
NOTICE
7-83
7
Maintenance
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the Owner’s
Handbook & Warranty Information
booklet in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys-
tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected and maintained by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in
accordance with the maintenance
schedule in this manual.
For the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from mis-
firing during dynamometer test-
ing, turn the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system off by
pressing the ESC switch (ESC
OFF light illuminated).
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system
back on by pressing the ESC
switch again.
1. Crankcase Emission Control
System
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative Emission Control
System Including Onboard
Refueling Vapor Recovery
(ORVR)
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere. The ORVR system is
designed to allow the vapors from
the fuel tank to be loaded into a can-
ister while refueling at the gas sta-
tion, preventing the escape of fuel
vapors into the atmosphere.
NOTICE
EEMMIISSSSIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM
7-84
Maintenance
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister.When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control sole-
noid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-
orated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms-up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
3. Exhaust Emission Control
System
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle per-
formance.
When the engine starts or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to the
emission system.
Engine exhaust (carbon monox-
ide) precautions
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes. If you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind in
your vehicle, drive with all the win-
dows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poi-
soning.
WARNING
7-85
7
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
Operating precautions for cat-
alytic converters (if equipped)
The exhaust system and cat-
alytic converter are very hot
during and immediately after
the engine has been running.To
avoid SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
• Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flamma-
ble objects, such as grass,
vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle.
• Keep away from the exhaust
system and catalytic convert-
er or you may get burned.
Also, Do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust sys-
tem, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle, and do not coat
the vehicle for corrosion con-
trol. It may present a fire risk
under certain conditions.
WARNING
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
ety of automobile components
and parts, including compo-
nents found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or
emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects and repro-
ductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain or emit chem-
icals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm.
WARNING
7-86
Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
To prevent damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle, take
the following precautions:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL
for gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle
when there are signs of
engine malfunction, such as
misfire or a noticeable loss of
performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse
are coasting with the engine
off and descending steep
grades in gear with the engine
off.
• Do not operate the engine at
high idle speed for extended
periods (5 minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with
any part of the engine or
emission control system. All
inspections and adjustments
must be made by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with extremely
low fuel level. If you run out of
gasoline, it could cause the
engine to misfire and result in
excessive loading of the cat-
alytic converter.
CAUTION
7-87
7
Maintenance
CCAALLIIFFOORRNNIIAA PPEERRCCHHLLOORRAATTEE NNOOTTIICCEE
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry batteries,
must be disposed of according to Title 22 California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).
888
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
8
Dimensions..............................................................8-2
Engine......................................................................8-2
Bulb Wattage ..........................................................8-3
Tires and Wheels ...................................................8-5
Volume and Weight................................................8-6
Air Conditioning System........................................8-6
Recommended Lubricants and Capacities..........8-7
Recommended SAE viscosity number..........................8-9
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................8-10
Vehicle Certification Label .................................8-10
Tire Specification and Pressure Label .............8-11
Engine Number.....................................................8-11
Refrigerant Label.................................................8-11
Consumer Information.........................................8-12
Reporting Safety Defects ...................................8-13
DDIIMMEENNSSIIOONNSS
8-2
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
EENNGGIINNEE
Items
Suspension Type
CTBA Multi link
in (mm) in (mm)
Overall length 181.89 (4,620) 181.89 (4,620)
Overall width 70.87 (1,800) 70.87 (1,800)
Overall height 56.5 (1,435) 56.5 (1,435)
Front tread
195/65 R15 61.5 (1,563) -
205/55 R16 61.2 (1,555) -
225/45 R17 60.0 (1,549) 60.0 (1,549)
225/40 R18 - 60.8 (1,545)
Rear tread
195/65 R15 61.9 (1,572) -
205/55 R16 61.6 (1,564) -
225/45 R17 61.3 (1,558) 61.5 (1,563)
225/40 R18 - 61.4 (1,559)
Wheelbase 106.3 (2,700) 106.3 (2,700)
Items 1.6 T-GDI 2.0 MPI
Displacement
cu. in (cc)
97.09 (1,591) 121.98 (1,999)
Bore x Stroke
in. (mm)
3.03x3.36 (77x85.4) 3.18x3.82 (81x97)
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders In-line 4 cylinder In-line 4 cylinder
CTBA : coupled torsion beam axle
BBUULLBB WWAATTTTAAGGEE
8-3
88
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Light Bulb Bulb Type Wattage
Front
Type A
Headlamp
Low HB3 60
High HB3 60
Turn signal lamp PY28/8W 28/8
Side marker lamp
Bulb type W5W 5
LED type LED LED
Daytime running lamp (DRL) &
Parking lamp
Bulb type P21/5W 21/5
LED type LED LED
Side repeater lamp (Outside mirror) LED LED
Type B
Headlamp
Low LED LED
High LED LED
Turn signal lamp PY28/8W 28/8
Side marker lamp LED LED
Daytime running lamp (DRL) & Parking lamp LED LED
Side repeater lamp (Outside mirror) LED LED
Rear Type A
Tail lamp W5W 5
Tail/Stop lamp PY28/8W 28/8
Turn signal lamp PY27W 27
Side marker lamp W5W 5
8-4
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Light Bulb Bulb Type Wattage
Rear
Type B
Tail lamp LED LED
Stop lamp LED LED
Turn signal lamp PY27W 27
Side marker lamp LED LED
Back up lamp P21W 21
High mounted stop lamp W21W 21
License plate lamp W5W 5
Interior
Map lamp W10W 10
Room lamp FESTOON 8
Vanity mirror lamp FESTOON 5
Luggage lamp FESTOON 5
TTIIRREESS AANNDD WWHHEEEELLSS
8-5
88
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or not work properly.
CAUTION
If your vehicle is not equipped with a compact spare tire, your vehicle will be equipped with a Tire Mobility Kit.
Items Tire Size Wheel Size
Inflation Pressure
kPa (psi)
Wheel lug nut
torque
kgf•m
(lbf•ft, N•m)
Normal Load Maximum Load
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
195/65 R15 6.0J X 15 250 (36) 250 (36) 250 (36) 250 (36)
11~13
(79~94,
107~127)
205/55 R16 6.5J X 16 250 (36) 250 (36) 250 (36) 250 (36)
225/45 R17 7.0J X 17 230 (33) 230 (33) 230 (33) 230 (33)
225/40 R18 7.5J X 18 230 (33) 230 (33) 230 (33) 230 (33)
Compact spare tire
(if equipped)
T125/80 D15 4.0T X 15 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)
T125/80 D16 4.0T X 16 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)
• It is permissible to add 3 psi to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expect-
ed soon.
Tires typically loose 1psi (7kPa) for every 12°F temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are
expected, recheck your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
• An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level.Thus, if you
plan to drive a high-altitude area, check the tire pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a prop-
er level. (Air inflation per altitude : +2.4 psi/1 mile)
NOTICE
8-6
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
VVOOLLUUMMEE AANNDD WWEEIIGGHHTT
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.
M/T : Manual transmission
A/T : Automatic transmission
DCT : Dual clutch transmission
Items
1.6 T-GDI 2.0 MPI
M/T DCT M/T A/T
Gross vehicle weight
lbs. (kg)
3,990 (1,810) 4,057 (1,840) 3,880 (1,760)
3,924 (1,780)
Luggage volume (SAE)
cu ft (l)
14.37 (407)
Items Weight of Volume Classification
Refrigerant
oz. (g)
17.6±0.88 (500±25) R-134a
Compressor lubricant
oz. (cc)
3.88±0.35 (110±10) PAG (FD46XG)
8-7
88
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.These lubricants and
fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
RREECCOOMMMMEENNDDEEDD LLUUBBRRIICCAANNTTSS AANNDD CCAAPPAACCIITTIIEESS
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *
1
*
2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
1.6 T-GDI
4.76 US qt. (4.5 l)
API Latest (ILSAC Latest) or ACEA A5/B5
or above/SAE 5W-30
(SAE Viscosity Number)
2.0 MPI
4.23 US qt. (4.0 l)
API Latest (ILSAC Latest)/
SAE 5W-20 (SAE Viscosity Number)
Manual transmission fluid
1.6 T-GDI/
2.0 MPI
1.6~1.7 US qt. (1.5~1.6 l)
HK SYN MTF 70W (SK)
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W MTF (H.K.SHELL)
GS MTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)
(API GL-4, SAE 70W TGO-9)
Automatic transmission fluid 2.0 MPI
7.08 US qt. (6.7 l)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV,
NOCA ATF SP-IV, HYUNDAI genuine ATF
SP-IV or other brands meeting the above
specification approved by HYUNDAI Motor
Co.
Dual clutch transmission fluid 1.6 T-GDI
2.01~2.11 US qt. (1.9~2.0 l)
HK DCTF 70W (SK)
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W DCTF
(H.K.SHELL)
GS DCTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)
(API GL-4, SAE 70W)
8-8
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
*
1
: Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
: Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction.Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year's
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Coolant
1.6 T-GDI
M/T
6.45 US qt. (6.1 l)
Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Phosphate-based Ethylene glycol coolant for
aluminum radiator)
DCT
2.0 MPI
M/T
6.34 US qt. (6.0 l)
A/T
6.97 US qt. (6.6 l)
Brake/Clutch fluid
0.74~0.85 US qt.
(0.7 ~ 0.8 l)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel
14.0 US gal. (53 l)
Refer to "Fuel requirements" in the Foreword
chapter.
8-9
88
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has
an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosi-
ty engine oils can provide better fuel
economy and cold weather perform-
ance, however, higher viscosity
engine oils are required for satisfac-
tory lubrication in hot weather.
Using oils of any viscosity other than
those recommended could result in
engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the
range of temperature your vehicle
will be operated in before the next oil
change. Proceed to select the rec-
ommended oil viscosity from the
chart.
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain
plug, or dipstick before check-
ing or draining any lubricant.
This is especially important in
dusty or sandy areas and when
the vehicle is used on unpaved
roads. Cleaning the plug and
dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the
engine and other mechanisms
that could be damaged.
CAUTION
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Engine
Oil
1.6 T-GDI *
1
2.0 MPI *
2
°C
(°F)
*
1
: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a vis-
cosity grade SAE 5W-30 (API Latest (ILSAC Latest) or ACEA A5/B5 or
above). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select
the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
*
2
: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a vis-
cosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API Latest (ILSAC Latest)). However, if the
engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil
using the engine oil viscosity chart.
5W-30, 5W-40
10W-30
15W-40
20W-50
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
8-10
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR ((VVIINN))
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your car and in all legal matters
pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the passenger seat. To check
the number, open the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
The vehicle certification label
attached on the driver's side center
pillar gives the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
OAD088003N
■ VIN label
OAD085001
■ Frame number
OAD085002
VVEEHHIICCLLEE CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN
LLAABBEELL
8-11
88
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver’s
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your car.
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown in the
drawing.
The refrigerant label provides infor-
mation such as refrigerant type and
amount.
The label is located on the underside
of the hood.
EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR RREEFFRRIIGGEERRAANNTT LLAABBEELL
((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
TTIIRREE SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN AANNDD
PPRREESSSSUURREE LLAABBEELL
OAD085011N
OAD078106N
OAD086012
■ 1.6 T-GDI
OAD085009L
■ 2.0 MPI
8-12
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Eastern Region:
Connecticut, Delaware,
Maine, Massachusetts, New
Hampshire, New Jersey, New York,
Pennsylvania, Rhode Island,
Vermont.
Eastern Region
1122 Cranbury South River Road
Jamesburg, NJ 08831
(800) 633-5151
Southern Region:
Florida, Georgia, Maryland, North
Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia,
West Virginia.
Southern Region
3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway
Suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066
(800) 633-5151
South Central Region:
Alabama, Arkansas, Louisiana,
Mississippi, New Mexico, Oklahoma,
Tennessee, Texas.
South Central Region
1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400
Coppell, TX 75019
(800) 633-5151
Central Region:
Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Kentucky,
Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska,
North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,
Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.
Central Region
2 Trans Am Plaza Dr #500 Oakbrook
Terrace, IL 60181
(800) 633-5151
Western Region:
Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, California,
Colorado, Idaho, Montana, Nevada,
Oregon, Utah, Washington,
Wyoming.
Western Region
10550 Talbert Avenue P.O.Box
20850 Fountain Valley, California
92728-0850
(800) 633-5151
CCOONNSSUUMMEERR IINNFFOORRMMAATTIIOONN
This consumer information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration of the U.S.Department of Transportation.Your HYUNDAI dealer will help answer any questions
you may have as you read this information.
HYUNDAI motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owner’s Manual, particularly
the information under the headings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARNING".
If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, please contact your near-
est HYUNDAI Motor America Regional Office as listed in the following:
8-13
88
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying HYUNDAI
MOTOR AMERICA.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov;
download the SaferCar mobile application;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Ave, SE,
West Building Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual prob-
lems between you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.
RREEPPOORRTTIINNGG SSAAFFEETTYY DDEEFFEECCTTSS
I
Index
I
I-2
Accessing your vehicle .....................................................3-3
Immobilizer System....................................................3-11
Remote key...................................................................3-3
Remote key precautions ...............................................3-5
Smart key......................................................................3-6
Smart key precautions ..................................................3-9
Air bag warning labels....................................................2-67
Air bags...........................................................................2-43
Additional safety precautions.....................................2-66
Air bag collision sensors ............................................2-60
Air bag inflation conditions .......................................2-62
Air bag non-inflation conditions ................................2-63
Air bag warning labels ...............................................2-67
Curtain air bags ..........................................................2-48
Do not install a child restraint on the front
passenger seat..........................................................2-59
Driver's air bag ...........................................................2-45
Driver's knee airbag....................................................2-45
How does the air bags system operate? .....................2-49
Occupant classification system (OCS).......................2-55
Passenger's front air bag.............................................2-45
Side air bags ...............................................................2-47
SRS Care ....................................................................2-65
SRS components and functions..................................2-49
What to expect after an air bag inflates .....................2-54
Where are the air bags?..............................................2-45
Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision ...............2-60
Air cleaner.......................................................................7-29
Air conditioning system specification ..............................8-6
Airconditioning system
Automatic climate control system............................3-123
Manual climate control system ................................3-114
Antenna .............................................................................4-2
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .......................................5-42
Appearance care..............................................................7-75
Exterior care ...............................................................7-75
Interior care ................................................................7-80
Armrest (Rear seats) .......................................................2-14
Audio (Display Audio)/Video/Navigation System
(AVN) ............................................................................4-4
Audio remote control........................................................4-3
Audio system
Audio remote control ...................................................4-3
Auto defogging system .................................................3-137
Auto door lock/unlock features ......................................3-15
Impact sensing door unlock .......................................3-15
Shift lever auto door lock...........................................3-15
Speed sensing door lock.............................................3-15
Auto light position ..........................................................3-99
Index
A
I-3
Automatic climate control system ................................3-123
Air conditioning .......................................................3-130
Air Conditioning refrigerant label............................3-134
Air intake control .....................................................3-129
Automatic heating and air conditioning...................3-124
Fan speed control .....................................................3-130
Manual heating and air conditioning .......................3-125
Mode selection .........................................................3-126
OFF mode.................................................................3-131
System maintenance.................................................3-133
Temperature control .................................................3-128
Automatic transmission ..................................................5-19
Good driving practices ...............................................5-24
Manual shift mode......................................................5-22
Shift lock system ........................................................5-23
Shift-lock release........................................................5-23
Automatic Ventilation ...................................................3-139
Aux, USB and iPod ..........................................................4-2
Battery.............................................................................7-35
Battery recharging ......................................................7-36
Battery saver function...................................................3-105
Before driving ...................................................................5-4
Blade type fuse ...............................................................7-56
Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW) system ...............5-54
Blue Link
®
center ...........................................................3-24
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology ......................................4-4
Brake system...................................................................5-39
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)...................................5-42
Disc brakes wear indicator.........................................5-40
Electronic stability control (ESC) ..............................5-44
Good braking practices ..............................................5-49
Hill-start assist control (HAC) ...................................5-49
Parking brake..............................................................5-40
Power brakes ..............................................................5-39
Rear drum brakes .......................................................5-40
Vehicle stability management (VSM) ........................5-48
Brake/clutch fluid ...........................................................7-27
Bulb replacement
Front parking lamp.....................................................7-64
Front side marker lamp ..............................................7-64
Front turn signal lamp ................................................7-64
Headlamp....................................................................7-64
High mounted stop light replacement ........................7-72
Interior light bulb .......................................................7-73
License plate light bulb ..............................................7-73
Rear combination light bulb.......................................7-69
Side repeater lamp......................................................7-68
Bulb wattage .....................................................................8-3
Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button..................5-9
I
Index
B
I-4
Capacities (Lubricants) .....................................................3-7
Care
Exterior care ...............................................................7-75
Interior care ................................................................7-80
Tire care......................................................................7-38
Cartridge type fuse..........................................................7-56
Center console storage..................................................3-140
Central door lock switch.................................................3-14
Certification label ...........................................................8-10
Chains
Tire chains ................................................................5-137
Changing a tire with TPMS............................................6-13
Checking tire inflation pressure......................................7-40
Child restraint system (CRS)..........................................2-33
Booster seats...............................................................2-36
Children always in the rear ........................................2-33
Forward-facing child restraint system........................2-35
Installing a child restraint system (CRS) ...................2-36
Lower anchors and tether for children
(LATCH system) .....................................................2-37
Rearward-facing child restraint system......................2-34
Securing a child restraint seat with
"Tether Anchor" system ..........................................3-39
Securing a child restraint system with the
LATCH anchors system ..........................................2-38
Securing a child restraint with a lap/shoulder belt.....3-40
Selecting a child restraint system (CRS) ...................2-34
Child-protector rear door locks.......................................3-16
Climate control air filter .................................................7-31
Clock .............................................................................3-147
Clothes hanger ..............................................................3-147
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ................3-53
Compact spare tire replacement .....................................7-43
Coolant............................................................................7-23
Cooling fluid, see engine coolant ...................................7-23
Crankcase emission control system................................7-83
Cruise control system....................................................5-113
Cup holder.....................................................................3-142
Curtain air bags...............................................................2-48
Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel
illumination..................................................................3-55
Dashboard, see instrument cluster ..................................3-53
Day/night rearview mirror ..............................................3-23
Daytime running light (DRL) .........................................3-99
Defogging (Windshield) ...............................................3-134
Defroster (Rear window) ..............................................3-113
Defrosting (Windshield) ...............................................3-134
Dimensions .......................................................................8-2
Dinghy towing ................................................................6-37
Display illumination, see instrument panel
illumination..................................................................3-55
Displays, see instrument cluster .....................................3-53
Index
D
C
I-5
Door locks.......................................................................3-12
Auto door lock/unlock features..................................3-15
Central door lock switch ............................................3-14
Child-protector rear door locks ..................................3-16
Door lock button ........................................................3-13
Mechanical key ..........................................................3-12
Remote key.................................................................3-12
Safe Exit Assist (SEA) system ...................................3-16
Smart key....................................................................3-13
Drinks holders, see cup holders....................................3-142
Drive mode integrated control system............................5-51
Driver assist system
Rear view monitor ....................................................3-112
Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system ....................5-109
Driver position memory system .....................................3-18
Driver's air bag................................................................2-45
Driver's knee airbag ........................................................2-45
Driving at night.............................................................5-135
Driving in flooded areas ...............................................5-136
Driving in the rain.........................................................5-135
Dual clutch transmission.................................................5-26
Good driving practices ...............................................5-37
Manual shift mode......................................................5-35
Shift lock system ........................................................5-36
Shift-lock release........................................................5-36
Transmission temperature and warning message.......5-28
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with HomeLink
®
system,
compass and Blue Link
®
.............................................3-24
Electric Power Steering (EPS)........................................3-21
Electronic stability control (ESC)...................................5-44
Emergency towing ..........................................................6-38
Emission control system .................................................7-83
Crankcase emission control system ...........................7-83
Evaporative emission control System includinding
onboard refueling vapor recovery (ORVR) ............7-83
Exhaust emission control system ...............................7-84
Engine compartment..................................................1-6, 7-3
Engine compartment panel fuse replacement.................7-57
Engine coolant ................................................................7-23
Engine coolant temperature gauge .................................3-56
Engine number ................................................................8-11
Engine oil........................................................................7-21
Engine specification..........................................................8-2
Engine start/stop button ....................................................5-9
Evaporative emission control System includinding
onboard refueling vapor recovery (ORVR).................7-83
Exhaust emission control system....................................7-84
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items.................7-18
Exterior care....................................................................7-75
Exterior lights .................................................................3-99
I
Index
E
I-6
Exterior overview
Front .............................................................................1-2
Rear ..............................................................................1-3
Flat tire
Jack and tools .............................................................6-15
Jack label ....................................................................6-21
Spare tires...................................................................6-15
Tire Mobility Kit ........................................................6-22
Floor mat anchor(s).......................................................3-148
Fluid
Brake/clutch fluid.......................................................7-27
Washer fluid ...............................................................7-28
Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system
Detect vehicle.............................................................5-73
Detect vehicle and pedestrian.....................................5-86
Front lamps ...................................................................3-106
Front seat adjustment........................................................2-6
Fuel filler door ................................................................3-49
Fuel gauge.......................................................................3-57
Fuel requirements .............................................................F-7
Fuse/relay panel description
Engine compartment fuse panel.................................7-62
Instrument panel fuse panel .......................................7-59
Fuses ...............................................................................7-53
Blade type fuse...........................................................7-56
Cartridge type fuse .....................................................7-56
Engine compartment panel fuse replacement ............7-57
Fuse switch.................................................................7-55
Fuse/relay panel description.......................................7-59
Instrument panel fuse replacement.............................7-54
Main fuse....................................................................7-57
Multi fuse ...................................................................7-58
Gauges.............................................................................3-56
Glove box......................................................................3-140
Hazard warning flasher.....................................................6-2
Hazardous driving conditions .......................................5-134
Head restraints ................................................................2-15
Headlamp delay function..............................................3-105
Headlamp position ........................................................3-100
Headlight bulb replacement............................................7-64
Heater
Automatic climate control system............................3-123
Manual climate control system ................................3-114
Height adjustment ...........................................................2-25
High Beam Assist (HBA) .............................................3-101
High beam operation.....................................................3-101
Index
F
G
H
I-7
Highway driving ...........................................................5-136
Hill-start assist control (HAC)........................................5-49
Hood................................................................................3-43
Horn ................................................................................3-22
How to use this manual ....................................................F-6
If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly.........6-4
If the engine overheats......................................................6-7
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing...................6-3
If the engine stalls while driving ......................................6-3
If the engine turns over normally but doesn't start...........6-4
If the engine will not start.................................................6-4
If you have a flat tire ......................................................6-15
If you have a flat tire while driving..................................6-3
Ignition switch
Engine Start/Stop button ..............................................5-9
Key ignition switch ......................................................5-6
Immobilizer System ........................................................3-11
Impact sensing door unlock............................................3-15
Improtant safety precautions.............................................2-2
Air bag hazards ............................................................2-2
Always wear your seat belt ..........................................2-2
Control your speed .......................................................2-3
Driver distraction..........................................................2-2
Keep your vehicle in safe condition.............................2-3
Restrain all children .....................................................2-2
In case of emergency while driving..................................6-3
Inside rearview mirror ....................................................3-23
Instrument cluster ...........................................................3-53
Gauges ........................................................................3-56
Instrument panel illumination ....................................3-55
LCD display messages ...............................................3-73
Transmission shift indicator .......................................3-60
Trip computer....................................................3-91,3- 95
Warnings and indicator lights.....................................3-61
Instrument panel fuse replacement .................................7-54
Instrument panel overview ...............................................1-5
Interior care.....................................................................7-80
Interior features
Clock ........................................................................3-147
Clothes hanger..........................................................3-147
Cup holder ................................................................3-142
Floor mat anchor(s) ..................................................3-148
Power outlet..............................................................3-144
Sunvisor....................................................................3-143
USB charger .............................................................3-147
Wireless cellular phone charging system .................3-145
Interior lights.................................................................3-106
Interior lamp AUTO cut ...........................................3-106
Interior overview...............................................................1-4
I
Index
I
I-8
Jack and tools..................................................................6-15
Jump starting.....................................................................6-4
Label
Regrigerent label ........................................................8-10
Tire loading information label..................................5-142
Tire sidewall labeling .................................................7-44
Tire specification and pressure label..........................8-11
Vehicle certification label...........................................8-10
Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system .............................5-100
LCD display (for supervision cluster)
LCD display control...................................................3-79
LCD display modes....................................................3-80
User settings mode .....................................................3-83
LCD display control .......................................................3-79
LCD display modes ........................................................3-80
Light................................................................................3-99
Auto light position......................................................3-99
Battery saver function ..............................................3-105
Daytime running light (DRL) ....................................3-99
Exterior lights.............................................................3-99
Front lamps...............................................................3-106
Headlamp delay function .........................................3-105
Headlamp position....................................................3-100
High Beam Assist (HBA).........................................3-101
High beam operation ................................................3-101
Lighting control..........................................................3-99
Map lamp..................................................................3-106
One-touch lane change function...............................3-104
Parking lamp position ..............................................3-100
Rear room lamp........................................................3-107
Room lamp ...............................................................3-106
Trunk room lamp......................................................3-107
Turn signals ..............................................................3-104
Vanity mirror lamp ...................................................3-108
Welcome system.......................................................3-108
Light bulbs ......................................................................7-64
Lubricants and capacities..................................................8-7
Main fuse ........................................................................7-57
Maintenance
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............7-18
Maintenance services ...................................................7-4
Owner maintenance......................................................7-5
Tire maintenance ........................................................7-44
Maintenance schedule
1.6 T-GDI ...................................................................7-13
2.0 MPI.........................................................................7-8
Maintenance services........................................................7-4
Index
J
L
M
I-9
Manual climate control system .....................................3-114
Air conditioning........................................................3-119
Air Conditioning refrigerant label............................3-122
Air intake control......................................................3-118
Fan speed control......................................................3-119
Heating and air conditioning ....................................3-115
MAX A/C-Level.......................................................3-117
Mode selection..........................................................3-116
System maintenance.................................................3-121
Temperature control..................................................3-117
Manual transmission .......................................................5-16
Downshifting ..............................................................5-17
Good driving practices ...............................................5-18
Using the clutch..........................................................5-16
Map lamp ......................................................................3-106
Mirrors ............................................................................3-23
Adjusting the side view mirrors.................................3-32
Blind spot mirror ........................................................3-31
Blue Link
®
center.......................................................3-24
Day/night rearview mirror..........................................3-23
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with HomeLink
®
system, compass and Blue Link
®
...........................3-24
Folding the outside rearview mirror...........................3-32
Inside rearview mirror................................................3-23
Reverse parking aid function .....................................3-33
Side view mirrors .......................................................3-30
Moonroof, see sunroof....................................................3-39
Multi fuse........................................................................7-58
Multimedia system............................................................4-2
Aux, USB and iPod......................................................4-2
Antenna ........................................................................4-2
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology..................................4-4
Audio (Display Audio)/Video/Navigation System
(AVN) ........................................................................4-4
Odometer.........................................................................3-58
Oil (Engine) ....................................................................7-21
Outside temperature gauge .............................................3-59
Owner maintenance ..........................................................7-5
Parking brake.........................................................5-40, 7-28
Parking lamp position ...................................................3-100
Passenger's front air bag .................................................2-45
Power brakes...................................................................5-39
Power outlet ..................................................................3-144
Power window lock switch.............................................3-38
Pre-tensioner seat belt.....................................................2-27
I
Index
P
O
I-10
Range ..............................................................................3-58
Rear center seatbelt.........................................................2-29
Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning (RCCW)
system ..........................................................................5-64
Rear seats
Armrest.......................................................................2-14
Folding the rear seat...................................................2-12
Rear view monitor.........................................................3-112
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...................7-39
Recommended lubricants and capacities..........................8-7
Recommended SAE viscosity number.........................8-9
Remote key .......................................................................3-3
Battery replacement......................................................3-6
Removable towing hook .................................................6-38
Replacement light bulb ...................................................7-64
Reverse parking aid function..........................................3-33
Rocking the vehicle ......................................................5-134
Room lamp....................................................................3-106
Rotation (Tire) ................................................................7-41
Safe Exit Assist (SEA) system .......................................3-16
Safety messages................................................................F-6
Scheduled maintenance services.......................................7-7
Seat belt warning light....................................................2-22
Seat belts .........................................................................2-21
3-point system with convertible locking retractor
(Rear passenger's side)............................................2-25
3-point system with emergency locking retractor
(Driver's side)..........................................................2-24
Additional seat belt safety precautions ......................2-30
Care of seat belts ........................................................2-32
Do not lie down..........................................................2-32
Height adjustment ......................................................2-25
Keep belts clean and dry ............................................2-32
One person per belt ....................................................2-32
Periodic inspection .....................................................2-32
Pre-tensioner seat belt ................................................2-27
Rear center seatbelt ....................................................2-29
Seat belt restraint system............................................2-24
Seat belt safety precautions........................................2-21
Seat belt use and children...........................................2-30
Seat belt use during pregnancy ..................................2-30
Seat belt warning light ...............................................2-22
Transporting an injured person ..................................2-32
When to replace seat belts..........................................2-32
Seat warmers...................................................................2-19
Seatback pocket ..............................................................2-12
Index
R
S
I-11
Seats ..................................................................................2-4
Armrest (Rear seats)...................................................2-14
Head restraints............................................................2-15
Manual adjustment (Front seats)..................................2-7
Power adjustment (Front seats)....................................2-9
Rear seats....................................................................2-12
Safety precautions ........................................................2-5
Seat warmers ..............................................................2-19
Seatback pocket..........................................................2-12
Shift lever auto door lock ...............................................3-15
Shift lock system ...................................................5-23, 5-36
Shift-lock release...................................................5-23, 5-36
Side air bags....................................................................2-47
Side view mirrors............................................................3-30
Sliding armrest..............................................................3-140
Smart cruise control system..........................................5-118
Smart key ..........................................................................3-6
Battery replacement....................................................3-10
Smart trunk .....................................................................3-46
Smooth cornering..........................................................5-135
Snow tires .....................................................................5-137
Spare tire
Compact spare tire replacement .................................7-43
Special driving conditions ............................................5-134
Driving at night ........................................................5-135
Driving in flooded areas...........................................5-136
Driving in the rain ....................................................5-135
Hazardous driving conditions ..................................5-134
Highway driving.......................................................5-136
Rocking the vehicle..................................................5-134
Smooth cornering .....................................................5-135
Speed sensing door lock .................................................3-15
Speedometer....................................................................3-56
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start ...................6-4
Steering wheel.................................................................3-21
Electric Power Steering (EPS) ...................................3-21
Horn............................................................................3-22
Tilt steering/Telescopic steering.................................3-21
Steering wheel audio control ............................................4-3
Storage compartment ....................................................3-139
Center console storage .............................................3-140
Glove box .................................................................3-140
Sliding armrest .........................................................3-140
Sunglass holder ........................................................3-141
Sunglass holder .............................................................3-141
Sunroof............................................................................3-39
Sunroof inside air recirculation ....................................3-139
Sunvisor ........................................................................3-143
I
Index
I-12
Tachometer......................................................................3-56
Theft alarm system .........................................................3-17
Tilt steering/Telescopic steering .....................................3-21
Tire chains.....................................................................5-137
Tire loading information label ......................................5-142
Tire Mobility Kit.............................................................6-22
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ........................6-9
Changing a tire with TPMS .......................................6-13
Low tire pressure LCD display with position
indicator...................................................................6-11
Low tire pressure telltale ............................................6-11
TPMS malfunction indicator......................................6-12
Tire rotation ....................................................................7-41
Tire specification and pressure label ..............................8-11
Tires and wheels .............................................................7-38
All season tires ...........................................................7-51
Checking tire inflation pressure .................................7-40
Compact spare tire replacement .................................7-43
Low aspect ratio tires .................................................7-52
Radial-ply tires ...........................................................7-51
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...............7-39
Snow tires...................................................................5-51
Summer tires ..............................................................7-51
Tire care......................................................................7-38
Tire maintenance ........................................................7-44
Tire replacement.........................................................7-42
Tire rotation................................................................7-41
Tire sidewall labeling .................................................7-44
Tire terminology and definitions................................7-48
Tire traction ................................................................7-43
Wheel alignment and tire balance..............................7-42
Wheel replacement.....................................................7-43
Tires and wheels ...............................................................8-5
Towing ............................................................................6-36
Trailer towing................................................................5-146
Transmission shift indicator............................................3-60
Transmission temperature and warning message ...........5-28
Trip computer
Conventional cluster...................................................3-91
Supervision cluster .....................................................3-95
Trunk...............................................................................3-44
Emergency trunk safety release .................................3-45
Smart trunk.................................................................3-46
Trunk room lamp ..........................................................3-107
Turn signals...................................................................3-104
USB charger..................................................................3-147
User settings mode..........................................................3-83
Index
T
U
I-13
Vanity mirror lamp........................................................3-108
Vehicle break-in process...................................................F-9
Vehicle certification label ...............................................8-10
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders ...........F-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)..............................8-10
Vehicle load limit..........................................................5-141
Tire loading information label..................................5-142
Vehicle modifications .......................................................F-9
Vehicle stability management (VSM).............................5-48
Volume and weight ...........................................................8-6
Warnings and indicator lights .........................................3-61
Washer fluid....................................................................7-28
Welcome system ...........................................................3-108
Wheel alignment and tire balance ..................................7-42
Wheel replacement .........................................................7-43
Windows .........................................................................3-34
Auto down window ....................................................3-36
Auto up/down window...............................................3-36
Automatic reverse ......................................................3-37
Power window lock switch ........................................3-38
To reset the power windows.......................................3-36
Windshield defrosting and defogging...........................3-134
Windshield washers.......................................................3-111
Windshield wipers.........................................................3-110
Winter driving ...............................................................5-137
Snow tires.................................................................5-137
Tire chains ................................................................5-137
Wiper blades replacement...............................................7-33
Wipers and washers ......................................................3-110
Windshield washers ..................................................3-111
Windshield wipers ....................................................3-110
Wireless cellular phone charging system......................3-145
I
Index
V
W
